U.S. patent application number 09/805099 was filed with the patent office on 2005-05-12 for methods for improving the performance of fabric wrinkle control compositions.
Invention is credited to Alwart, Todd Stephen, Behrens, Carlos Henrique, Boehm, Elise Marie, Davis, Richard Mark, Dinniwell, Alan Robert, Epstein, Daniel Kalman, Frankenbach, Gayle Marie, McDonell, Matthew James, Schmidt, Kristin Lynne, Trinh, Toan, Turner, Wenetta Marie, Wittman, Steven Eugene, Woelker, Suzanne Kimberly.
Application Number | 20050098759 09/805099 |
Document ID | / |
Family ID | 34315970 |
Filed Date | 2005-05-12 |
United States Patent
Application |
20050098759 |
Kind Code |
A1 |
Frankenbach, Gayle Marie ;
et al. |
May 12, 2005 |
Methods for improving the performance of fabric wrinkle control
compositions
Abstract
The present invention provides methods for improving the
performance of a consumer wrinkle control composition by making the
composition available to the consumer and providing information to
the consumer concerning the use of the composition to control
wrinkles in fabrics without the application of heat. Information
may be provided by teaching educational elements and disseminating
educational elements to consumers in an efficient, effective, and
affordable manner as well as techniques for heightening consumer
awareness of the product. The information that is provided to the
consumer may concerns the use of the composition to remove or
control wrinkles in fabrics without the application of heat,
instructions for the proper use of the product, the product's
effectiveness, the appearance of the fabric in the finished state
after treatment, how the product can be incorporated into the
consumer's everyday habits and lifestyles, additional non-wrinkle
related benefits that may be achieved with the product and how the
composition can be effectively and safely used by most members of
the consumer's household. Also provided are methods for prolonging
or extending the useful life of fabric items that require frequent
and repeated laundering processes and that are prone to cause
incremental damage to fabric fibers. The useful life of such fabric
items is prolonged by enabling the item to be revitalized or
renewed for rewear without laundering, thus reducing the number of
launderings and the resulting damage to fabric fibers over a given
period of time.
Inventors: |
Frankenbach, Gayle Marie;
(Cincinnati, OH) ; Trinh, Toan; (Maineville,
OH) ; Epstein, Daniel Kalman; (Cincinnati, OH)
; Schmidt, Kristin Lynne; (Cincinnati, OH) ;
Alwart, Todd Stephen; (Greer, SC) ; Boehm, Elise
Marie; (Cincinnati, OH) ; Dinniwell, Alan Robert;
(Mason, OH) ; Turner, Wenetta Marie; (West
Chester, OH) ; McDonell, Matthew James; (West
Chester, OH) ; Wittman, Steven Eugene; (Middletown,
OH) ; Woelker, Suzanne Kimberly; (Savannah, GA)
; Behrens, Carlos Henrique; (Cincinnati, OH) ;
Davis, Richard Mark; (Mason, OH) |
Correspondence
Address: |
THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY DIVISION
WINTON HILL TECHNICAL CENTER - BOX 161
6110 CENTER HILL AVENUE
CINCINNATI
OH
45224
US
|
Family ID: |
34315970 |
Appl. No.: |
09/805099 |
Filed: |
March 13, 2001 |
Related U.S. Patent Documents
|
|
|
|
|
|
Application
Number |
Filing Date |
Patent Number |
|
|
60230859 |
Sep 7, 2000 |
|
|
|
Current U.S.
Class: |
252/8.91 |
Current CPC
Class: |
D06M 15/643 20130101;
D06M 2200/20 20130101; D06M 2200/40 20130101; D06M 13/005 20130101;
D06M 15/647 20130101; D06M 23/06 20130101; D06M 15/11 20130101;
D06M 7/00 20130101 |
Class at
Publication: |
252/008.91 |
International
Class: |
D06M 010/00 |
Claims
What is claimed is:
1. A method for improving the performance that may be achieved by a
consumer using a fabric wrinkle control composition, the method
comprising the steps of: providing an aqueous wrinkle control
composition, said composition providing wrinkle control in fabrics
without the application of heat to the fabrics; and providing
information to a consumer concerning the use of the composition to
control wrinkles.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the composition comprises an
organic solvent that is less than about 15% by weight of the
composition.
3. The method of claim 2 wherein said solvent is water soluble
and/or water miscible.
4. The method of claim 2, wherein the composition comprises an
organic solvent that is less than about 7% by weight of the
composition.
5. The method of claim 3, wherein the composition comprises an
organic solvent that is less than about 5% by weight of the
composition.
6. The method of claim 2, wherein said solvent has less than about
10 carbon atoms and is selected from the group consisting of
alcohol, diol, polyol, and mixtures thereof.
7. The method of claim 2, wherein said composition has a flash
point of greater than about 60.degree. C.
8. The method of claim 1, wherein the composition has a uniform
composition when at rest.
9. The method of claim 1, wherein the composition comprises a
perfume.
10. The method of claim 1, wherein the composition comprises a
starch.
11. The method of claim 1, wherein the composition is provided in a
container and the information is provided as a set of instructions
associated with the container.
12. The method of claim 1, wherein the information provided to the
consumer concerns the capacity of the composition to remove
wrinkles from fabric.
13. The method of claim 1, wherein the information provided to the
consumer comprises instructions for using the composition to
control wrinkles.
14. The method of claim 13, wherein the instructions for using the
composition comprise the steps of applying the composition to a
fabric and manipulating the fabric to remove wrinkles and allowing
the treated fabric to dry.
15. The method of claim 14, wherein the instructions comprise the
instruction to use a device to dry the fabric with a stream of dry
air.
16. The method of claim 14, wherein the fabric is manipulated by
hand.
17. The method of claim 16, wherein fabric manipulation comprises
pulling, tugging, shaking, snapping, smoothing, pressing the fabric
between the hands, or a combination thereof.
18. The method of claim 16, wherein the instructions comprise an
instruction to pinch challenge areas of the fabric between fingers
and pull to apply extra smoothing force or reinforce creases, said
challenge areas comprising intentional creases, pleats, collars,
plackets, hems, embroidery, ruffles, appliques, additional fabric
decorations, and/or cuffs.
19. The method of claim 1, wherein the information provided to the
consumer concerns fabric care benefits other than wrinkle control
that can be derived through use of the composition.
20. The method of claim 19, wherein the said information further
concerns fabric care benefits other than wrinkle which are derived
through using the composition as a substitute for the laundry
process.
21. The method of claim 19, wherein said fabric care benefits
comprise softening, refreshing between launderings and after
storage, removing malodor, adding fragrance, protecting fabric
fibers from damage, increasing the lifetime of fabrics, providing
color care, preserving fabric integrity, antimicrobial or
antibacterial protection, insect repellence, water repellence,
improved water transport or breathability, preserving fabric shape,
anti-shrinkage, maintaining the original or natural texture or feel
of the garment, static control, or a combination thereof.
22. The method of claim 1, wherein the information provided to the
consumer identifies individuals who can safely and effectively use
the composition.
23. The method of claim 22, wherein the individuals who can safely
and effectively use the composition comprise any member of the
consumer's household or organization, children, the elderly,
travelers, the physically challenged, handicapped, students,
consumers having busy lifestyles, consumers having physically
active lifestyles, consumers living in small domiciles, and
consumers with limited incomes.
24. The method of claim 1, wherein the information provided
concerns the use of the composition for commercial and
institutional applications.
25. The method of claim 24, wherein the commercial and
institutional applications comprise commercial laundry and dry
cleaning operations, hotels, motels, clothing retailers, spas, hair
salons, beauty salons, fabric stores, cruise ships, tailor or
alterations businesses, hospitals, and uniform rental
businesses.
26. The method of claim 1, wherein the information is provided to
the consumer through product demonstrations, consumer testimonials,
sensory media presentations, and combinations thereof.
27. The method of claim 26, wherein the information is provided to
the consumer through a product demonstration comprising a live
demonstration incorporating direct contact with the consumer, a
demonstration for surrogates, or combinations thereof.
28. The method of claim 27, wherein the demonstration is from about
5 seconds to about 30 minutes in length.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein the demonstration is from 30
seconds to about 20 minutes in length.
30. The method of claim 29, wherein the demonstration is from about
1 minute to about 10 minutes in length.
31. The method of claim 26, wherein the information is provided
through a sensory media presentation utilizing electronic media,
print media, or combinations thereof.
32. The method of claim 31, wherein the electronic media used in
the sensory media presentation comprise radio and television
broadcast media, a computer network, recorded audio and visual
media, or a combination thereof.
33. The method of claim 31, wherein the sensory media presentation
is at least about 10 seconds in length.
34. The method of claim 1, wherein the information is provided to
the consumer through a product demonstration of at least about 5
seconds in length together with an sensory media presentation
lasting at least about 10 second in length.
35. The method of claim 34, wherein the said product demonstration
incorporates direct contact with the consumer.
36. The method of claim 34, wherein the sensory media presentation
is selected from the group consisting of: video tape presentation,
computer presentation, computer overhead projection presentation,
and combinations thereof.
37. The method of claim 27, wherein the live demonstration
comprises demonstrating the wrinkle controlling effect of the
composition on a fabric sample selected from garments, swatches of
fabric, household fabrics, and combinations thereof.
38. The method of claim 11, wherein the container is a spray
dispenser.
39. The method of claim 38, wherein the spray dispenser is selected
from the group consisting of pump sprayer, aerosol sprayer, trigger
sprayer, pre-compression sprayer, and non-manually powered
sprayer.
40. The method of claim 38, wherein when the said spray dispenser
is a trigger sprayer, instructions comprise and instruction to pull
the triggering mechanism in full strokes.
41. The method of claim 1, wherein the information comprises an
instruction to treat fabrics with the composition to prepare the
fabrics for use or reuse as a substitute process for
laundering.
42. The method of claim 1, wherein the information comprises an
instruction to treat the fabric with the composition after improper
storage.
43. The method of claim 42, wherein said improper storage
comprises: fabrics kept in the dryer too long after the drying
cycle has finished; fabrics stored in compressed conditions,
comprising trunk, suitcase, clothes valet, drawer, tight closet,
tight armoire; fabrics not folded; fabrics not hung; fabrics left
in a pile; fabrics left in laundry basket to prepare fabrics for
use or reuse; fabrics laundered in washer with spin cycle set at
high speed; and combinations thereof.
44. The method of claim 14, wherein said instructions comprise an
instruction to treat fabric with from about 1% about 300% by weight
of fabric of the wrinkle composition.
45. The method of claim 13, wherein the instructions comprise an
instruction to apply the composition evenly over the fabric.
46. The method of claim 38, wherein the composition is to be
applied evenly by spraying the composition on the fabric utilizing
a sweeping motion.
47. The method of claim 13, wherein the instructions comprise an
instruction to apply the composition more heavily over the more
wrinkled area.
48. The method of claim 38, wherein said instruction comprises a
direction to spray fabric from a distance of from about 2 inches to
about 40 inches.
49. The method of claim 48, wherein said instruction comprises a
direction to spray fabric from a distance of from about 6 inches to
about 12 inches.
50. The method of claim 14, wherein the composition is to be
applied to the fabric while the fabric is suspended, while the
fabric rests on a relatively flat surface, or while the fabric is
being used for its intended purpose.
51. The method of claim 50, wherein said fabric is suspended from a
clothesline or on a hanger.
52. The method of claim 1, wherein the composition is provided by
offering said composition for sale.
53. The method of claim 52, wherein said information is provided to
aid the consumer in achieving an improved performance level.
54. The method of claim 52, wherein said information is provided to
encourage the consumer directed to incorporate product usage into
daily habits.
55. The method of claim 52, wherein said information is provided to
the consumer to convince the consumer that product performance is
genuine.
56. The method of claim 52, wherein said information is provided to
instruct the consumer in the plurality of product uses.
57. The method of claim 52, wherein the composition is provided in
a plurality of formulations to address individual consumer needs
and/or preferences.
58. The method of claim 57, wherein the formulations contain
different fragrances.
59. The method of claim 52, wherein the composition is provided at
points of distribution that are atypical for fabric care
products.
60. The method of claim 59, wherein said points of distribution
comprise hotels, motels, resorts, rental property, kiosks, vending
machines, laundromats, drycleaners, shopping malls, clothing
retailers, airports, bus stations, train stations, car rental
agencies, travel agencies, gift shops, computer networks, college
campuses, bookstores, spas, hair salons, beauty salons, fabric
stores, cruise ships, automotive products stores, sites providing
tailoring and alteration services, day care centers, hospitals,
assisted living centers, gyms, workout or fitness training centers,
uniform retail or rental sites, community centers, clubs, camping
products stores, and/or travel products stores.
61. The method of claim 60, wherein the composition is provided
through a gift shop and is packaged for specific consumer
segments.
62. The method of claim 52, wherein the information provided
concerns the use of the composition in commercial and institutional
applications.
63. The method of claim 62, wherein the commercial and
institutional applications comprise commercial laundry and dry
cleaning operations, hotels, motels, clothing retailers, spas, hair
salons, beauty salons, fabric stores, cruise ships, tailor or
alterations businesses, hospitals, and uniform retail or rental
businesses, day care centers, assisted living centers, fabric
manufacture, gyms, workout or fitness centers.
64. The method of claim 52, wherein the information is provided to
the consumer through product demonstrations, consumer testimonials,
sensory media presentations, and combinations thereof.
65. The method of claim 64, wherein the information is provided to
the consumer through a product demonstration comprising a live
demonstration incorporating direct contact with the consumer, a
demonstration for surrogates, or combinations thereof.
66. The method of claim 64, wherein the demonstration is from about
5 seconds to about 30 minutes in length.
67. The method of claim 64, wherein the information is provided
through a sensory media presentation utilizing electronic media,
print media, or combinations thereof.
68. The method of claim 67, wherein the electronic media used in
the sensory media presentation comprise radio and television
broadcast media, a computer network, recorded audio and visual
media, or a combination thereof.
69. The method of claim 64, wherein the sensory media presentation
is at least about 10 seconds in length.
70. The method of claim 52, wherein the information is provided to
the consumer through a live product demonstration of at least about
5 seconds in length together with an sensory media presentation
lasting at least about 15 second in length.
71. The method of claim 70, wherein the sensory media presentation
is selected from the group consisting of: video tape presentation,
computer presentation, computer overhead projection presentation,
and combinations thereof.
72. The methods of claim 52, wherein said composition is
additionally promoted or marketed through, advertisements,
co-marketing, the use of endorsements, door-to-door sales, level
marketing programs, computer networks, sponsorships, contests,
rewards programs, or combinations thereof.
73. The method of claim 72, wherein the said rewards program
comprises providing wrinkle control composition to `early adopters`
and encouraging said early adopters to promote said
composition.
74. The method of claim 72, wherein the endorsement is from an
organization protecting and/or promoting the interests of people
with physical challenges, the handicapped, the elderly, parents,
students, youth, travelers, people with busy lifestyles, people
with physically active lifestyles, people living in small
domiciles, people who are changing domiciles, people with limited
incomes, organizations promoting safety, or a combination
thereof.
75. The method of claim 72, wherein the composition is co-marketed
with laundry products, fabric care products, automotive products,
home care products, products for organizing space, products for a
physically active lifestyle, products for improving appearance,
style, or fashion camping products, travel products, fabric
articles, as part of a gift package, and combinations thereof.
76. The method of claim 75, wherein the said gift pack is directed
to particular consumer segments.
77. The method of claim 73, wherein sponsorships are provided for
events, academic programs, clubs, organizations, support groups or
a combination thereof.
78. The method of claim 77, wherein said events comprise
entertainment events and performances, sports events, fashion and
style-related events, product shows, political rallies and
gatherings, festivals or a combination thereof.
79. The method of claim 73, wherein rewards programs comprise
inducements for consumers to do one or more of the following;
recommend and promote use of the composition to additional
consumers, educate additional consumers to achieve increased
performance using the composition, educate additional consumers on
methods of incorporating composition into daily habits, and educate
additional consumers to provide education to additional
consumers.
80. The method of claim 79, wherein said inducements comprise
monetary remuneration, conferring of prestige or recognition,
providing discounts on goods and services, gifts, accruing credit
towards receiving monetary remuneration or gifts, and combinations
thereof.
Description
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
[0001] This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional
Application No. 60/230,859, filed on Sep. 7, 2000.
TECHNICAL FIELD
[0002] The present invention relates to methods for improving the
performance of compositions comprising waster and optional
ingredients for removing wrinkles from fabrics, the compositions
being packaged with a dispenser as an article intended for
distributing said compositions. Said methods accomplish several
purposes including the teaching of information that is critical to
improving product performance and its acceptance. The methods are
also related to the extension of the useful life of clothing items
when treated with such compositions. The methods also encompass
techniques to mass market compositions in ways that heighten the
awareness of such products both with traditional and
non-traditional consumers via traditional and non-traditional
marketing approaches and by distributing products through
non-traditional channels to make them readily available to all
consumers.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0003] The wrinkle control compositions that can benefit from the
methods of the present invention are those compositions that enable
the consumer to remove or control wrinkles in their fabrics without
the application of heat to cure or otherwise activate the
composition. Several such wrinkle control products are currently
available in the market.
[0004] In general, these products are niche or specialty products
that are used by consumers primarily when traveling. For instance,
the Wrinkle Free product available from Very Impressive Products,
Inc. is a good example of this principal. It is highly priced with
limited marketing and distribution. It is stocked at American
Automobile Association (AAA) Travel Agency Stores and is given only
limited retail shelving. Other wrinkle control products, such as
Wrinkle Out.TM., are also difficult to locate even in traditional
distribution channels. These products have not moved beyond the
status of niche products and clearly do not enjoy the status of a
product that is kept close at hand and is used in everyday life in
the manner of a body deodorant, laundry detergent, fabric softener,
or toilet paper.
[0005] Other wrinkle control products have also failed to establish
successful large markets. Amongst these are the ATO Care spray
(manufactured by Lion, Japan), Wrinkle Out.TM., manufactured by
Emson.RTM.g, Wrinkle Free.RTM., manufactured by Very Incredible
Products, Inc..COPYRGT. and Faultless.RTM.Wrinkle Manufactured by
Bon Ami Co. Likewise, these products are also viewed as niche
products by the consumer.
[0006] Most consumers are familiar with using a heated iron,
ironing aids, steamers and various processes that require the
application of heat to remove and control wrinkles from their
fabrics. However, the typical consumer lacks even a general
understanding of how to use a wrinkle control composition that does
not require the application of heat, and thus, they do not have
confidence in the ability of such a composition to effectively
remove or control wrinkles.
[0007] Existing wrinkle control products typically have enaged in
minimal advertising with no in depth advertising dedicated to
educating the consumer. To be successful, the consumer needs to be
educated regarding the proper use of the product, the product's
effectiveness, the appearance of the fabric in the finished state,
how the product might be incorporated into the consumer's everyday
habits and lifestyles, the additional non-wrinkle benefits that may
be achieved with the product and how the product may be effectively
and safely used by most members of the consumer's household.
[0008] Therefore, there is a need for various methods for improving
the performance of a wrinkle control product by exposing consumers
to non-traditional advertisement programs that are geared towards
teaching the consumer proper use of the product, how to incorporate
the product into their daily lives, the variety of product uses and
benefits, and to set appropriate expectations for the product's
performance. Without the dissemination of such information, the
consumer will never experience the full potential of these
compositions.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0009] The present invention provides methods for improving the
performance of a consumer wrinkle control composition by making the
composition available to the consumer and providing information to
the consumer concerning the use of the composition to control
wrinkles in fabrics without the application of heat. The
compositions useful in the present invention are essentially water
together with optional ingredients such as perfume, starch and
others. The compositions are preferably stable, well dispersed,
more preferably translucent, and even more preferably clear.
Information may be provided by teaching educational elements and
disseminating educational elements to consumers in an efficient,
effective, and affordable manner as well as techniques for
heightening consumer awareness of the product. The information that
is provided to the consumer concerns the use of the composition to
remove or control wrinkles in fabrics without the application of
heat. In addition, the information can include instructions for the
proper use of the product, the product's effectiveness, the
appearance of the fabric in the finished state after treatment,
instructions on how the product can be incorporated into the
consumer's everyday habits and lifestyles, the additional
non-wrinkle benefits that may be achieved with the product and how
the composition can be effectively and safely used by most members
of the consumer's household.
[0010] The present invention also relates to methods for improving
the performance of wrinkle control compositions that are
incorporated into containers having a spray dispenser to create an
article of manufacture that can facilitate treatment of fabrics
and/or fabric surfaces with said compositions containing wrinkle
control agent and other optional ingredients at a level that is
effective, yet is not discernible when dried on the surfaces. The
spray dispenser comprises a manually activated as well as
non-manual or power operated spray dispenser and a container for
the wrinkle controlling composition.
[0011] The present invention further provides methods for improving
the consumer's acceptance of a spray wrinkle control composition
for use in controling wrinkles without the application of heat. The
method comprises the steps of providing a wrinkle control
composition to the consumer and providing information to the
consumer concerning the use of the composition to control wrinkles
in fabric without the application of heat to the fabric. The
information to be provided in conjunction with the composition
concerns the proper use of the product, the product's
effectiveness, the appearance of the fabric in the finished state
after treatment, instructions on how the product can be
incorporated into the consumer's everyday habits and lifestyles,
additional non-wrinkle benefits that may be achieved with through
the use of the composition and how the composition can be
effectively and safely used by most members of the consumer's
household.
[0012] In yet another process aspect of the present invention,
methods are provided for prolonging or extending the useful life of
fabric items that require frequent and repeated laundering
processes that are prone to cause incremental damage to fabric
fibers. These methods prolong the useful life of such fabric items
by enabling the item to be revitalized or renewed for rewear
without laundering, thus reducing the number of launderings and the
resulting damage to fabric fibers over a given period of time.
These methods comprise the steps of providing the composition and
providing information to the consumer regarding the proper use of
the composition independent and apart from a laundering
process.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
[0013] Each of the methods of the present invention comprise the
steps of providing a consumer fabric wrinkle control composition
that can provide wrinkle control in fabrics without the application
of heat to cure or otherwise activate the wrinkle controlling
effect and by providing information concerning the use of such a
composition to control wrinkles. As described hereinafter, a
variety of wrinkle control compositions may be used to advantage in
the methods of the present invention. Likewise, a variety of
information may be provided in conjunction with such compositions
to improve the performance of those compositions, to improve the
consumer acceptance of those compositions and to prolong the useful
life of a fabric article on which the compositions can be used.
[0014] I. Providing a Wrinkle Control Composition
[0015] A variety of wrinkle control compositions may be used to
advantage in the methods of the present invention. Wrinkle control
compositions must however, be capable of removing wrinkles from
fabrics without the application of heat to cure or otherwise
acitvate the wrinkle controlling effect of the composition. Such
compositions are described in more detail in U.S. Pat. Nos.
3,674,688, 4,661,268, 4,806,254, 5,062,971, 5,100,566, 5,532,023,
5,573,695, 5,798,107, 5,965,517, 5,968,404, and 5,997,759.
Likewise, such compositions are the subject of and are described in
additional detail in U.S. Ser. No. 09/067,385, filed Apr. 27, 1998,
Trinh et al.; U.S. Ser. No. 09/067,241, filed Apr. 27, 1998, Trinh
et al.; U.S. Ser. No. 09/208,215, filed Dec. 9, 1998, Trinh et al.;
U.S. Ser. No. 09/457,847, filed Dec. 9, 1999, Trinh et al.; U.S.
Ser. No. 09/503,525, filed Feb. 13, 2000, Frankenbach et al.; and
U.S. Ser. No. 60/182,381, filed Aug. 9, 2000, Frankenbach et al.
entitled "Polymer Compositions having specified pH for improved
dispensing stability of wrinkle reducing composition and methods of
use."
[0016] Specifically, wrinkle control compositions useful in the
methods of the present invention include:
[0017] (A). A composition comprising fluid carrier, preferably
water. Water provides a surprising degree of wrinkle prevention.
The compositions useful in the present invention typically contains
at least about 30% and less than 100% by weight of the composition
of water. Water suitable for the present composition can come from
many sources. It is preferable, but not essential for the water to
be distilled and/or deionized.
[0018] (B). Optionally, an effective amount of wrinkle control
agent selected from the group of silicones, fiber-fabric
lubricants, shape retention polymers, lithium salts, perfumes,
fabric care polysaccharides, and mixtures thereof. When wrinkle
control agent is included it is typically included at levels of at
least about 0.001% and typically less than about 10%.
[0019] (C). Optionally, to reduce surface tension, improve
spreading, penetration, and formulatability, an effective amount of
surfactant.
[0020] (D). Optionally, to plasticize fibers and shape-retention
polymer plus provide additional benefits such as increasing
antimicrobial efficacy, reducing surface tension of, and aiding in
perfume formulation and delivery, an effective amount the
composition of hydrophilic plasticizer and/or solvent.
[0021] (E). Optionally, an effective amount to absorb malodor of an
odor control agent.
[0022] (F). Optionally, but preferably, an effective amount to
provide olfactory effects of perfume.
[0023] (G). Optionally, an effective amount, to kill, or reduce the
growth of microbes, of antimicrobial active.
[0024] (H). Optionally, a effective level of propellant.
[0025] (I). Optionally, other ingredients including water-soluble
polyionic, anti-static agents, insect and/or moth repelling agent,
colorants, anti-clogging agents, and, viscosity control agents.
[0026] (J). Optionally, mixtures of optional ingredients (B)
through (I).
[0027] The present invention also relates to concentrated
compositions, which are diluted to form compositions with the usage
concentrations, as given hereinabove, for use in the "usage
conditions".
[0028] A. Fluid Carrier
[0029] Wrinkle control compositions disclosed herein comprise a
fluid carrier and the preferred fluid carrier is water.
Surprisingly, water alone is capable of plasticizing fibers such
that a sufficient degree of wrinkle removal and/or reduction can be
attained by spraying water onto a surface and gently pulling or
smoothing the garment to release wrinkles. Water is also
inexpensive, environmentally sound, non-flammable and easily
disposed.
[0030] Although water alone is sufficient to remove wrinkles, the
compositions preferably comprise optional ingredients such as
perfume, surfactant, water-miscible solvents, shape retention
polymers, anti-microbial, and odor control agents, as well as other
optional ingredients. The optional ingredients aid in improving the
efficacy of water, increasing wrinkle control performance of the
product, delivering aesthetics, and contributing other desirable
attributes as disclosed herein below.
[0031] Water with or without dissolved minerals and impurities is
suitable for the present invention, e.g. de-ionized, distilled, or
tap water, but purified water is preferred. The present invention
typically contains at least about 30% and less than about 100% by
weight of the composition of water.
[0032] Optional Ingredients
[0033] Optionally, the present wrinkle controlling composition can
also contain the following:
[0034] B. Wrinkle Control Agents
[0035] Optionally, but preferably, the composition contains an
effective amount of fiber-fabric wrinkle control agent to enhance
the wrinkle control performance of the composition. The wrinkle
control agent is preferably selected from the group consisting of:
fiber lubricant, shape retention polymer, lithium salt, perfumes,
fabric care polysaccharide, and mixtures thereof. When wrinkle
control agent is included it is typically included at levels of at
least about 0.001% and less than about 10% of the usage
composition.
[0036] 1. Fiber Lubricants
[0037] The present invention can use fiber-fabric lubricants to
impart a lubricating property, or increased gliding ability, to
fibers in fabric, particularly clothing. Not to be bound by theory,
it is believed that water and other alcoholic solvents break, or
weaken, the hydrogen bonds that hold the wrinkles in fabric, and
fabric lubricants facilitate the movement of fibers with respect to
one another (glide) to further release the fibers from the wrinkle
condition in wet or damp fabrics. After the fabric is dried, the
residual fiber lubricant, especially silicone, can provide
lubricity to reduce the tendency of fabric to re-wrinkle.
[0038] a) Silicone
[0039] Silicone is a preferred fiber lubricant, for the present
invention, to impart a lubricating property, or increased gliding
ability, to fibers in fabric, particularly clothing. Nonlimiting
examples of useful silicones in the composition of the present
invention include noncurable silicones such as silicone polyethers
(also known as dimethicone copolyols), polydimethylsilicone and
volatile silicones, and curable silicones such as aminosilicones,
phenylsilicones and hydroxysilicones. The word "silicone" as used
herein preferably refers to soluble, self emulsifying, or
emulsified silicones, including those that are commercially
available as single components or as mixture, e.g. compositions
formulated by the supplier to achieve solubilization and/or
emulsification of the silicone, unless otherwise described.
Preferably, the silicones comprise hydrophobic moieties; are
neither irritating, toxic, nor otherwise harmful when applied to
fabric or when they come in contact with human skin; are chemically
stable under normal use and storage conditions; and are capable of
being deposited on fabric.
[0040] When the composition of this invention is to be dispensed
from a spray dispenser in a consumer household setting, the
noncurable silicones such as silicone polyether and
polydimethylsilicone are preferred. Curable and/or reactive
silicones such as amino-functional silicones and silicones with
reactive groups such as Si--OH, Si--H, silanes, and the like, are
not preferred in this situation, because the portion of the
composition that is sprayed but misses the garment, and falls
instead on flooring surfaces, such as rug, carpet, concrete floor,
tiled floor, linoleum floor, bathtub floor, can leave a silicone
layer that is cured and/or bonded to the flooring surfaces. Such
silicones that are bonded to surfaces are difficult to remove from
the flooring surfaces. Flooring surfaces thus become slippery and
can present a safety hazard to the household members. The curable
and reactive silicones can be used in compositions specifically
designed for use in enclosed areas such as in a dewrinkling
cabinet. Many types of aminofunctional silicones also cause fabric
yellowing. Thus, the silicones that cause fabric discoloration are
also not preferred.
[0041] A highly preferred, but nonlimiting class of silicones
surfactants useful for the present invention is the class of
silicone polyethers alternately know as dimethicone copolyols and
polyalkylene oxide polysiloxanes. Typically the polyalkylene oxide
polysiloxanes have a dimethyl polysiloxane hydrophobic moiety and
one or more hydrophilic polyalkylene chains. The hydrophilic
polyakylene chains can be incorporated as side chains (pendant
moieties) or as block copolymer moieties with the polysiloxane
hydrophobic moiety. Silicone polyethers are described by the
following general formulas:
R.sup.1--(CH.sub.3).sub.2SiO--[(CH.sub.3).sub.2SiO].sub.a--[(CH.sub.3)(R.s-
up.1)SiO].sub.b--Si(CH.sub.3).sub.2--R.sup.1
[0042] wherein a+b are from about 1 to about 50, preferably from
about 1 to about 30, more preferably from about 1 to about 25, and
each R.sup.1 is the same or different and is selected from the
group consisting of methyl and a poly(ethyleneoxide/propyleneoxide)
copolymer group having the general formula:
--(CH.sub.2).sub.nO(C.sub.2H.sub.4O).sub.c(C.sub.3H.sub.6O).sub.dR.sup.2
[0043] with at least one R.sup.1 being a
poly(ethyleneoxy/propyleneoxy) copolymer group, and wherein n is 3
or 4, preferably 3; total c (for all polyalkyleneoxy side groups)
has a value of from 1 to about 100, preferably from about 6 to
about 100; total c+d has a value of from about 5 to about 150,
preferably from about 7 to about 100 and each R.sup.2 is the same
or different and is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
an alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and an acetyl group,
preferably hydrogen and/or methyl group. Each polyalkylene oxide
polysiloxane has at least one R.sup.1 group being a
poly(ethyleneoxide/propyleneoxide) copolymer group.
[0044] Nonlimiting examples of these silicone polyethers are the
Silwet.RTM. materials which are available from CK-Witco.
Representative Silwet.RTM. silicone polyethers which contain only
ethyleneoxy (C.sub.2H.sub.4O) groups are as follows.
1 Name Average MW Average a + b Average total c L-7608 600 1 8
L-7607 1,000 2 17 L-77 600 1 9 L-7605 6,000 20 99 L-7604 4,000 21
53 L-7600 4,000 11 68 L-7657 5,000 20 76 L-7602 3,000 20 29 L-7622
10,000 88 75 L-8600 2,100 L-8610 1,700 L-8620 2,000
[0045] Nonlimiting examples of Silwet.RTM. silicone polyethers
which contain both ethyleneoxy (C.sub.2H.sub.4O) and propyleneoxy
(C.sub.3H.sub.6O) groups are as follows:
2 Name Average MW EO/PO ratio L-720 12,000 50/50 L-7001 20,000
40/60 L-7002 8,000 50/50 L-7210 13,000 20/80 L-7200 19,000 75/25
L-7220 17,000 20/80
[0046] Nonlimiting examples of Silwet.RTM. silicone polyethers
which contain only propyleneoxy (C.sub.3H.sub.6O) groups are as
follows:
3 Name Average MW L7500 3,000 L7510 13,000 L7550 300 L8500
2,800
[0047] The molecular weight of the polyalkyleneoxy group (R.sup.1)
is less than or equal to about 10,000. The preferred molecular
weight of the silicone polyether is dependent on the exact
functionality is a given composition. If propyleneoxy groups are
present in the polyalkylenoxy chain, they can be distributed
randomly in the chain or exist as blocks. Preferred Silwets.RTM.
provide lubricity to aid in wrinkle removal and can also provide
softness which is especially preferred when the polymer leaves a
rough feeling on the surface of the fabric. Nonlimiting examples of
preferred Silwets.RTM. include L77, L7001, L7200, and L7087. Some
nonlimiting preferred Dow Corning.RTM. silicone polyethers include
Dow Corning.RTM. 190 Dow Corning.RTM. Q2-5211. Other nonlimiting
examples of silicone polyethers useful in the present invention
include include the following compounds available from Dow
Corning.RTM. 193, FF-400 Fluid, Q2-5220, Q4-3667, as well as
compounds available from Toray Dow Corning Silicone Co., Ltd. know
as SH3771C, SH3772C, SH3773C, SH3746, SH3748, SH3749, SH8400,
SF8410, and SH8700, KF351 (A), KF352 (A), KF354 (A), and KF615 (A)
of Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., TSF4440, TSF4445, TSF4446, TSF4452
of Toshiba Silicone Co.
[0048] When optional cyclodextrin is used, it is preferred to use
silicone polyethers with higher molecular weights, at least about
5,000, preferably at least about 10,000 to prevent significant
interaction with the cyclodextrin. When the silicone polyether will
be used to emulsify silicone oils, provide maximal penetration,
reduce viscosity of the composition, and/or enhance spray
characteristics it is preferably to use a silicone polyether with a
molecular weight of typically less than about 10,000, preferably
less than about 8,000, and more preferably less than about
5,000.
[0049] Besides surface activity, silicone polyethers can also
provide other benefits, such as antistatic benefits, lubricity,
softness to fabrics, and improvements in fabric appearance.
[0050] The preparation of silicone polyethers is well known in the
art. Silicone polyethers of the present invention can be prepared
according to the procedure set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 3,299,112,
incorporated herein by reference. Typically, silicone polyethers of
the present invention are readily prepared by an addition reaction
between a hydrosiloxane (i.e., a siloxane containing silicon-bonded
hydrogen) and an alkenyl ether (e.g., a vinyl, allyl, or methallyl
ether) of an alkoxy or hydroxy end-blocked polyalkylene oxide). The
reaction conditions employed in addition reactions of this type are
well known in the art and in general involve heating the reactants
(e.g., at a temperature of from about 85.degree. C. to 110.degree.
C.) in the presence of a platinum catalyst (e.g., chloroplatinic
acid) and a solvent (e.g., toluene).
[0051] Other nonlimiting silicone compounds and emulsions including
useful to the present invention includes non-curable silicones
(such as but not limited to volatile silicones, silicone oils, and
polydimethyl silicones) and curable silicones (such as, but not
limited to aminosilicones, phenylsilicones, and hydroxylsilicones.
Also useful in the present compositions are silicone emulsions that
comprise silicone oils such as 346 Emulsion, 347 Emulsion, and
HV-490 available from Dow Corning. Specifically, the preferred
silicone oil is dimethylsiloxane silicone, more preferably volatile
dimethylsiloxane. The volatile silicones provide surprisingly good
fiber lubrication without the risk of unacceptable build-up on the
fabric and/or surrounding surfaces due to their volatile nature.
The volatile silicones also provide a desirable control over the
formation of wrinkles in fabrics while the fabrics are being
dried.
[0052] Preferred silicones are neither irritating, toxic, nor
otherwise harmful when applied to fabric or when they come in
contact with human skin, and are chemically stable under normal use
and storage conditions, and are capable of being deposited on
fabric.
[0053] When the composition of this invention is to be dispensed
from a spray dispenser in a consumer household setting, the
noncurable silicones such as polydimethylsilicone, and especially
the volatile silicones, are preferred. Curable and/or reactive
silicones such as amino-functional silicones and silicones with
reactive groups such as Si--OH, Si--H, silanes, and the like, are
not preferred in this situation, because the portion of the
composition that is sprayed but misses the garment, and falls
instead on flooring surfaces, such as rug, carpet, concrete floor,
tiled floor, linoleum floor, bathtub floor, can leave a silicone
layer that is cured and/or bonded to the flooring surfaces. Such
silicones that are bonded to surfaces are difficult to remove from
the flooring surfaces. The flooring surfaces thus become slippery
and can present a safety hazard to the household members. The
curable and reactive silicones can be used in compositions
specifically designed for use in enclosed areas such as in a
dewrinkling enclosure, e.g., cabinet. Many types of aminofunctional
silicones also cause fabric yellowing. Thus, the silicones that
cause fabric discoloration are also not preferred. Indeed, the
present compositions are preferably essentially free of any
material that would soil or stain fabrics or are essentially free
of material at a level that would soil or stain fabrics.
[0054] Another preferred silicone is volatile silicone fluid which
can be cyclic silicone fluid of the formula
[(CH.sub.3).sub.2SiO].sub.n where n ranges between about 3 to about
7, preferably about 5, or a linear silicone polymer fluid having
the formula (CH.sub.3).sub.3SiO[(CH.sub.3).-
sub.2SiO].sub.mSi(CH.sub.3).sub.3 where m can be 0 or greater and
has an average value such that the viscosity at 25.degree. C. of
the silicone fluid is preferably about 5 centistokes or less.
[0055] The non-volatile silicones that are useful in the
composition of the present invention are polyalkyl and/or
phenylsilicones silicone fluids and gums with the following
structure:
A-Si(R.sub.2)--O--Si[R.sub.2)--O--].sub.q--Si(R.sub.2)-A
[0056] The alkyl groups substituted on the siloxane chain (R) or at
the ends of the siloxane chains (A) can have any structure as long
as the resulting silicones remain fluid at room temperature.
[0057] Each R group preferably can be alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, or
hydroxyalkyl group, and mixtures thereof, more preferably, each R
is methyl, ethyl, propyl or phenyl group, most preferably R is
methyl. Each A group which blocks the ends of the silicone chain
can be hydrogen, methyl, methoxy, ethoxy, hydroxy, propoxy, and
aryloxy group, preferably methyl. Suitable A groups include
hydrogen, methyl, methoxy, ethoxy, hydroxy, and propoxy. q is
preferably an integer from about 7 to about 8,000. The preferred
silicones are polydimethyl siloxanes; more preferred silicones are
polydimethyl siloxanes having a viscosity of from about 50 to about
1000,000 centistokes at 25.degree. C. Mixtures of volatile
silicones and non-volatile polydimethyl siloxanes are also
preferred. Suitable examples include silicones offered by Dow
Corning Corporation under the trade names 200 Fluid and 245 Fluid,
and the General Electric Company under the trade names SF1173,
SF1202, SF1204, SF96, and Viscasil.RTM..
[0058] Other useful silicone materials, but less preferred than
polydimethylsiloxanes, include materials of the formula:
HO--[Si(CH.sub.3).sub.2--O].sub.x--{Si(OH)[(CH.sub.2).sub.3--NH--(CH.sub.2-
).sub.2--NH.sub.2]O}.sub.y--H
[0059] wherein x and y are integers which depend on the molecular
weight of the silicone, preferably having a viscosity of from about
10,000 cst to about 500,000 cst at 25.degree. C. This material is
also known as "amodimethicone". Although silicones with a high
number, e.g., greater than about 0.5 millimolar equivalent of amine
groups can be used, they are not preferred because they can cause
fabric yellowing.
[0060] Similarly, silicone materials which can be used correspond
to the formulas:
(R.sup.1).sub.aG.sub.3-a-Si--(--OSiG.sub.2).sub.n--(OSiG.sub.b(R.sup.1).su-
b.2-b).sub.m--O--SiG.sub.3-a(R.sup.1).sub.a
[0061] wherein G is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
phenyl, OH, and/or C.sub.1-C.sub.8 alkyl; a denotes 0 or an integer
from 1 to 3; b denotes 0 or 1; the sum of n+m is a number from 1 to
about 2,000; R.sup.1 is a monovalent radical of formula
C.sub.pH.sub.2pL in which p is an integer from 2 to 8 and L is
selected from the group consisting of:
--N(R.sup.2)CH.sub.2--CH.sub.2--N(R.sup.2).sub.2;
--N(R.sup.2).sub.2;
--N.sup.+(R.sup.2).sub.3A.sup.-; and
--N.sup.+(R.sup.2)CH.sub.2--CH.sub.2N.sup.+H.sub.2 A.sup.-
[0062] wherein each R.sup.2 is chosen from the group consisting of
hydrogen, phenyl, benzyl, saturated hydrocarbon radical, and each
A.sup.- denotes compatible anion, e.g., a halide ion; and
R.sup.3--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.2-Z-[Si(CH.sub.3).sub.2O].sub.f--Si(CH.sub.-
3).sub.2-Z-N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.2--R.sup.3.2CH.sub.3COO.sup.-
[0063] wherein
Z=--CH.sub.2--CH(OH)--CH.sub.2O--CH.sub.2).sub.3--
[0064] R.sup.3 denotes a long chain alkyl group; and
[0065] f denotes an integer of at least about 2.
[0066] In the formulas herein, each definition is applied
individually and averages are included.
[0067] Another silicone material which can be used, but is less
preferred than polydimethyl siloxanes, has the formula:
(CH.sub.3).sub.3Si--[O--Si(CH.sub.3).sub.2].sub.n--{OSi(CH.sub.3)[(CH.sub.-
2).sub.3--NH--(CH.sub.2).sub.2--NH.sub.2]}.sub.m--OSi(CH.sub.3).sub.3
[0068] wherein n and m are the same as before. The preferred
silicones of this type are those which do not cause fabric
discoloration.
[0069] Mixtures of silicone are also preferred to achieve a range
of properties within one composition. And in some aspects of the
invention, mixtures of silicones are highly useful. For instance,
when silicone oils are used, these can be very difficult to
emulsify. Surprisingly, it is found that silicone polyethers
provide an extremely effective means of solubilizing silicone
oils.
[0070] b) Synthetic Solid Particles
[0071] Solid polymeric particles of average particle size smaller
than about 10 microns, preferably smaller than 5 microns, more
preferably smaller than about 1 micron, e.g., Velustrol.RTM. P-40
oxidized polyethylene emulsion available from Clariant, can be used
as a lubricant, also Tospearl.TM. 105, 120, 130, 145, 240
polydimethyl siloxane polymers available from GE Silicones, since
they can provide a "roller-bearing" action. When solid polymeric
particles are present, they are present at an effective amount to
provide lubrication of the fibers, typically from about 0.01% to
about 3%, preferably from about 0.05% to about 1%, more preferably
from about 0.1% to about 0.5%, by weight of the usage
composition.
[0072] c) Quaternary Ammonium Compounds
[0073] Although many quaternary ammonium compounds with alkyl
substituents are suitable for this composition, quaternary ammonium
compounds that contain hydrocarbon groups, including substituted
groups an groups that are part of, e.g., acyl groups, which are
unsaturated or branched are particularly suited for this
composition. In some cases, amine precursors of the quaternary
ammonium compounds can themselves be useful in this
composition.
[0074] Suitable quaternary ammonium compounds for use in the
wrinkle composition have been previously disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
5,759,990, issued Jun. 2, 1998 in the names of E. H. Wahl, H. B.
Tordil, T. Trinh, E. R. Carr, R. O. Keys, and L. M. Meyer, for
Concentrated Fabric Softening Composition with Good Freeze/Thaw
Recovery and Highly Unsaturated Fabric Softener Compound Therefor,
and in U.S. Pat. No. 5,747,443, issued May 5, 1998 in the names of
Wahl, Trinh, Gosselink, Letton, and Sivik for Fabric Softening
Compound/Composition. An indicator of the suitability of quaternary
ammonium actives for use in the compositions of the present
invention is the phase transition temperature. Preferably, the
phase transition temperature of the quaternary ammonium active or
mixture of actives, containing less than about 5% organic solvent
or water, is less than about 50.degree. C., more preferably less
than about 35.degree. C., even more preferably less than about
20.degree. C., and yet even more preferably less than about
10.degree. C., or is amorphous and has no significant endothermic
phase transition in the region from about -50.degree. C. to about
100.degree. C.
[0075] The phase transition temperature can be measured with a
Mettler TA 3000 differential scanning calorimeter with Mettler TC
10A Processor. Typical suitable quaternary ammonium compounds or
amine precursors are defined hereinafter.
[0076] Preferred Diester Quaternary Ammonium Active Compound
(DEQA)
[0077] (1) The first type of DEQA preferably comprises, as the
principal active, [DEQA (1)] compounds of the formula
{R.sub.4-m--N.sup.+--[(CH.sub.2).sub.n--Y--R.sup.1].sub.m}X.sup.-
[0078] wherein each R substituent is either hydrogen, a short chain
C.sub.1-C.sub.6, preferably C.sub.1-C.sub.3 alkyl or hydroxyalkyl
group, e.g., methyl (most preferred), ethyl, propyl, hydroxyethyl,
and the like, poly (C.sub.2-3 alkoxy), preferably polyethoxy,
group, benzyl, or mixtures thereof; each m is 2 or 3; each n is
from 1 to about 4, preferably 2; each Y is --O--(O)C--,
--C(O)--O--, --NR--C(O)--, or --C(O)--NR--; the sum of carbons in
each R.sup.1, plus one when Y is --O--(O)C-- or --NR--C(O)--, is
C.sub.12-C.sub.22, preferably C.sub.14-C.sub.20, with each R.sup.1
being a hydrocarbyl, or substituted hydrocarbyl group, and X.sup.-
can be any quaternary ammonium-compatible anion, preferably,
chloride, bromide, methylsulfate, ethylsulfate, sulfate, and
nitrate, more preferably chloride or methyl sulfate (As used
herein, the "percent of quaternary ammonium active" containing a
given R.sup.1 group is based upon taking a percentage of the total
active based upon the percentage that the given R.sup.1 group is,
of the total R.sup.1 groups present.);
[0079] (2) A second type of DEQA active [DEQA (2)] has the
formula:
[R.sub.3N.sup.+CH.sub.2CH(YR.sup.1)(CH.sub.2YR.sup.1)]X.sup.-
[0080] wherein each Y, R, R.sup.1, and X.sup.- have the same
meanings as before. Such compounds include those having the
formula:
[CH.sub.3].sub.3N.sup.(+)[CH.sub.2CH(CH.sub.2O(O)CR.sup.1)O(O)CR.sup.1]Cl.-
sup.(-)
[0081] wherein each R is a methyl or ethyl group and preferably
each R.sup.1 is in the range of C.sub.15 to C.sub.19. As used
herein, when the diester is specified, it can include the monoester
that is present. The amount of monoester that can be present is the
same as in DEQA (1).
[0082] These types of agents and general methods of making them are
disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,137,180, Naik et al., issued Jan. 30,
1979, which is incorporated herein by reference. An example of
preferred DEQA (2) is the "propyl" ester quaternary ammonium active
having the formula 1,2-di(acyloxy)-3-trimethylammoniopropane
chloride, where the acyl is the same as that of FA.sup.1 disclosed
hereinafter.
[0083] Some preferred wrinkle compositions of the present invention
contain as an essential component from about 0.025% to about 10%,
preferably from about 0.05% to about 5%, more preferably from about
0.1% to about 3%, and even more preferably from about 0.2% to about
2% by weight of the composition, of quaternary ammonium active
having the formula:
[R.sup.1C(O)OC.sub.2H.sub.4].sub.mN.sup.+(R).sub.4-mX.sup.-
[0084] wherein each R.sup.1 in a compound is a C.sub.6-C.sub.22
hydrocarbyl group, preferably having an IV from about 70 to about
140 based upon the IV of the equivalent fatty acid with the
cis/trans ratio preferably being as described hereinafter, m is a
number from 1 to 3 on the weight average in any mixture of
compounds, each R in a compound is a C.sub.1-3 alkyl or hydroxy
alkyl group, the total of m and the number of R groups that are
hydroxyethyl groups equaling 3, and X is a quaternary ammonium
compatible anion, preferably methyl sulfate. Preferably the
cis:trans isomer ratio of the fatty acid (of the C18:1 component)
is at least about 1:1, preferably about 2:1, more preferably about
3:1, and even more preferably about 4:1, or higher.
[0085] These preferred compounds, or mixtures of compounds, have
(a) either a Hunter "L" transmission of at least about 85,
typically from about 85 to about 95, preferably from about 90 to
about 95, more preferably above about 95, if possible, (b) only
low, relatively non-detectable levels, at the conditions of use, of
odorous compounds selected from the group consisting of: isopropyl
acetate; 2,2'-ethylidenebis(oxy)bis-propane; 1,3,5-trioxane; and/or
short chain fatty acid (4-12, especially 6-10, carbon atoms)
esters, especially methyl esters; or (c) preferably, both.
[0086] The Hunter L transmission is measured by (1) mixing the
quaternary ammonium active with solvent at a level of about 10% of
active, to assure clarity, the preferred solvent being ethoxylated
(one mole EO) 2,2,4-trimethyl-1,3-pentanediol and (2) measuring the
L color value against distilled water with a Hunter ColorQUEST.RTM.
calorimeter made by Hunter Associates Laboratory, Reston, Va.
[0087] The level of odorant is defined by measuring the level of
odorant in a headspace over a sample of the quaternary ammonium
active (about 92% active). Chromatograms are generated using about
200 mL of head space sample over about 2.0 grams of sample. The
head space sample is trapped on to a solid absorbent and thermally
desorbed onto a column directly via cryofocussing at about
-100.degree. C. The identifications of materials is based on the
peaks in the chromatograms. Some impurities identified are related
to the solvent used in the quaternization process, (e.g., ethanol
and isopropanol). The ethoxy and methoxy ethers are typically sweet
in odor. There are C.sub.6-C.sub.8 methyl esters found in a typical
current commercial sample, but not in the typical quaternary
ammonium actives of this invention. These esters contribute to the
perceived poorer odor of the current commercial samples. The level
of each odorant in ng/L found in the head space over a preferred
active is as follows: Isopropyl acetate--<1;
1,3,5-trioxane--<5; 2,2'-ethylidenebis(oxy)-- bispropane--<1;
C.sub.6 methyl ester--<1; C.sub.8 Methyl ester--<1; and
C.sub.10 Methyl ester-<1.
[0088] The acceptable level of each odorant is as follows:
isopropyl acetate should be less than about 5, preferably less than
about 3, and more preferably less than about 2, nanograms per liter
(.eta.g/L.); 2,2'-ethylidenebis(oxy)bis-propane should be less than
about 200, preferably less than about 100, more preferably less
than about 10, and even more preferably less than about 5,
nanograms per liter (.eta.g/L.); 1,3,5-trioxane should be less than
about 50, preferably less than about 20, more preferably less than
about 10, and even more preferably less than about 7, nanograms per
liter (.eta.g/L.); and/or each short chain fatty acid (4-12,
especially 6-10, carbon atoms) ester, especially methyl esters
should be less than about 4, preferably less than about 3, and more
preferably less than about 2, nanograms per liter (.eta.g/L.).
[0089] The elimination of color and odor materials can either be
accomplished after formation of the compound, or, preferably, by
selection of the reactants and the reaction conditions. Preferably,
the reactants are selected to have good odor and color. For
example, it is possible to obtain fatty acids, or their esters, for
sources of the long fatty acyl group, that have good color and odor
and which have extremely low levels of short chain (C.sub.4-12,
especially C.sub.6-10) fatty acyl groups. Also, the reactants can
be cleaned up prior to use. For example, the fatty acid reactant
can be double or triple distilled to remove color and odor causing
bodies and remove short chain fatty acids. Additionally, the color
of a triethanolamine reactant, if used, needs to be controlled to a
low color level (e.g., a color reading of about 20 or less on the
APHA scale). The degree of clean up required is dependent on the
level of use, clarity of the product, and the presence of other
ingredients. For example, adding a dye or starting with an opaque
product can cover up some colors. However, for clear and/or light
colored products, the color must be almost non-detectable. This is
especially true as the level of the quaternary ammonium compound
used in the product goes up. The degree of clean up would be
especially important in products sold as concentrates that are
intended for dilution by the consumer. Similarly, the odor can be
covered up by higher levels of perfume, but as perfume level
increases, cost associated with this approach increases too, also
many consumers prefer a product with a lighter scent which
precludes the approach of using higher perfume levels. Odor quality
can be further improved by use of, e.g., ethanol as the
quaternization reaction solvent.
[0090] Preferred biodegradable quaternary ammonium compounds
comprise quaternary ammonium salt, the quaternary ammonium salt
being a quaternized product of the condensation reaction
between:
[0091] a)--a fraction of saturated or unsaturated, linear or
branched fatty acids, or of derivatives of said acids, said fatty
acids or derivatives each possessing a hydrocarbon chain in which
the number of atoms is between 5 and 21, and
[0092] b)--triethanolamine,
[0093] characterized in that said condensation product has an acid
value, measured by titration of the condensation product with a
standard KOH solution against a phenolphthalein indicator, of less
than about 6.5.
[0094] The acid value is preferably less than or equal to about 5,
more preferably less than about 3.
[0095] The acid value is determined by titration of the
condensation product with a standard KOH solution against a
phenolphthalein indicator according to ISO#53402. The Acid Value
(AV) is expressed as mg KOH/g of the condensation product.
[0096] These quaternary ammonium compounds for use herein are
typically mixtures of materials. The weight percentages of
compounds wherein one (monoester), two (diester), or three
(triester) of the triethanolamine hydroxy groups is esterified with
a fatty acyl group are as follows: Monoester--from about 12% to
about 22%; diester--from about 43% to about 57%; and triester--from
about 13% to about 28%. These compounds, as formed and used in the
formulation of wrinkle compositions, typically contain from about
6% to about 20% by weight of solvent, e.g., from about 3% to about
10% of a lower molecular alcohol like ethanol and from about 3% to
about 10% of solvent that is more hydrophobic, like hexylene
glycol.
[0097] Preferred cationic, preferably biodegradable, quaternary,
ammonium compounds can contain the group --(O)CR.sup.1 which is
derived from animal fats, unsaturated, and polyunsaturated, fatty
acids, e.g., oleic acid, and/or partially hydrogenated fatty acids,
derived from vegetable oils and/or partially hydrogenated vegetable
oils, such as, canola oil, safflower oil, peanut oil, sunflower
oil, corn oil, soybean oil, tall oil, rice bran oil, etc.
Non-limiting examples of fatty acids (FA) are listed in U.S. Pat.
No. 5,759,990 at column 4, lines 45-66.
[0098] Mixtures of fatty acids, and mixtures of FAs that are
derived from different fatty acids can be used, and are preferred.
Nonlimiting examples of FA's that can be blended, to form FA's of
this invention are as follows:
4 Fatty Acyl Group FA.sup.1 FA.sup.2 FA.sup.3 C.sub.14 0 0 1
C.sub.16 3 11 25 C.sub.18 3 4 20 C14:1 0 0 0 C16:1 1 1 0 C18:1 79
27 45 C18:2 13 50 6 C18:3 1 7 0 Unknowns 0 0 3 Total 100 100 100 IV
99 125-138 56 cis/trans (C18:1) 5-6 Not Available 7 TPU 14 57 6
FA.sup.1 is a partially hydrogenated fatty acid prepared from
canola oil, FA.sup.2 is a fatty acid prepared from soy bean oil,
and FA.sup.3 is a slightly hydrogenated tallow fatty acid.
[0099] Preferred quaternary ammonium actives contain an effective
amount of molecules containing two ester linked hydrophobic groups
[R.sup.1C(CO)O--], said actives being referred to herein as
"DEQA's", are those that are prepared as a single DEQA from blends
of all the different fatty acids that are represented (total fatty
acid blend), rather than from blends of mixtures of separate
finished DEQA's that are prepared from different portions of the
total fatty acid blend.
[0100] It is preferred that at least a majority of the fatty acyl
groups are unsaturated, e.g., from about 50% to 100%, preferably
from about 55% to about 99%, more preferably from about 60% to
about 98%, and that the total level of active containing
polyunsaturated fatty acyl groups (TPU) be preferably from 0% to
about 30%. The cis/trans ratio for the unsaturated fatty acyl
groups is usually important, with the cis/trans ratio being from
about 1:1 to about 50:1, the minimum being about 1:1, preferably at
least about 3:1, and more preferably from about 4:1 to about 20:1.
(As used herein, the "percent of quaternary ammonium active"
containing a given R.sup.1 group is the same as the percentage of
that same R.sup.1 group is to the total R.sup.1 groups used to form
all of the quaternary ammonium actives.)
[0101] The unsaturated, including the preferred polyunsaturated,
fatty acyl and/or alkylene groups, discussed hereinbefore and
hereinafter, surprisingly provide good dewrinkling and effective
softening, but also provide better rewetting characteristics, good
antistatic characteristics, and especially, superior recovery after
freezing and thawing.
[0102] These unsaturated actives are also easier to process at
lower temperatures. These highly unsaturated materials (total level
of active containing polyunsaturated fatty acyl groups (TPU) being
typically from about 3% to about 30%, with only the low amount of
solvent that normally is associated with such materials, i.e., from
about 5% to about 20%, preferably from about 8% to about 25%, more
preferably from about 10 to about 20%, weight of the total
quaternary ammonium/solvent mixture are easier to formulate into
the product and remain in stable solutions, emulsions, and or
dispersions longer. This ability to process the actives at low
temperatures is especially important for the polyunsaturated
groups, since it minimizes degradation. Additional protection
against degradation can be provided when the compounds and wrinkle
compositions contain effective antioxidants, chelants, and/or
reducing agents, as disclosed hereinafter.
[0103] It will be understood that substituents R and R.sup.1 can
optionally be substituted with various groups such as alkoxy or
hydroxyl groups, and can be straight, or branched so long as the
R.sup.1 groups maintain their basically hydrophobic character.
[0104] A preferred long chain DEQA is the DEQA prepared from
sources containing high levels of polyunsaturation, i.e.,
N,N-di(acyl-oxyethyl)-N- ,N-methylhydroxyethylammonium methyl
sulfate, where the acyl is derived from fatty acids containing
sufficient polyunsaturation, e.g., mixtures of tallow fatty acids
and soybean fatty acids. Another preferred long chain DEQA is the
dioleyl (nominally) DEQA, i.e., DEQA in which
N,N-di(oleoyl-oxyethyl)-N,N-methylhydroxyethylammonium methyl
sulfate is the major ingredient. Preferred sources of fatty acids
for such DEQAs are vegetable oils, and/or partially hydrogenated
vegetable oils, with high contents of unsaturated, e.g., oleoyl
groups.
[0105] As used herein, when the DEQA diester (m=2) is specified, it
can include the monoester (m=1) and/or triester (m=3) that are
present. Preferably, at least about 30% of the DEQA is in the
diester form, and from 0% to about 30% can be DEQA monoester, e.g.,
there are three R groups and one R.sup.1 group.
[0106] The above compounds can be prepared using standard reaction
chemistry. In one synthesis of a di-ester variation of DTDMAC,
triethanolamine of the formula N(CH.sub.2CH.sub.2OH).sub.3 is
esterified, preferably at two hydroxyl groups, with an acid
chloride of the formula R.sup.1C(O)Cl, to form an amine which can
be made cationic by acidification (one R is H) to be one type of
active, or then quaternized with an alkyl halide, RX, to yield the
desired reaction product (wherein R and R.sup.1 are as defined
hereinbefore). However, it will be appreciated by those skilled in
the chemical arts that this reaction sequence allows a broad
selection of agents to be prepared.
[0107] In preferred DEQA (1) and DEQA (2) quaternary ammonium
actives, each R.sup.1 is a hydrocarbyl, or substituted hydrocarbyl,
group, preferably, alkyl, monounsaturated alkenyl, and
polyunsaturated alkenyl groups, with the quaternary ammonium active
containing polyunsaturated alkenyl groups being preferably at least
about 3%, more preferably at least about 5%, more preferably at
least about 10%, and even more preferably at least about 15%, by
weight of the total quaternary ammonium active present; the actives
preferably containing mixtures of R.sup.1 groups, especially within
the individual molecules.
[0108] The DEQAs herein can also contain a low level of fatty acid,
which can be from unreacted starting material used to form the DEQA
and/or as a by-product of any partial degradation (hydrolysis) of
the quaternary ammonium active in the finished composition. It is
preferred that the level of free fatty acid be low, preferably
below about 15%, more preferably below about 10%, and even more
preferably below about 5%, by weight of the quaternary ammonium
active.
[0109] The quaternary ammonium actives herein are preferably
prepared by a process wherein a chelant, preferably a
diethylenetriaminepentaacetate (DTPA) and/or an ethylene
diamine-N,N'-disuccinate (EDDS) is added to the process. Another
acceptable chelant is tetrakis-(2-hydroxylpropyl) ethylenediamine
(TPED). Also, preferably, antioxidants are added to the fatty acid
immediately after distillation and/or fractionation and/or during
the esterification reactions and/or post-added to the finished
quaternary ammonium active. The resulting active has reduced
discoloration and malodor associated therewith.
[0110] The total amount of added chelating agent is preferably
within the range of from about 10 ppm to about 5,000 ppm, more
preferably within the range of from about 100 ppm to about 2500 ppm
by weight of the formed quaternary ammonium active. The source of
triglyceride is preferably selected from the group consisting of
animal fats, vegetable oils, partially hydrogenated vegetable oils,
and mixtures thereof. More preferably, the vegetable oil or
partially hydrogenated vegetable oil is selected from the group
consisting of canola oil, partially hydrogenated canola oil,
safflower oil, partially hydrogenated safflower oil, peanut oil,
partially hydrogenated peanut oil, sunflower oil, partially
hydrogenated sunflower oil, corn oil, partially hydrogenated corn
oil, soybean oil, partially hydrogenated soybean oil, tall oil,
partially hydrogenated tall oil, rice bran oil, partially
hydrogenated rice bran oil, and mixtures thereof. Most preferably,
the source of triglyceride is canola oil, partially hydrogenated
canola oil, and mixtures thereof. The process can also include the
step of adding from about 0.01% to about 2% by weight of the
composition of an antioxidant compound to any or all of the steps
in the processing of the triglyceride up to, and including, the
formation of the quaternary ammonium active.
[0111] The above processes produce a quaternary ammonium active
with reduced coloration and malodor.
[0112] Other Quaternary Ammonium Actives
[0113] Other less preferred quaternary ammonium actives include,
but are not limited to, those disclosed hereinafter. When
quaternary ammonium compounds are include in the wrinkle
composition, these less preferred quaternary ammonium actives can
be present in minor amounts, either alone, or as part of the total
amount of quaternary ammonium in the said composition, said other
fabric quaternary ammonium active being selected from:
[0114] (1) quaternary ammonium having the formula:
[R.sub.4-m--N.sup.(+)--R.sup.1.sub.m]A.sup.-
[0115] wherein each m is 2 or 3, each R.sup.1 is a
C.sub.6-C.sub.22, preferably C.sub.14-C.sub.20, but no more than
one being less than about C.sub.12 and then the other is at least
about 16, hydrocarbyl, or substituted hydrocarbyl substituent,
preferably C.sub.10-C.sub.20 alkyl or alkenyl (unsaturated alkyl,
including polyunsaturated alkyl, also referred to sometimes as
"alkylene"), most preferably C.sub.12-C.sub.18 alkyl or alkenyl,
and where the Iodine Value (hereinafter referred to as "IV") of a
fatty acid containing this R.sup.1 group is from about 70 to about
140, more preferably from about 80 to about 130; and most
preferably from about 90 to about 115 (as used herein, the term
"Iodine Value" means the Iodine Value of a "parent" fatty acid, or
"corresponding" fatty acid, which is used to define a level of
unsaturation for an R.sup.1 group that is the same as the level of
unsaturation that would be present in a fatty acid containing the
same R.sup.1 group) with, preferably, a cis/trans ratio of from
about 1:1 to about 50:1, the minimum being 1:1, preferably from
about 2:1 to about 40:1, more preferably from about 3:1 to about
30:1, and even more preferably from about 4:1 to about 20:1; each
R.sup.1 can also preferably be a branched chain C.sub.14-C.sub.22
alkyl group, preferably a branched chain C.sub.16-C.sub.18 group;
each R is H or a short chain C.sub.1-C.sub.6, preferably
C.sub.1-C.sub.3 alkyl or hydroxyalkyl group, e.g., methyl (most
preferred), ethyl, propyl, hydroxyethyl, and the like, benzyl, or
(R.sup.2O).sub.2-4H where each R.sup.2 is a C.sub.1-6 alkylene
group; and A.sup.- is a quaternary ammonium compatible anion,
preferably, chloride, bromide, methylsulfate, ethylsulfate,
sulfate, and nitrate, more preferably chloride and methyl
sulfate;
[0116] (2) quaternary ammonium having the formula:
[0117] wherein each R, R.sup.1, and A.sup.- have the definitions
given above; each R.sup.2 is a C.sub.1-6 alkylene group, preferably
an ethylene group; and G is an oxygen atom or an --NR-- group;
[0118] (3) active having the formula:
[0119] wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2 and G are defined as above;
[0120] (4) reaction products of substantially unsaturated and/or
branched chain higher fatty acids with dialkylenetriamines in,
e.g., a molecular ratio of about 2: 1, said reaction products
containing compounds of the formula:
R.sup.1--C(O)13 NH--R.sup.2--NH--R.sup.3--NH--C(O)--R.sup.1
[0121] wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2 are defined as above, and each
R.sup.3 is a C.sub.1-6 alkylene group, preferably an ethylene
group;
[0122] (5) quaternary ammonium having the formula:
[R.sup.1--C(O)--NR--R.sup.2--N(R).sub.2--R.sup.3--NR--C(O)--R.sup.1].sup.+-
A.sup.-
[0123] wherein R, R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3 and A.sup.- are defined
as above;
[0124] (6) the reaction product of substantially unsaturated and/or
branched chain higher fatty acid with hydroxyalkylalkylenediamines
in a molecular ratio of about 2:1, said reaction products
containing compounds of the formula:
R.sup.1--C(O)--NH--R.sup.2--N(R.sup.3OH)--C(O)--R.sup.1
[0125] wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 are defined as
above;
[0126] (7) quaternary ammonium having the formula:
[0127] wherein R, R.sup.1, R.sup.2, and A.sup.- are defined as
above; and
[0128] Other optional but highly desirable cationic compounds which
can be used in combination with the above quaternary ammonium
actives are compounds containing one long chain acyclic
C.sub.8-C.sub.22 hydrocarbon group, selected from the group
consisting of:
[0129] (8) acyclic quaternary ammonium salts having the
formula:
[R.sup.1--N(R.sup.5).sub.2--R.sup.6].sup.+A.sup.-
[0130] wherein R.sup.5 and R.sup.6 are C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkyl or
hydroxyalkyl groups, and R.sup.1 and A.sup.- are defined as herein
above;
[0131] (9) substituted imidazolinium salts having the formula:
[0132] wherein R.sup.7 is hydrogen or a C .sub.1-C.sub.4 saturated
alkyl or hydroxyalkyl group, and R.sup.1 and A.sup.- are defined as
hereinabove;
[0133] (10) substituted imidazolinium salts having the formula:
[0134] wherein R.sup.5 is a C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkyl or hydroxyalkyl
group, and R.sup.1, R.sup.2, and A.sup.- are as defined above;
[0135] (11) alkylpyridinium salts having the formula:
[0136] wherein R.sup.4 is an acyclic aliphatic C.sub.8-C.sub.22
hydrocarbon group and A.sup.- is an anion; and
[0137] (12) alkanamide alkylene pyridinium salts having the
formula:
[0138] wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2 and A.sup.-are defined as herein
above; and mixtures thereof.
[0139] Examples of Compound (8) are the
monoalkenyltrimethylammonium salts such as
monooleyltrimethylammonium chloride, monocanolatrimethylammonium
chloride, and soyatrimethylammonium chloride.
Monooleyltrimethylammonium chloride and monocanolatrimethylammonium
chloride are preferred. Other examples of Compound (8) are
soyatrimethylammonium chloride available from Witco Corporation
under the trade name Adogen.RTM. 415, erucyltrimethylammonium
chloride wherein R.sup.1 is a C.sub.22 hydrocarbon group derived
from a natural source; soyadimethylethylammoniu- m ethylsulfate
wherein R.sup.1 is a C.sub.16-C.sub.18 hydrocarbon group, R.sup.5
is a methyl group, R.sup.6 is an ethyl group, and A.sup.- is an
ethylsulfate anion; and methyl bis(2-hydroxyethyl)oleylammonium
chloride wherein R.sup.1 is a C.sub.18 hydrocarbon group, R.sup.5
is a 2-hydroxyethyl group and R.sup.6 is a methyl group.
[0140] Additional actives that can be used herein are disclosed, at
least generically for the basic structures, in U.S. Pat. No.
3,861,870, Edwards and Diehl; U.S. Pat. No. 4,308,151, Cambre; U.S.
Pat. No. 3,886,075, Bernardino; U.S. Pat. No. 4,233,164, Davis;
U.S. Pat. No. 4,401,578, Verbruggen; U.S. Pat. No. 3,974,076,
Wiersema and Rieke; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,237,016, Rudkin, Clint, and
Young, all of said patents being incorporated herein by reference.
The additional actives herein are preferably those that are highly
unsaturated versions of the traditional quaternary ammonium
actives, i.e., di-long chain alkyl nitrogen derivatives, normally
cationic materials, such as dioleyldimethylammonium chloride and
imidazolinium compounds as described hereinafter. Examples of more
biodegradable fabric quaternary ammonium actives can be found in
U.S. Pat. No. 3,408,361, Mannheimer, issued Oct. 29, 1968; U.S.
Pat. No. 4,709,045, Kubo et al., issued Nov. 24, 1987; U.S. Pat.
No. 4,233,451, Pracht et al., issued Nov. 11, 1980; U.S. Pat. No.
4,127,489, Pracht et al., issued Nov. 28, 1979; U.S. Pat. No.
3,689,424, Berg et al., issued Sep. 5, 1972; U.S. Pat. No.
4,128,485, Baumann et al., issued Dec. 5, 1978; U.S. Pat. No.
4,161,604, Elster et al., issued Jul. 17, 1979; U.S. Pat. No.
4,189,593, Wechsler et al., issued Feb. 19, 1980; and 4,339,391,
Hoffman et al., issued Jul. 13, 1982, said patents being
incorporated herein by reference.
[0141] Examples of Compound (1) are dialkylenedimethylammonium
salts such as dicanoladimethylammonium chloride,
dicanoladimethylammonium methylsulfate, di(partially hydrogenated
soybean, cis/trans ratio of about 4:1 )dimethylammonium chloride,
dioleyldimethylammonium chloride. Dioleyldimethylammonium chloride
and di(canola)dimethylammonium chloride are preferred. An example
of commercially available dialkylenedimethylammonium salts usable
in the present invention is dioleyldimethylammonium chloride
available from Witco Corporation under the trade name Adogen.RTM.
472.
[0142] An example of Compound (2) is
1-methyl-1-oleylamidoethyl-2-oleylimi- dazolinium methylsulfate
wherein R.sup.1 is an acyclic aliphatic C.sub.15-C.sub.17
hydrocarbon group, R.sup.2 is an ethylene group, G is a NH group,
R.sup.5 is a methyl group and A.sup.- is a methyl sulfate anion,
available commercially from the Witco Corporation under the trade
name Varisoft.RTM. 3690.
[0143] An example of Compound (3) is
1-oleylamidoethyl-2-oleylimidazoline wherein R.sup.1 is an acyclic
aliphatic C.sub.15-C.sub.17 hydrocarbon group, R.sup.2 is an
ethylene group, and G is a NH group.
[0144] An example of Compound (4) is reaction products of oleic
acids with diethylenetriamine in a molecular ratio of about 2:1,
said reaction product mixture containing
N,N"-dioleoyldiethylenetriamine with the formula:
R.sup.1--C(O)--NH--CH.sub.2CH.sub.2--NH--CH.sub.2CH.sub.2--NH--C(O)--R.sup-
.1
[0145] wherein R.sup.1--C(O) is oleoyl group of a commercially
available oleic acid derived from a vegetable or animal source,
such as Emersol.RTM. 223LL or Emersol.RTM. 7021, available from
Henkel Corporation, and R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 are divalent ethylene
groups.
[0146] An example of Compound (5) is a difatty amidoamine based
active having the formula:
[R.sup.1--C(O)--NH--CH.sub.2CH.sub.2--N(CH.sub.3)(CH.sub.2CH.sub.2OH)--CH.-
sub.2CH.sub.2--NH--C(O)--R.sup.1].sup.+CH.sub.3SO.sub.4.sup.-
[0147] wherein R.sup.1--C(O) is oleoyl group, available
commercially from the Witco Corporation under the trade name
Varisoft.RTM. 222LT.
[0148] An example of Compound (6) is reaction products of
commercial "oleic" acids with N-2-hydroxyethylethylenediamine in a
molecular ratio of about 2:1, said reaction product mixture
containing a compound of the formula:
R.sup.1--C(O)--NH--CH.sub.2CH.sub.2--N(CH.sub.2CH.sub.2OH)--C(O)--R.sup.1
[0149] wherein R.sup.1--C(O) is oleoyl group of a commercially
available oleic acid derived from a vegetable or animal source,
such as Emersol.RTM. 223LL or Emersol.RTM. 7021, available from
Henkel Corporation.
[0150] An example of Compound (7) is the diquaternary compound
having the formula:
[0151] wherein R.sup.1 is derived from oleic acid, and the compound
is available from Witco Company.
[0152] An example of Compound (11) is
1-ethyl-1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-isohept- adecylimidazolinium
ethylsulfate wherein R.sup.1 is a C.sub.17 hydrocarbon group,
R.sup.2 is an ethylene group, R.sup.5 is an ethyl group, and
A.sup.- is an ethylsulfate anion.
[0153] Anion A
[0154] In the cationic nitrogenous salts herein, the anion A.sup.-,
which is any quaternary ammonium compatible anion, provides
electrical neutrality. Most often, the anion used to provide
electrical neutrality in these salts is from a strong acid,
especially a halide, such as chloride, bromide, or iodide. However,
other anions can be used, such as methylsulfate, ethylsulfate,
acetate, formate, sulfate, carbonate, and the like. Chloride and
methylsulfate are preferred herein as anion A. The anion can also,
but less preferably, carry a double charge in which case A.sup.-
represents half a group.
[0155] Polyquaternary amine compounds also act as suitable
quaternary compounds to increase fabric (fiber) lubricity and these
are diclosed for use herein by reference to prior art
including:
[0156] European Patent Application EP 0,803,498, A1, Robert O. Keys
and Floyd E. Friedli, filed Apr. 25, 1997;
[0157] British Pat. 808,265, issued Jan. 28, 1956 to Arnold Hoffman
& Co., Incorporated;
[0158] British Pat. 1,161,552, Koebner and Potts, issued Aug. 13,
1969;
[0159] DE 4,203,489 A1, Henkel, published Aug. 12, 1993;
[0160] EP 0,221,855, Topfl, Heinz, and Jorg, issued Nov. 3,
1986;
[0161] EP 0,503,155, Rewo, issued Dec. 20, 1991;
[0162] EP 0,507,003, Rewo, issued Dec. 20, 1991
[0163] EPA 0,803,498, published Oct. 29, 1997;
[0164] French Pat. 2,523,606, Marie-Helene Fraikin, Alan
Dillarstone, and Marc Couterau, filed Mar. 22, 1983;
[0165] Japanese Pat. 84-273918, Terumi Kawai and Hiroshi Kitamura,
1986;
[0166] Japanese Pat. 2-011,545, issued to Kao Corp., Jan. 16,
1990;
[0167] U.S. Pat. No. 3,079,436, Hwa, issued Feb. 26, 1963;
[0168] U.S. Pat. No. 4,418,054, Green et al., issued Nov. 29,
1983;
[0169] U.S. Pat. No. 4,721,512, Topfl, Abel, and Binz, issued Jan.
26, 1988;
[0170] U.S. Pat. No. 4,728,337, Abel, Topfl, and Riehen, issued
Mar. 1, 1988;
[0171] U.S. Pat. No. 4,906,413, Topfl and Binz, issued Mar. 6,
1990;
[0172] U.S. Pat. No. 5,194,667, Oxenrider et al., issued Mar. 16,
1993;
[0173] U.S. Pat. No. 5,235,082, Hill and Snow, issued Aug. 10,
1993;
[0174] U.S. Pat. No. 5,670,472, Keys, issued Sep. 23, 1997;
[0175] Weirong Miao, Wei Hou, Lie Chen, and Zongshi Li, Studies on
Multifunctional Finishing Agents, Riyong Huaxue Gonye, No. 2, pp.
8-10, 1992;
[0176] Yokagaku, Vol 41, No. 4 (1992); and
[0177] Disinfection, Sterilization, and Preservation, 4.sup.th
Edition, published 1991 by Lea & Febiger, Chapter 13, pp.
226-30. All of these references are incorporated herein, in their
entirety, by reference.
[0178] It will be understood that suitable wrinkle compositions can
include combinations of quaternary ammonium actives disclosed
herein.
[0179] In addition to lubricating fibers, quaternary ammonium
compound disclosed herein can offer addition benefits including
improved softening and handfeel as well as protection and/or
restoration of fibers and fabric appearance.
[0180] 2. Shape Retention Polymers
[0181] These polymers can be natural, or synthetic, and can act by
forming a film, and/or by providing adhesive properties. E.g., the
present invention can optionally use film-forming and/or adhesive
polymer to impart shape retention to fabric, particularly clothing.
By "adhesive" it is meant that when applied as a solution or a
dispersion to a fiber surface and dried, the polymer can attach to
the surface. The polymer can form a film on the surface, or when
residing between two fibers and in contact with the two fibers, it
can bond the two fibers together. Other polymers such as starches
can form a film and/or bond the fibers together when the treated
fabric is pressed by a hot iron. Such a film will have adhesive
strength, cohesive breaking strength, and cohesive breaking
strain.
[0182] Nonlimiting examples for natural polymers are starches and
their derivatives, and chitins and their derivatives.
[0183] The synthetic polymers useful in the present invention are
comprised of monomers. Some nonlimiting examples of monomers which
can be used to form the synthetic polymers of the present invention
include: low molecular weight C.sub.1-C.sub.6 unsaturated organic
mono-carboxylic and polycarboxylic acids, such as acrylic acid,
methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid and its half esters,
itaconic acid, and mixtures thereof, esters of said acids with
C.sub.1-C.sub.12 alcohols, such as methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol,
2-propanol, 1-butanol, 2-methyl-1-propanol, 1-pentanol, 2-pentanol,
3-pentanol, 2-methyl-1-butanol, 1-methyl-1-butanol,
3-methyl-1-butanol, 1-methyl-1-pentanol, 2-methyl-1-pentanol,
3-methyl-1-pentanol, t-butanol, cyclohexanol, 2-ethyl-1-butanol,
neodecanol, 3-heptanol, benzyl alcohol, 2-octanol,
6-methyl-1-heptanol, 2-ethyl-1-hexanol, 3,5-dimethyl-1-hexanol,
3,5,5-trimethyl-1-hexanol, 1-decanol, 1-dodecanol, and the like,
and mixtures thereof. Nonlimiting examples of said esters are
methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, t-butyl acrylate, methyl
methacrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate, methoxy ethyl
methacrylate, and mixtures thereof; amides and imides of said
acids, such as N,N-dimethylacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide,
maleimides; low molecular weight unsaturated alcohols such as vinyl
alcohol (produced by the hydrolysis of vinyl acetate after
polymerization), allyl alcohol; esters of said alcohols with low
molecular weight carboxylic acids, such as, vinyl acetate, vinyl
propionate; ethers of said alcohols such as methyl vinyl ether;
aromatic vinyl such as styrene, alpha-methylstyrene,
t-butylstyrene, vinyl toluene, polystyrene macromer, and the like;
polar vinyl heterocyclics, such as vinyl pyrrolidone, vinyl
caprolactam, vinyl pyridine, vinyl imidazole, and mixtures thereof,
other unsaturated amines and amides, such as vinyl amine,
diethylene triamine, dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate, ethenyl
formamide; vinyl sulfonate; salts of acids and amines listed above;
low molecular weight unsaturated hydrocarbons and derivatives such
as ethylene, propylene, butadiene, cyclohexadiene, vinyl chloride;
vinylidene chloride; and mixtures thereof and alkyl quaternized
derivatives thereof, and mixtures thereof. Preferably, said
monomers are selected from the group consisting of vinyl alcohol;
acrylic acid; methacrylic acid; methyl acrylate; ethyl acrylate;
methyl methacrylate; t-butyl acrylate; t-butyl methacrylate;
n-butyl acrylate; n-butyl methacrylate; isobutyl methacrylate;
2-ethylhexyl methacrylate; dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate;
N,N-dimethyl acrylamide; N,N-dimethyl methacrylamide; N-t-butyl
acrylamide; vinylpyrrolidone; vinyl pyridine; adipic acid;
diethylenetriamine; salts thereof and alkyl quaternized derivatives
thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0184] Preferably, said monomers form homopolymers and/or
copolymers (i.e., the film-forming and/or adhesive polymer) having
a glass transition temperature (Tg) of from about -20.degree. C. to
about 150.degree. C., preferably from about -10.degree. C. to about
150.degree. C., more preferably from about 0.degree. C. to about
100.degree. C., most preferably, the adhesive polymer hereof, when
dried to form a film will have a Tg of at least about 25.degree.
C., so that they are not unduly sticky, or "tacky" to the touch.
Preferably said polymer is soluble and/or dispersible in water
and/or alcohol. Said polymer typically has a molecular weight of at
least about 500, preferably from about 1,000 to about 2,000,000,
more preferably from about 5,000 to about 1,000,000, and even more
preferably from about 30,000 to about 300,000 for some
polymers.
[0185] Some non-limiting examples of homopolymers and copolymers
which can be used as film-forming and/or adhesive polymers of the
present invention are: adipic acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyl
diethylenetriamine copolymer; adipic acid/epoxypropyl
diethylenetriamine copolymer;
poly(vinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate); polyvinyl
alcohol; polyvinylpyridine n-oxide; methacryloyl ethyl
betaine/methacrylates copolymer; ethyl acrylate/methyl
methacrylate/methacrylic acid/acrylic acid copolymer; polyamine
resins; and polyquaternary amine resins; poly(ethenylformamide);
poly(vinylamine) hydrochloride; poly(vinyl alcohol-co-6%
vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine); poly(vinyl
alcohol-co-6% vinylamine hydrochloride); and poly(vinyl
alcohol-co-12% vinylamine hydrochloride). Suitable copolymer and/or
homopolymers are selected from the group consisting of adipic
acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyl diethylenetriamine copolymer;
poly(vinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate); polyvinyl
alcohol; ethyl acrylate/methyl methacrylate/methacrylic
acid/acrylic acid copolymer; methacryloyl ethyl
betaine/methacrylates copolymer; polyquaternary amine resins;
poly(ethenylformamide); poly(vinylamine) hydrochloride; poly(vinyl
alcohol-co-6% vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine);
poly(vinyl alcohol-co-6% vinylamine hydrochloride); and poly(vinyl
alcohol-co-12% vinylamine hydrochloride).
[0186] Nonlimiting examples of the suitable polymer that are
commercially available are: polyvinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminoethyl
methacrylate copolymer, such as Copolymer 958.RTM., molecular
weight of about 100,000 and Copolymer 937, molecular weight of
about 1,000,000, available from GAF Chemicals Corporation; adipic
acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyl diethylenetriamine copolymer, such
as Cartaretin F-4.RTM. and F-23, available from Sandoz Chemicals
Corporation; methacryloyl ethyl betaine/methacrylates copolymer,
such as Diaformer Z-SM.RTM., available from Mitsubishi Chemicals
Corporation; polyvinyl alcohol copolymer resin, such as Vinex
2019.RTM., available from Air Products and Chemicals or
Moweol.RTM., available from Clariant; adipic acid/epoxypropyl
diethylenetriamine copolymer, such as Delsette 101.RTM., available
from Hercules Incorporated; polyamine resins, such as Cypro
515.RTM., available from Cytec Industries; polyquaternary amine
resins, such as Kymene 557H.RTM., available from Hercules
Incorporated; and polyvinylpyrrolidone/acrylic acid, such as
Sokalan EG 310.RTM., available from BASF.
[0187] Preferred polymers useful in the present invention are
selected from the group consisting of copolymers of hydrophilic
monomers and hydrophobic monomers. The polymer can be linear random
or block copolymers, and mixtures thereof. Such
hydrophobic/hydrophilic copolymers typically have a hydrophobic
monomer/hydrophilic monomer ratio of from about 95:5 to about
20:80, preferably from about 90:10 to about 40:60, more preferably
from about 80:20 to about 50:50 by weight of the copolymer. The
hydrophobic monomer can comprise a single hydrophobic monomer or a
mixture of hydrophobic monomers, and the hydrophilic monomer can
comprise a single hydrophilic monomer or a mixture of hydrophilic
monomers. The term "hydrophobic" is used herein consistent with its
standard meaning of lacking affinity for water, whereas
"hydrophilic" is used herein consistent with its standard meaning
of having affinity for water. As used herein in relation to monomer
units and polymeric materials, including the copolymers,
"hydrophobic" means substantially water insoluble; "hydrophilic"
means substantially water soluble. In this regard, "substantially
water insoluble" shall refer to a material that is not soluble in
distilled (or equivalent) water, at 25.degree. C., at a
concentration of about 0.2% by weight, and preferably not soluble
at about 0.1% by weight (calculated on a water plus monomer or
polymer weight basis). "Substantially water soluble" shall refer to
a material that is soluble in distilled (or equivalent) water, at
25.degree. C., at a concentration of about 0.2% by weight, and are
preferably soluble at about 1% by weight. The terms "soluble",
"solubility" and the like, for purposes hereof, corresponds to the
maximum concentration of monomer or polymer, as applicable, that
can dissolve in water or other solvents to form a homogeneous
solution, as is well understood to those skilled in the art.
[0188] Nonlimiting examples of useful hydrophobic monomers are
acrylic acid C.sub.1-C.sub.18 alkyl esters, such as methyl
acrylate, ethyl acrylate, t-butyl acrylate; methacrylic
C.sub.1-C.sub.18 alkyl esters, such as methyl methacrylate, 2-ethyl
hexyl methacrylate, methoxy ethyl methacrylate; vinyl alcohol
esters of carboxylic acids, such as, vinyl acetate, vinyl
propionate, vinyl neodecanoate; aromatic vinyls, such as styrene,
t-butyl styrene, vinyl toluene; vinyl ethers, such as methyl vinyl
ether; vinyl chloride; vinylidene chloride; ethylene, propylene and
other unsaturated hydrocarbons; and the like; and mixtures thereof.
Some preferred hydrophobic monomers are methyl acrylate, methyl
methacrylate, t-butyl acrylate, t-butyl methacrylate, n-butyl
acrylate, n-butyl methacrylate, and mixtures thereof.
[0189] Nonlimiting examples of useful hydrophilic monomers are
unsaturated organic mono-carboxylic and polycarboxylic acids, such
as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid and
its half esters, itaconic acid; unsaturated alcohols, such as vinyl
alcohol, allyl alcohol; polar vinyl heterocyclics, such as vinyl
pyrrolidone, vinyl caprolactam, vinyl pyridine, vinyl imidazole;
vinyl amine; vinyl sulfonate; unsaturated amides, such as
acrylamides, e.g., N,N-dimethylacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide;
hydroxyethyl methacrylate; dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate; salts
of acids and amines listed above; and the like; and mixtures
thereof. Some preferred hydrophilic monomers are acrylic acid,
methacrylic acid, N,N-dimethyl acrylamide, N,N-dimethyl
methacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide, dimethylamino ethyl
methacrylate, vinyl pyrrolidone, salts thereof and alkyl
quaternized derivatives thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0190] Non limiting examples of polymers for use in the present
invention include the following, where the composition of the
copolymer is given as approximate weight percentage of each monomer
used in the polymerization reaction used to prepare the polymer:
vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymers (at ratios of up to
about 30% by weight of vinyl pyrrolidone); dimethyl
acrylamide/t-butyl acrylate/ethyl hexyl methacrylate copolymer
(10/45/45); vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl acetate/butyl acrylate
copolymer (10/78/12 and 10/70/20); vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl
propionate copolymer (5/95); vinyl caprolactam/vinyl acetate
copolymer (5/95); acrylic acid/t-butyl acrylate (25/75) and styling
resins sold under the trade names Ultrahold CA 8.RTM. by Ciba Geigy
(ethyl acrylate/acrylic acid/N-t-butyl acrylamide copolymer); Resyn
8.RTM. by National Starch and Luviset CA 66.RTM. by BASF (vinyl
acetate/crotonic acid copolymer 90/10); Luviset CAP.RTM. by BASF
(vinyl acetate/vinyl propionate/crotonic acid 50/40/10); Resyn
28-2930.RTM. by National Starch (vinyl acetate/vinyl
neodecanoate/crotonic acid copolymer), Amerhold DR-25.RTM. by Union
Carbide (ethyl acrylate/methacrylic acid/methyl
methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer), and Poligen A.RTM. by BASF
(polyacrylate dispersion) and acrylates copolymers such as
Luviflex.TM.Soft, Luvimer.RTM. 100P, Luvimer.RTM. 30E, Luvimer.RTM.
36D.
[0191] Preferably, the shape retention polymers contain an
effective amount of monomers having carboxylic groups to control
amine odor. Highly preferred shape retention copolymers contain
hydrophobic monomers and hydrophilic monomers which comprise
unsaturated organic mono-carboxylic and polycarboxylic acid
monomers, such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonic acid,
maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic acid, and salts thereof,
and mixtures thereof; and optionally other hydrophilic monomers.
These preferred polymers of the current invention surprisingly
provide control of certain amine type malodors in fabrics, in
addition to providing the fabric wrinkle control benefit. Examples
of the hydrophilic unsaturated organic mono-carboxylic and
polycarboxylic acid monomers are acrylic acid, methacrylic acid,
crotonic acid, maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic acid, and
mixtures thereof. Nonlimiting examples of the hydrophobic monomers
are esters of the unsaturated organic mono-carboxylic and
polycarboxylic acids cited hereinabove with C.sub.1-C.sub.12
alcohols, such as methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol,
1-butanol, 2-methyl-1-propanol, 1-pentanol, 2-pentanol, 3-pentanol,
2-methyl-1-butanol, 1-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methyl-1-butanol,
1-methyl-1-pentanol, 2-methyl-1-pentanol, 3-methyl-1-pentanol,
t-butanol, cyclohexanol, 2-ethyl-1-butanol, and mixtures thereof,
preferably methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol,
2-methyl-I-propanol, t-butanol, and mixtures thereof. One highly
preferred copolymer contains acrylic acid and t-butyl acrylate
monomeric units, preferably with acrylic acid/t-butyl acrylate
ratios of from about 90:10 to about 10:90, preferably from about
70:30 to about 15:85, more preferably from about 40:60 to about
20:80. Nonlimiting examples of acrylic acid/tert-butyl acrylate
copolymers useful in the present invention are those typically with
a molecular weight of from about 1,000 to about 2,000,000,
preferably from about 5,000 to about 1,000,000, and more preferably
from about 30,000 to about 300,000, and with an approximate acrylic
acid/tert-butyl acrylate weight ratio of about 25:75 and an average
molecular weight of from about 70,000 to about 100,000, and those
with an approximate acrylic acid/tert-butyl acrylate weight ratio
of about 35:65 and an average molecular weight of from about 60,000
to about 90,000. Compositions containing these polymers also can
additionally comprise perfume, antibacterial active, odor control
agent, static control agent, and mixtures thereof.
[0192] The film-forming and/or adhesive polymer of the present
invention is present at least an effective amount to provide shape
retention, typically from about 0.05% to about 10%, preferably from
about 0.1% to about 5%, more preferably from about 0.2% to about
3%, even more preferably from about 0.3% to about 1.5%, by weight
of the usage composition.
[0193] The adhesive polymer is present in the composition in a
sufficient amount to result in an amount of from about 0.001% to
about 1%, preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.5%, more
preferably from about 0.02% to about 0.4% by weight of polymer per
weight of dry fabrics.
[0194] It is not intended to exclude the use of higher or lower
levels of the polymers, as long as an effective amount is used to
provide adhesive and film-forming properties to the composition and
the composition can be formulated and effectively applied for its
intended purpose.
[0195] Silicones and film-forming polymers can be combined to
produce preferred wrinkle reducing actives. Typically the weight
ratio of silicone to film-forming polymer is from about 10:1 to
about 1:10, preferably from about 5:1 to about 1:5, and more
preferably from about 3:1 to about 1:3 and even more preferably
from about 2:1 to about 1:2. Typically, the preferred wrinkle
reducing active of silicone plus polymer is present at a level of
from about 0.1% to about 8%, preferably from about 0.3% to about
5%, more preferably from about 0.5% to about 3%, by weight of the
composition.
[0196] Preferred adhesive and/or film forming polymers that are
useful in the composition of the present invention actually contain
silicone moieties in the polymers themselves. These preferred
polymers include graft and block copolymers of silicone with
moieties containing hydrophilic and/or hydrophobic monomers
described hereinbefore. The silicone-containing copolymers in the
spray composition of the present invention provide shape retention,
body, and/or good, soft fabric feel. Preferred silicone-containing
copolymers contain hydrophobic monomers and hydrophilic monomers
which comprise unsaturated organic mono-carboxylic and/or
polycarboxylic acid monomers, such as acrylic acid, methacrylic
acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic
acid, and salts thereof, and mixtures thereof; and optionally other
hydrophilic monomers. These preferred polymers of the current
invention provide control of certain amine type malodors in
fabrics, in addition to providing the fabric wrinkle control
benefit.
[0197] Both silicone-containing graft and block copolymers useful
in the present invention have the following properties:
[0198] (1) the silicone portion is covalently attached to the
non-silicone portion;
[0199] (2) the molecular weight of the silicone portion is from
about 1,000 to about 50,000; and
[0200] (3) the non-silicone portion must render the entire
copolymer soluble or dispersible in the wrinkle control composition
vehicle and permit the copolymer to deposit on/adhere to the
treated fabrics.
[0201] Suitable Silicone Copolymers Include the Following:
[0202] a) Silicone Graft Copolymers
[0203] Preferred silicone-containing polymers are the silicone
graft copolymers comprising acrylate groups described, along with
methods of making them, in U.S. Pat. . No. 5,658,557, Bolich et
al., issued Aug. 19, 1997, U.S. Pat. No. 4,693,935, Mazurek, issued
Sep. 15, 1987, and U.S. Pat. No. 4,728,571, Clemens et al., issued
Mar. 1, 1988. Additional silicone-containing polymers are disclosed
in U.S. Pat. No. 5,480,634, Hayama et al, issued Oct. 2, 1996, U.S.
Pat. No. 5,166,276, Hayama et al., issued Nov. 24, 1992, U.S. Pat.
No. 5,061,481, issued Oct. 29, 1991, Suzuki et al., 5,106,609,
Bolich et al., issued Apr. 21, 1992, U.S. Pat. No. 5,100,658,
Bolich et al., issued Mar. 31, 1992, U.S. Pat. No. 5,100,657,
Ansher-Jackson, et al., issued Mar. 31, 1992, U.S. Pat. No.
5,104,646, Bolich et al., issued Apr. 14, 1992, all of which are
incorporated herein by reference.
[0204] These polymers preferably include copolymers having a vinyl
polymeric backbone having grafted onto it monovalent siloxane
polymeric moieties, and components consisting of non-silicone
hydrophilic and hydrophobic monomers.
[0205] The silicone-containing monomers are exemplified by the
general formula:
X(Y).sub.nSi(R).sub.3-mZ.sub.m
[0206] wherein X is a polymerizable group, such as a vinyl group,
which is part of the backbone of the polymer; Y is a divalent
linking group; R is a hydrogen, hydroxyl, lower alkyl (e.g.
C.sub.1-C.sub.4), aryl, alkaryl, alkoxy, or alkylamino; Z is a
monovalent polymeric siloxane moiety having an average molecular
weight of at least about 500, is essentially unreactive under
copolymerization conditions, and is pendant from the vinyl
polymeric backbone described above; n is 0 or 1; and m is an
integer from 1 to 3.
[0207] The preferred silicone-containing monomer has a weight
average molecular weight of from about 1,000 to about 50,000,
preferably from about 3,000 to about 40,000, most preferably from
about 5,000 to about 20,000.
[0208] Nonlimiting examples of preferred silicone-containing
monomers have the following formulas: 1
[0209] In these structures m is an integer from 1 to 3, preferably
1; p is 0 or 1; q is an integer from 2 to 6; n is an integer from 0
to 4, preferably 0 or 1, more preferably 0; R.sup.1 is hydrogen,
lower alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxyl, aryl, alkylamino, preferably R.sup.1
is alkyl; R" is alkyl or hydrogen; X is
CH(R.sup.3).dbd.C(R.sup.4)--; R.sup.3 is hydrogen or --COOH,
preferably hydrogen; R.sup.4 is hydrogen, methyl or --CH.sub.2COOH,
preferably methyl; Z is
R.sup.5--[Si(R.sup.6)(R.sup.7)--O--].sub.r
[0210] wherein R.sup.5, R.sup.6, and R.sup.7 independently are
lower alkyl, alkoxy, alkylamino, hydrogen or hydroxyl, preferably
alkyl; and r is an integer of from about 5 to about 700, preferably
from about 60 to about 400, more preferably from about 100 to about
300. Most preferably, R.sup.5, R.sup.6, and R.sup.7 are methyl,
p=0, and q=3.
[0211] Silicone-containing adhesive and/or film-forming copolymers
useful in the present invention comprise from 0% to about 90%,
preferably from about 10% to about 80%, more preferably from about
40% to about 75% of hydrophobic monomer, from about 0% to about
90%, preferably from about 5% to about 80% of hydrophilic monomer,
and from about 5% to about 50%, preferably from about 10% to about
40%, more preferably from about 15% to about 25% of
silicone-containing monomer.
[0212] The composition of any particular copolymer will help
determine its formulation properties. In fact, by appropriate
selection and combination of particular hydrophobic, hydrophilic
and silicone-containing components, the copolymer can be optimized
for inclusion in specific vehicles. For example, polymers which are
soluble in an aqueous formulation preferably contain from 0% to
about 70%, preferably from about 5% to about 70% of hydrophobic
monomer, and from about 30% to about 98%, preferably from about 30%
to about 80%, of hydrophilic monomer, and from about 1% to about
40% of silicone-containing monomer. Polymers which are dispersible
preferably contain from 0% to about 70%, more preferably from about
5% to about 70%, of hydrophobic monomer, and from about 20% to
about 80%, more preferably from about 20% to about 60%, of
hydrophilic monomer, and from about 1% to about 40% of
silicone-containing monomer.
[0213] The silicone-containing copolymers preferably have a weight
average molecular weight of from about 10,000 to about 1,000,000,
preferably from about 30,000 to about 300,000.
[0214] The preferred polymers comprise a vinyl polymeric backbone,
preferably having a Tg or a Tm as defined above of about
-20.degree. C. and, grafted to the backbone, a polydimethylsiloxane
macromer having a weight average molecular weight of from about
1,000 to about 50,000, preferably from about 5,000 to about 40,000,
most preferably from about 7,000 to about 20,000. The polymer is
such that when it is formulated into the finished composition, and
then dried, the polymer phase separates into a discontinuous phase
which includes the polydimethylsiloxane macromer and a continuous
phase which includes the backbone. Exemplary silicone grafted
polymers for use in the present invention include the following,
where the composition of the copolymer is given with the
approximate weight percentage of each monomer used in the
polymerization reaction to prepare the copolymer:
N,N-dimethylacrylamide/isobutyl methacrylate/(PDMS macromer--20,000
approximate molecular weight) (20/60/20 w/w/w), copolymer of
average molecular weight of about 400,000;
N,N-dimethylacrylamide/(PDMS macromer--20,000 approximate molecular
weight) (80/20 w/w), copolymer of average molecular weight of about
300,000; t-butylacrylate/N,N-dimethylac- rylamide/(PDMS
macromer--10,000 approximate molecular weight) (70/10/20),
copolymer of average molecular weight of about 400,000; and
(N,N,N-trimethylammonioethylmethacrylate
chloride)/N,N-dimethylacrylamide- /(PDMS macromer--15,000
approximate molecular weight) (40/40/20), copolymer of average
molecular weight of about 150,000.
[0215] Highly preferred shape retention copolymers of this type
contain hydrophobic monomers, silicone-containing monomers and
hydrophilic monomers which comprise unsaturated organic mono- and
polycarboxylic acid monomers, such as acrylic acid, methacrylic
acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic
acid, and salts thereof, and mixtures thereof. These preferred
polymers surprisingly provide control of certain amine type
malodors in fabrics, in addition to providing the fabric wrinkle
control benefit. A nonlimiting example of such copolymer is
n-butylmethacrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer,
20,000 approximate molecular weight) copolymer of average molecular
weight of about 100,000, and with an approximate monomer weight
ratio of about 70/10/20. A highly preferred copolymer is composed
of acrylic acid, t-butyl acrylate and silicone-containing monomeric
units, preferably with from about 20% to about 90%, preferably from
about 30% to about 80%, more preferably from about 50% to about 75%
t-butyl acrylate; from about 5% to about 60%, preferably from about
8% to about 45%, more preferably from about 10% to about 30% of
acrylic acid; and from about 5% to about 50%, preferably from about
10% to about 40%, more preferably from about 15% to about 30% of
polydimethylsiloxane of an average molecular weight of from about
1,000 to about 50,000, preferably from about 5,000 to about 40,000,
most preferably from about 7,000 to about 20,000. Nonlimiting
examples of acrylic acid/tert-butyl acrylate/polydimethyl siloxane
macromer copolymers useful in the present invention, with
approximate monomer weight ratio, are: t-butylacrylate/acrylic
acid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer, 10,000 approximate molecular
weight) (70/10/20 w/w/w), copolymer of average molecular weight of
about 300,000; t-butylacrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsiloxane
macromer, 10,000 approximate molecular weight) (65/25/10 w/w/w),
copolymer of average molecular weight of about 200,000; t-butyl
acrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer, 10,000
approximate molecular weight) (63/20/17), copolymer of average
molecular weight of from about 120,000 to about 150,000; and
n-butylmethacrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsilox- ane
macromer--20,000 approximate molecular weight) (70/10/20 w/w/w),
copolymer of average molecular weight of about 100,000. A useful
and commercially available copolymer of this type is Diahold.RTM.
ME from Mitsubishi Chemical Corp., which is a t-butyl
acrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer, 12,000
approximate molecular weight) (60/20/20), copolymer of average
molecular weight of about 128,000.
[0216] b) Silicone Block Copolymers
[0217] Also useful herein are silicone block copolymers comprising
repeating block units of polysiloxanes.
[0218] Examples of silicone-containing block copolymers are found
in U.S. Pat. No. 5,523,365, to Geck et al., issued Jun. 4, 1996;
U.S. Pat. No. 4,689,289, to Crivello, issued Aug. 25, 1987; U.S.
Pat. No. 4,584,356, to Crivello, issued Apr. 22, 1986;
Macromolecular Design, Concept & Practice, Ed: M. K. Mishra,
Polymer Frontiers International, Inc., Hopewell Jct., N.Y. (1994),
and Block Copolymers, A. Noshay and J. E. McGrath, Academic Press,
N.Y. (1977), which are all incorporated by reference herein in
their entirety. Other silicone block copolymers suitable for use
herein are those described, along with methods of making them, in
the above referenced and incorporated U.S. Pat. No. 5,658,577.
[0219] The silicone-containing block copolymers useful in the
present invention can be described by the formulas A-B, A-B-A, and
-(A-B).sub.n-- wherein n is an integer of 2 or greater. A-B
represents a diblock structure, A-B-A represents a triblock
structure, and -(A-B).sub.n-- represents a multiblock structure.
The block copolymers can comprise mixtures of diblocks, triblocks,
and higher multiblock combinations as well as small amounts of
homopolymers.
[0220] The silicone block portion, B, can be represented by the
following polymeric structure
--(SiR.sub.2O).sub.m--,
[0221] wherein each R is independently selected from the group
consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl,
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkoxy, C.sub.2-C.sub.6 alkylamino, styryl, phenyl,
C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkyl or alkoxy-substituted phenyl, preferably
methyl; and m is an integer of about 10 or greater, preferably of
about 40 or greater, more preferably of about 60 or greater, and
most preferably of about 100 or greater.
[0222] The non-silicone block, A, comprises monomers selected from
the monomers as described hereinabove in reference to the
non-silicone hydrophilic and hydrophobic monomers for the silicone
grafted copolymers. Vinyl blocks are preferred co-monomers. The
block copolymers preferably contain one or more non-silicone
blocks, and up to about 50%, preferably from about 10% to about
20%, by weight of one or more polydimethyl siloxane blocks.
[0223] c) Sulfur-Linked Silicone-Containing Copolymers
[0224] Also useful herein are sulfur-linked silicone containing
copolymers, including block copolymers. As used herein in reference
to silicone containing copolymers, the term "sulfur-linked" means
that the copolymer contains a sulfur linkage (i.e., --S--), a
disulfide linkage (i.e., --S--S--), or a sulfhydryl group
(i.e.,--SH).
[0225] These sulfur-linked silicone-containing copolymers are
represented by the following general formula:
[0226] wherein each G.sub.5 and G.sub.6 is independently selected
from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, alkaryl, alkoxy,
alkylamino, fluoroalkyl, hydrogen, and -ZSA, wherein A represents a
vinyl polymeric segment consisting essentially of polymerized free
radically polymerizable monomer, and Z is a divalent linking group
(Useful divalent linking groups Z include but are not limited to
the following: C.sub.1 to C.sub.10 alkylene, alkarylene, arylene,
and alkoxyalkylene. Preferably, Z is selected from the group
consisting of methylene and propylene for reasons of commercial
availability.);
[0227] each G.sub.2 comprises A;
[0228] each G.sub.4 comprises A;
[0229] each R.sub.1 is a monovalent moiety selected from the group
consisting of alkyl, aryl, alkaryl, alkoxy, alkylamino,
fluoroalkyl, hydrogen, and hydroxyl (Preferably, R.sub.1 represents
monovalent moieties which can independently be the same or
different selected from the group consisting of C.sub.1-4 alkyl and
hydroxyl for reasons of commercial availability. Most preferably,
R.sub.1 is methyl.);
[0230] each R.sub.2 is a divalent linking group (Suitable divalent
linking groups include but are not limited to the following:
C.sub.1 to C.sub.10 alkylene, arylene, alkarylene, and
alkoxyalkylene. Preferably, R.sub.2 is selected from the group
consisting of C.sub.1-3 alkylene and C.sub.7-C.sub.10 alkarylene
due to ease of synthesis of the compound. Most preferably, R.sub.2
is selected from the group consisting of --CH.sub.2--,
1,3-propylene, and 2
[0231] each R.sub.3 represents monovalent moieties which can
independently be the same or different and are selected from the
group consisting of alkyl, aryl, alkaryl, alkoxy, alkylamino,
fluoroalkyl, hydrogen, and hydroxyl (Preferably, R.sub.3 represents
monovalent moieties which can independently be the same or
different selected from the group consisting of C.sub.1-4 alkyl and
hydroxyl for reasons of commercial availability. Most preferably,
R.sub.3 is methyl.);
[0232] each R.sub.4 is a divalent linking group(Suitable divalent
linking groups include but are not limited to the following:
C.sub.1 to C.sub.10 alkylene, arylene, alkarylene, and
alkoxyalkylene. Preferably, R.sub.4 is selected from the group
consisting of C.sub.1-3 alkylene and C.sub.7-C.sub.10 alkarylene
for ease of synthesis. Most preferably, R.sub.4 is selected from
the group consisting of --CH.sub.2--, 1,3-propylene, and 3
[0233] x is an integer of 0-3; y is an integer of 5 or
greater(preferably y is an integer ranging from about 14 to about
700, preferably from about 20 to about 200); and q is an integer of
0-3; wherein at least one of the following is true:
[0234] q is an integer of at least 1;
[0235] x is an integer of at least 1;
[0236] G.sub.5 comprises at least one -ZSA moiety; or
[0237] G.sub.6 comprises at least one -ZSA moiety.
[0238] As noted above, A is a vinyl polymeric segment formed from
polymerized free radically polymerizable monomers. The selection of
A is typically based upon the intended uses of the composition, and
the properties the copolymer must possess in order to accomplish
its intended purpose. If A comprises a block in the case of block
copolymers, a polymer having AB and/or ABA architecture will be
obtained depending upon whether a mercapto functional group --SH is
attached to one or both terminal silicon atoms of the mercapto
functional silicone compounds, respectively. The weight ratio of
vinyl polymer block or segment, to silicone segment of the
copolymer can vary. The preferred copolymers are those wherein the
weight ratio of vinyl polymer segment to silicone segment ranges
from about 98:2 to 50:50, in order that the copolymer possesses
properties inherent to each of the different polymeric segments
while retaining the overall polymer's solubility.
[0239] Sulfur linked silicone copolymers are described in more
detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,468,477, to Kumar et al., issued Nov. 21,
1995, and PCT Application No. WO 95/03776, assigned to 3M,
published Feb. 9, 1995, which are incorporated by reference herein
in their entirety.
[0240] Other useful silicone-containing polymers are those
containing hydrophilic portions, such as
polyvinylpyrrolidone/quaternaries, polyacrylates, polyacrylamides,
polysulfonates, and mixtures thereof, and are disclosed, e.g., in
U.S. Pat. No. 5,120,812, incorporated herein by reference.
[0241] The film-forming and/or adhesive silicone-containing
copolymer of the present invention is present at least an effective
amount to provide shape retention, typically from about 0.05% to
about 10%, preferably from about 0.1% to about 5%, more preferably
from about 0.2% to about 3%, even more preferably from about 0.3%
to about 1.5%, by weight of the usage composition.
[0242] The silicone-containing copolymer is present in the
composition in a sufficient amount to result in an amount of from
about 0.001% to about 1%, preferably from about 0.01% to about
0.5%, more preferably from about 0.02% to about 0.4% by weight of
polymer per weight of dry fabrics.
[0243] When the optional cyclodextrin is present in the
composition, the polymer useful in providing shape retention in the
composition of the present invention should be
cyclodextrin-compatible, that is it should not substantially form
complexes with cyclodextrin so as to diminish performance of the
cyclodextrin and/or the polymer. Complex formation affects both the
ability of the cyclodextrin to absorb odors and the ability of the
polymer to impart shape retention to fabric. In this case, the
monomers having pendant groups that can complex with cyclodextrin
are not preferred because they can form complexes with
cyclodextrin. Examples of such monomers are acrylic or methacrylic
acid esters of C.sub.7-C.sub.18 alcohols, such as neodecanol,
3-heptanol, benzyl alcohol, 2-octanol, 6-methyl-1-heptanol,
2-ethyl-1-hexanol, 3,5-dimethyl-1-hexanol,
3,5,5-trimethyl-1-hexanol, and 1-decanol; aromatic vinyls, such as
styrene; t-butylstyrene; vinyl toluene; and the like.
[0244] d) Starch
[0245] For some aspects of the composition, e.g. when it is
desirable for the fabric to have substantial movement (often
referred to as drape or flow), starch is not normally preferred,
since it makes the fabric scratchy and resistant to deformation.
However, starch does provide increased "body" which is desirable
and preferred for some aspects of the present invention. Starch is
particularly preferred in compositions of this invention to be used
on fabrics that require body and in compositions to be used with
ironing. When used, starch is solubilized or dispersed in the
composition. Any type of starch, e.g. those derived from corn,
wheat, rice, grain sorghum, waxy grain sorghum, waxy maize or
tapioca, or mixtures thereof and water soluble or dispersible
modifications or derivatives thereof, can be used in the
composition of the present invention. Modified starches that can be
used include natural starches that have been degraded to obtain a
lower viscosity by acidic, oxidative or enzymatic depolymerization.
Additionally, low viscosity commercially available propoxylated
and/or ethoxylated starches are useable in the present composition
and are preferred since their low viscosity at relatively high
solids concentrations make them very adaptable to spraying
processes. Suitable alkoxylated, low viscosity starches are
submicron sized particles of hydrophobic starch that are readily
dispersed in water and are prepared by alkoxylation of granular
starch with a monofunctional alkoxylating agent which provides the
starch with ether linked hydrophilic groups. A suitable method for
their preparation is taught in U.S. Pat. No. 3,462,283. In
accordance with the invention, the propoxylated or ethoxylated
starch derivatives are dispersed in the aqueous medium in an amount
of from about 0.1% to about 10%, preferably from about 0.5% to
about 6%, more preferably from about 1% to about 4% by weight of
the usage composition.
[0246] 3. Lithium Salts
[0247] Lithium salts are disclosed as solubilizing aids, e.g.,
lithium bromide in the production of silk fibroin, (U.S. Pat. No.
4,233,212, issued Nov. 11, 1980 to Otoi et al.), and lithium
thiocyanate,(U.S. Pat. No. 5,252,285, issued Oct. 12, 1993 to
Robert L. Lock). U.S. Pat. No. 5,296,269, issued Mar. 22, 1994 to
Yang et al. discloses a process to produce crease-resistant silk
using lithium bromide and lithium chloride. U.S. Pat. No.
5,199,954, issued Apr. 6, 1993 to Schultz et al. discloses a hair
dye composition containing lithium bromide. U.S. Pat. No.
5,609,859, issued Mar. 11, 1997 to D. R. Cowsar discloses methods
for preparing hair relaxer creams containing a lithium salt.
Lithium salts are disclosed as static control agents in a liquid
softener composition in U.S. Pat. No. 4,069,159, issued Jan. 17,
1978 to Mason Hayek. All of these patents are incorporated herein
by reference.
[0248] It is now found that aqueous compositions comprising lithium
salts provide improved fabric wrinkle control. Nonlimiting examples
of lithium salts that are useful in the present invention are
lithium bromide, lithium chloride, lithium lactate, lithium
benzoate, lithium acetate, lithium sulfate, lithium tartrate,
and/or lithium bitartrate, preferably lithium bromide and/or
lithium lactate. Some water soluble salts such as, lithium benzoate
are not preferred when the optional cyclodextrin is present because
they can form complexes with cyclodextrin. Useful levels of lithium
salts are from about 0.1% to about 10%, preferably from about 0.5%
to about 7%, more preferably from about 1% to about 5%, by weight
of the usage composition.
[0249] 4. Fabric Care Polysacchrides
[0250] a) Primary Fabric Care Polysaccharide
[0251] Suitable fabric care polysaccharides for use in the fabric
care composition of the present invention are those which have a
globular conformation in dilute aqueous solution, via a random
coiling structure. Said polysaccharides include homo- and/or
hetero-polysaccharides with simple helical structure with or
without branching, e.g., with 1,4-.alpha.-linked backbone structure
(e.g., 1,4-.alpha.-glucan, 1,4-.alpha.-xylan) with or without
branching; 1,3-.beta.-linked backbone with or without branching
(e.g., galactan), and all 1,6-linked backbones with or without
branching (e.g., dextran, pullulan, pustulan), and with a
weight-average molecular weight of from about 5,000 to about
500,000, preferably from about 8,000 to about 250,000, more
preferably from about 10,000 to about 150,000, typically with sizes
ranging from about 2 nm to about 300 nm, preferably from about 3 nm
to about 100 nm, more preferably from about 4 nm to about 30 nm.
The size is defined as the gyration length occupied by the molecule
in dilute aqueous solutions.
[0252] Preferably the fabric care polysaccharide is selected from
the group consisting of arabinogalactan, pachyman, curdlan,
callose, paramylon, sceleroglucan, lentinan, lichenan, laminarin,
szhizophyllan, grifolan, sclerotinia sclerotiorum glucan (SSG),
Ompharia lapidescence glucan (OL-2), pustulan, dextran, pullulan,
substituted versions thereof, derivatised versions thereof, and
mixtures thereof. More preferably the fabric care polysaccharide is
selected from the group consisting of arabinogalactan, dextran,
curdlan, substituted versions thereof, derivatised versions
thereof, and mixtures thereof, and even more preferably the fabric
care polysaccharide comprises arabinogalactan, substituted versions
thereof, derivatised versions thereof, and mixtures thereof.
Substituted and/or derivatised materials of the fabric care
polysaccharides listed hereinabove are also preferred in the
present invention. Nonlimiting examples of these materials include:
carboxyl and hydroxymethyl substitutions (e.g., some uronic acid
instead of neutral sugar units); amino polysaccharides (amine
substitution); cationic quaternized polysaccharides;
C.sub.1-C.sub.18 alkylated polysaccharides; acetylated
polysaccharide ethers; polysaccharides having amino acid residues
attached (small fragments of glycoprotein); polysaccharides
containing silicone moieties, and the like. Some hydrophobic
derivatives of the polysaccharides help the polysaccharides
maintaining the globular conformation.
[0253] A preferred class of fabric care polysaccharides suitable
for use in the present invention include those that have the
backbone comprising at least some, but preferably almost entirely
of 1,3-.beta.-glycosidic linkages, preferably branched, preferably
with either side chains attached with 1,6-linkages or derivatised
for better water solubility and/or to maintain the globular
structure. The 1,6-linked branched polysaccharides with
1,3-.beta.-linked backbone have higher water solubility and/or
dispersibility than the non-branched polysaccharides, so that
branched polysaccharides can be used at higher molecular weight
ranges. Inserting other types of linkages, such as some 1,4-b
linkages in the1,3-.beta.-linked backbone also improves the
solubility of the polysaccharides. Nonlimiting examples of useful
fabric care polysaccharides with 1,3-.beta.-linked backbone include
arabinogalactan, pachyman, curdlan, callose, paramylon,
sceleroglucan, lentinan, lichenan, laminarin, szhizophyllan,
grifolan, sclerotinia sclerotiorum glucan (SSG), Ompharia
lapidescence glucan (OL-2), and mixtures thereof. Low molecular
weight materials are preferred for polysaccharides with less or no
branching, such as curdlan, while higher molecular weight materials
for highly branched polysaccharides, such as arabinogalactan, can
be used. Higher molecular weight polysaccharides with mixed 1,3-b
and 1,4-b linkages, such as lichenan, can also be used.
[0254] A preferred fabric care branched polysaccharide with
1,3-.beta.-linked backbone is arabinogalactan (also named as
galactoarabinan or epsilon-galactan). Arabinogalactans are long,
densely branched high-molecular weight polysaccharides.
Arabinogalactan that is useful in the composition of the present
invention has a molecular weight range of from about 5,000 to about
500,000, preferably from about 6,000 to about 250,000, more
preferably from about 10,000 to about 150,000. These
polysaccharides are highly branched, consisting of a galactan
backbone with side-chains of galactose and arabinose units
(consisting of b-galactopyranose, b-arabinofuranose, and
b-arabinopyranose). The major source of arabinogalactan is the
larch tree. The genus Larix (larches) is common throughout the
world. Two main sources of larch trees are western larch (Larix
occidentalis) in Western North America and Mongolian larch (Larix
dahurica). Examples of other larches are eastern larch (Larix
laricina) in eastern North America, European larch (Larix dicidua),
Japanese larch (Larix leptolepis), and Siberian larch (Larix
siberica). Most commercial arabinogalactan is produced from western
larch, through a counter-current extraction process. Larch
arabinogalactan is water soluble and is composed of arabinose and
galactose units in about a 1:6 ratio, with a trace of uronic acid.
Glycosyl linkage analysis of larch arabinogalactan is consistent
with a highly branched structure comprising a backbone of
1,3-.beta.-linked galactopyranose connected by
1,3-.beta.-glycosidic linkages, comprised of 3,4,6-, 3,6-, and 3,4-
as well as 3-linked residues. The molecular weights of the
preferred fractions of larch arabinogalactan include one fraction
in the range of from about 14,000 to about 22,000, mainly from
about 16,000 to about 21,000, and the other in the range of from
about 60,000 to about 500,000, mainly from about 80,000 to about
120,000. The fraction that has the average molecular weight of from
about 16,000 to about 20,000 is highly preferred for use in direct
applications to fabric, such as in spray-on products. The high
molecular weight fraction (of about 100,000 molecular weight), as
well as the low molecular weight fraction are suitable for use in
processes that involve subsequent water treatments, such as,
pre-soak, wash-added and/or rinse-added laundry processes and
products. High grade larch arabinogalactan is composed of greater
than about 98% arabinogalactan. Larch arabinogalactan and some of
its derivatives, such as cationic derivatives are commercially
available from Larex, Inc., St Paul, Minn.
[0255] Arabinogalactans are also present as minor, water-soluble
components of softwoods such as hemlock, black spruce, parana pine,
mugo pine, Douglas fir, incense cedar, juniper, and the sapwood of
sugar maple. Many edible and inedible plants are also rich sources
of arabinogalactans, mostly in glycoprotein form, bound to a
protein spine of either threonine, proline, or serine
("arabinogalactan-protein"). These plants include leek seeds,
carrots, radish, black gram beans, pear, maize, wheat, red wine,
Italian ryegrass, tomatoes, ragweed, sorghum, bamboo grass, and
coconut meat and milk. Many herbs with well established
immune-enhancing properties, such as Echinacea purpurea, Baptisia
tintoria, Thuja occidentalis, Angelica acutiloba, and Curcuma longa
contain significant amounts of arabinogalactans. Small quantities
of arabinogalactans also occur in other plants, such as, green
coffee bean (sugar ratio about 2:5), centrosema seeds (sugar ratio
about 1:13), and wheat flour (sugar ratio about 7:3). About 70% of
the water solubles from soybean flour is an arabinogalactan with a
sugar ratio of about 1:2.
[0256] Examples of other fabric care polysaccharides that have
1,3-.beta.-linkage as a part of the backbone include:
1,3-.beta.-xylan (from, e.g., Pencillus dumetosus), curdlen, a
1,3-.beta.-glucan (from e.g., Alcaligenes faecalis), paramylon B, a
1,3-.beta.-glucan (from, e.g., Euglena gracilis), lichenin, a
(1,3),(1,6)-.beta.-glucan (from various sources including Cetraria
islandica), sceleroglucan, a (1,3),(1,6)-.beta.-glucan (from, e.g.,
Sclerotium rolfii), and lentinen, a (1,3),(1,6)-.beta.-glucan
(from, e.g., Lentinus edodes). More details about these and other
polysaccharides with 1,3-.beta.-linked backbone are given in
"Chemistry and Biology of (1.fwdarw.3)-.beta.-Glucans", B. A. Stone
and A. E. Clarke, La Trobe University Press, Victoria, Australia,
1992, pp. 68-71, and 82-83, incorporated herein by reference.
[0257] Substituted and/or derivatised materials of arabinogalactans
are also preferred in the present invention. Nonlimiting examples
of these materials include: carboxyl and hydroxymethyl
substitutions (e.g., some uronic acid instead of neutral sugar
units); amino polysaccharides (amine substitution); cationic
quaternized polysaccharides; C.sub.1-C.sub.18 alkylated
polysaccharides; acetylated polysaccharide ethers; polysaccharides
having amino acid residues attached (small fragments of
glycoprotein); polysaccharides containing silicone moieties. These
substituted and/or derivatised polysaccharides can provide
additional benefits, such as: amine substitution can bind and/or
condense with oxidatively damaged regions of the fiber to
rejuvenate aged fabrics; acetylated sugar ethers can serve as
bleach activators in subsequent processes where hydrogen peroxide
is present; polysaccharides having amino acid residues can improve
delivery of fabric care benefits for fabrics containing
proteinaceous fibers, e.g., wool and silk; and silicone-derivatised
polysaccharides can provide additional fabric softness and
lubricity. Examples of derivatised arabinogalactan include the
3-chloro-2-hydroxypropyltrimethyl ammonium chloride derivative,
available from Larex, Inc and the arabinogalactan-proteins given
hereinabove.
[0258] The 1,3-.beta.-linked backbone of the fabric care
polysaccharides of the present invention (as in
1,3-.beta.-galactans, 1,3-.beta.-D-mannans, 1,3-.beta.-D-xylans and
1,3-.beta.-D-glucans) has a pseudohelical conformation. As such,
these polysaccharides have a backbone chain that is flexible and in
aqueous solution, has a tendency to coil into a globular structure
to substantially reduce their apparent dimension (gyration volume),
as opposed to the backbone chain of 1,4-.beta.-glucan which has an
extended dimension. The polysaccharides with 1,3-.beta.-linked
backbone and extensive branching via 1,6-linkages, or
polysaccharides with helical confirmation or polysaccharides with
1,6-linked backbone have added flexibility due to the "coiling"
nature of the 1,6-linkages. In water these polysaccharides with
1,3-.beta.-linked backbone and 1,6-branching, e.g.,
arabinogalactans, have a globular conformation with high
flexibility to coil into compact, flexible and deformable
microscopic particles. For example, an arabinogalactan having a
nominal molecular weight of about 18,000 has a size (gyration
length) of only from 5 nm to about 10 nm in dilute aqueous
solutions. This structural feature of the globular polysaccharides
with helical conformation and random coiling nature improves
physical properties such as water-solubility, low viscosity and
emulsification. Not to be bound by theory is believed that the
globular, compact and flexible structural property and low
viscosity of the fabric care polysaccharides with 1,3-.beta.-linked
backbone of the present invention, such as arabinogalactans, is
important for providing the fabric care benefits, either via
efficient deposition of the polysaccharide globules on the rough
fabric surface or via appropriate fitting/filling of these globules
in the openings and/or defective spaces on the fabric fiber
surface, where they can orient itself to conform to the space
available. Furthermore, it is believed that at low levels, these
low molecular weight (about 10,000 to about 150,000) polysaccharide
globules of the present invention can very effectively bond fibers
and/or microfibrils together by "spot bonding". This way, the
fabric care polysaccharide globules can provide many desired
benefits such as: fabric strengthening, fabric wear resistance
and/or reduction, wrinkle removal and/or reduction, fabric pilling
prevention and/or reduction, fabric color maintenance and/or fading
reduction, color restoration, fabric soiling reduction, fabric
shape retention, fabric shrinkage reduction, and/or improving
fabric feel/smoothness, scratchiness reduction, for different types
of fabrics such as cellulosic (cotton, rayon, etc.), wool, silk,
and the like.
[0259] Polysaccharides with helical conformation, but not within
the range of the molecular weight range specified above have
different physical properties such as low solubility and gelling
characteristics (e.g., starch, a high molecular weight
1,4-.alpha.-D-glucan).
[0260] The fabric care polysaccharides with globular structure of
the present invention can provide at least some fabric care
benefits to all types of fabrics, including fabrics made of natural
fibers, synthetic fibers, and mixtures thereof. Nonlimiting
examples of fabric types that can be treated with the fabric care
compositions of the present invention, to obtain fabric care
benefits include fabrics made of (1) cellulosic fibers such as
cotton, rayon, linen, Tencel, (2) proteinaceous fibers such as
silk, wool and related mammalian fibers, (3) synthetic fibers such
as polyester, acrylic, nylon, and the like, (4) long vegetable
fibers from jute, flax, ramie, coir, kapok, sisal, henequen, abaca,
hemp and sunn, and (5) mixtures thereof. Other unanimated
substrates and/or surfaces made with natural fibers and/or
synthetic fibers, and/or materials, such as non-woven fabrics,
paddings, carpets, paper, disposable products, films, foams, can
also be treated with the fabric care polysaccharides with
1,3-.beta.-linked backbone to improve their properties.
[0261] For specific applications, the composition can contain from
about 0.001% to about 10% of fabric care polysaccharide with
globular structure, preferably from about 0.01% to about 10%, more
preferably from about 0.1% to about 5%, by weight of the usage
composition. The present invention also relates to concentrated
liquid or solid compositions, which are diluted to form
compositions with the usage concentrations, for use in the "usage
conditions". Concentrated compositions comprise a higher level of
fabric care polysaccharide, typically from about 1% to about 99%,
preferably from about 2% to about 65%, more preferably from about
3% to about 40%, by weight of the concentrated fabric care
composition. Depending on the target fabric care benefit to be
provided, the concentrated compositions should also comprise
proportionally higher levels of the desired optional
ingredients.
[0262] Typical composition to be dispensed from a sprayer contains
a level of fabric care polysaccharide with globular structure of
from about 0.01% to about 5%, preferably from about 0.05% to about
2%, more preferably from about 0.1% to about 1%, by weight of the
usage composition.
[0263] Dryer-added compositions typically contain a level of fabric
care polysaccharide with globular structure of from about 0.01% to
about 10% by weight of the dryer-added compositions.
[0264] b) Adjunct Fabric Care Oligosaccharides
[0265] An optional but preferred adjunct fabric care agent in the
present invention is selected from the group consisting of
oligosaccharides, especially mixtures of oligosaccharides,
especially, isomaltooligosaccharides (IMO) (including mixtures),
the individual components of said mixtures, substituted versions
thereof, derivatised versions thereof, and mixtures thereof. The
adjunct fabric fabric care oligosaccharides help to provide some
fabric benefits, such as wrinkle removal and/or reduction,
anti-pilling, anti-wear, fabric color maintenance, and overall
appearance benefits, especially to cellulosic fibers/fabrics, such
as cotton, rayon, ramie, jute, flax, linen, polynosic-fibers,
Lyocell (Tencel.RTM., polyester/cotton blends, other cotton blends,
and the like, especially cotton, rayon, linen, polyester/cotton
blends, and mixtures thereof.
[0266] Suitable adjunct fabric care oligosaccharides that are
useful in the present invention include oligosaccharides with a
degree of polymerization (DP) of from about 1 to about 15,
preferably from about 2 to about 10, and wherein each monomer is
selected from the group consisting of reducing saccharide
containing 5 and/or 6 carbon atoms, including isomaltose,
isomaltotriose, isomaltotetraose, isomaltooligosaccharide,
fructooligosaccharide, levooligosaccharides,
galactooligosaccharide, xylooligosaccharide,
gentiooligosaccharides, disaccharides, glucose, fructose,
galactose, xylose, mannose, arabinose, rhamnose, maltose, sucrose,
lactose, maltulose, ribose, lyxose, allose, altrose, gulose, idose,
talose, trehalose, nigerose, kojibiose, lactulose,
oligosaccharides, maltooligosaccharides, trisaccharides,
tetrasaccharides, pentasaccharides, hexasaccharides,
oligosaccharides from partial hydrolysates of natural
polysaccharide sources, and the like, and mixtures thereof,
preferably mixtures of isomaltooligosaccharides, especially
mixtures including isomaltooligosaccharides, comprising from about
3 to about 7 units of glucose, respectively, and which are linked
by 1,2-.alpha., 1,3-.alpha., 1,4-.alpha.- and 1,6-.alpha.-linkages,
and mixtures of these linkages. Oligosaccharides containing
b-linkages are also preferred. Preferred oligosaccharides are
acyclic and have at least one linkage that is not an
.alpha.-1,4-glycosidic bond. A preferred oligosaccharide is a
mixture containing IMO: from 0 to about 20% by weight of glucose,
from about 10 to about 65% of isomaltose, from about 1% to about
45% of each of isomaltotriose, isomaltetraose and isomaltopentaose,
from 0 to about 3% of each of isomaltohexaose, isomaltoheptaose,
isomaltooctaose and isomaltononaose, from about 0.2% to about 15%
of each of isomaltohexaose and isomaltoheptaose, and from 0 to
about 50% by weight of said mixture being isomaltooligosaccharides
of 2 to 7 glucose units and from 0 to about 10% by weight of said
mixture being isomaltooligosaccharides of about 7 to about 10
glucose units. Other nonlimiting examples of preferred acyclic
oligosaccharides, with approximate content by weight percent,
are:
5 Isomaltooligosaccharide Mixture I Trisaccharides (maltotriose,
panose, isomaltotriose) 40-65% Disaccharides (maltose, isomaltose)
5-15% Monosaccharide (glucose) 0-20% Higher branched sugars (4 <
DP < 10) 10-30% Isomaltooligosaccharide Mixture II
Trisaccharides (maltotriose, panose, isomaltotriose) 10-25%
Disaccharides (maltose, isomaltose) 10-55% Monosaccharide (glucose)
10-20% Higher branched sugars (4 < DP < 10) 5-10%
Isomaltooligosaccharide Mixture III Tetrasaccharides (stachyose)
10-40% Trisaccharides (raffinose) 0-10% Disaccharides (sucrose,
trehalose) 10-50% Monosaccharide (glucose, fructose) 0-10% Other
higher branched sugars (4 < DP < 10) 0-5%
[0267] Oligosaccharide mixtures are either prepared by enzymatic
reactions or separated as natural products from plant materials.
The enzymatic synthesis of oligosaccharides involves either adding
monosaccharides, one at a time, to a di- or higher saccharide to
produce branched oligosaccharides, or it can involve the
degradation of polysaccharides followed by transfer of saccharides
to branching positions. For instance, Oligosaccharide Mixtures I
and II are prepared by enzymatic hydrolysis of starch to
maltooligosaccharides, which are then converted to
isomaltooligosaccharides by a transglucosidase reaction.
Oligosaccharide Mixture III, for example, is a mixture of
oligosaccharides isolated from soybean. Soybean oligosaccharides
such as Mixture III, are of pure natural origin.
[0268] Cyclic oligosaccharides can also be useful in the fabric
care composition of the present invention. Preferred cyclic
oligosaccharides include a-cyclodextrin, b-cyclodextrin,
.gamma.-cyclodextrin, their branched derivatives such as
glucosyl-.alpha.-cyclodextrin-.alpha.-digluc-
osyl-.alpha.-cyclodextrin, maltosyl-.alpha.-cyclodextrin,
glucosyl-.beta.-cyclodextrin, diglucosyl-.beta.-cyclodextrin, and
mixtures thereof. The cyclodextrins also provide an optional but
very important benefit of odor control, and are disclosed more
fully hereinbelow.
[0269] Substituted and/or derivatised materials of the
oligosaccharides listed hereinabove are also preferred in the
present invention. Nonlimiting examples of these materials include:
carboxyl and hydroxymethyl substitutions (e.g., glucuronic acid
instead of glucose); amino oligosaccharides (amine substitution,
e.g., glucosamine instead of glucose); cationic quaternized
oligosaccharides; C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkylated oligosaccharides;
acetylated oligosaccharide ethers; oligosaccharides having amino
acid residues attached (small fragments of glycoprotein);
oligosaccharides containing silicone moieties. These substituted
and/or derivatised oligosaccharides can provide additional
benefits, such as: carboxyl and hydroxymethyl substitutions can
introduce readily oxidizable materials on and in the fiber, thus
reducing the probability of the fiber itself being oxidized by
oxidants, such as bleaches; amine substitution can bind and/or
condense with oxidatively damaged regions of the fiber to
rejuvenate aged fabrics; acetylated sugar ethers can serve as
bleach activators in subsequent processes where hydrogen peroxide
is present; oligosaccharides having amino acid residues can improve
delivery of fabric care benefits for fabrics containing
proteinaceous fibers, e.g., wool and silk; and silicone-derivatised
oligosaccharides can provide additional fabric softness and
lubricity. C.sub.6 alkyl oligosaccharide is disclosed (along with
other higher, viz., C.sub.6-C.sub.30, alkyl polysaccharides) in
U.S. Pat. No. 4,565,647, issued Jan. 21, 1986 to Llenado, for use
as foaming agent in foaming compositions such as laundry
detergents, personal and hair cleaning compositions, and fire
fighting compositions. The C.sub.6 alkyl oligosaccharide is a poor
surfactant and not preferred for use as surfactant in the present
invention, but preferably can be used to provide the fabric care
benefits that are not known, appreciated and/or disclosed in U.S.
Pat No. 4,565,647. U.S. Pat. No. 4,488,981, issued Dec. 18, 1984
discloses the use of some C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkylated
oligosaccharides (lower alkyl glycosides) in aqueous liquid
detergents to reduce their viscosity and to prevent phase
separation. C.sub.1-C.sub.6 alkylated oligosaccharides can be used
to provide the fabric care benefits that are not known, appreciated
and/or disclosed in U.S. Pat No. 4,488,981. These patents are
incorporated herein by reference.
[0270] It is believed that the fabric care oligosaccharide is
adsorbed and binds with cellulosic fabrics to improve the
properties of the fabrics. It is believed that the fabric care
oligosaccharide is bound to the cellulosic fibers, diffuses in and
fills the defect sites (the amorphous region) of the fiber, to
provide the above dewrinkling, increased strength and improved
appearance benefits. The extent of the amorphous, non-crystalline
region varies with cellulosic fiber types, e.g., the relative
crystallinity of cotton is about 70.% and for regenerated
cellulose, such as, rayon it is about 30.% , as reported by P. H.
Hermans and A. Weidinger, "X-ray studies on the crystallinity of
cellulose" in the Journal of Polymer Science, Vol IV, p135-144,
1949. It is believed that the amorphous regions are accessible for
chemical and physical modifications, and that in the durable press
treatment, the amorphous regions are filled with molecules that can
crosslink cellulose polymers by covalent bonds, to deliver
wrinkle-free benefits (cf. S. P. Rawland, in "Modified
Cellulosics," R. M. Rowell and R. A. Young, Eds., Academic Press,
N.Y., 1978, pp. 147-167, cited by G. C. Tesoro, in `Crosslinking of
cellulosics`, Handbook of Fiber Science and Technology, Vol. II,
p.6, edited by M. Lewin and S. B. Sello, published by Marcel
Dekker, 1983. These publications are incorporated herein by
reference.
[0271] For some aspects of the present invention the composition
can contain from about 0.001% to about 10% of the optional, but
preferred oligosaccharide, preferably from about 0.01% to about 8%,
more preferably from about 0.1% to about 5%, by weight of the usage
composition.
[0272] Typical composition to be dispensed from a sprayer contains
a level of optional fabric care oligosaccharide of from about 0.01%
to about 3%, preferably from about 0.05% to about 2%, more
preferably from about 0.1% to about 1%, by weight of the usage
composition.
[0273] Dryer-added compositions typically contain a level of
optional fabric care oligosaccharide of from about 0.01% to about
10%.
[0274] Both the primary fabric care polysaccharides and the adjunct
fabric care oligosaccharides have a compact structure, but they
have different sizes. The smaller oligosaccharides are believed to
be able to diffuse and penetrate into small defective sites, such
as the amorphous region of cotton fibers, while the larger
polysaccharides can fill in larger openings and/or defective sites
on the fabric fiber surface. Therefore depending on the fabric care
benefit target, the primary fabric care polysaccharides and the
adjunct fabric care polysaccharide can be used alone, or in
mixtures. When the adjunct fabric care polysaccharide (e.g.
oligosaccharides) are present, the weight ratio between said
oligosaccharides and the fabric care polysaccharides is typically
from about 1:99 to about 99:1, preferably from about 15:85 to about
85:15, and more preferably from about 30:70 to about 70:30.
[0275] 5. Mixtures Thereof
[0276] As stated hereinbefore, the composition can also contain
mixtures of fiber lubricant, shape retention polymer, lithium
salts, and/or fabric care polysaccharides.
[0277] C. Surfactants
[0278] Surfactant is an optional but highly preferred ingredient of
the present invention. Surfactant is especially useful in the
composition to facilitate the dispersion, emulsification and/or
solubilization of wrinkle control agents such as silicones and/or
certain relatively water insoluble shape retention polymers. The
surfactant can provide some plasticizing effect to the shape
retention polymers resulting in a more flexible polymer network.
Surfactants can provide a low surface tension that permits the
composition to spread readily and more uniformly on hydrophobic
surfaces like polyester and nylon. Surfactants also help the
composition penetrate fibers more thoroughly to provide hydrogen
bond breaking, lubricity and plasticity at every level of the fiber
structure. Surfactant also aids the composition in penetrating
fabrics treated with hydrophobic fabric finishes that tend to repel
water. Residual surfactant also helps keep fibrils flat against the
fiber surface, thus smoothing the surface and aiding in wrinkle
release. Residual surfactant can also act to stiffen fibers, thus
helping to prevent rewrinkling. Surfactant is preferably included
when the composition is used in a spray dispenser and/or a
dispenser for use in a clothes dryer other fabric modifying machine
in order to enhance the spray and/or dispensing characteristics of
the composition and allow the composition to distribute more
evenly, and to prevent clogging of the spray apparatus and/or
dispenser apparatus. The spreading of the composition can also
allow it to dry faster, so that the treated material is ready to
use sooner. For concentrated compositions, the surfactant
facilitates the dispersion of many actives such as antimicrobial
actives and perfumes in the concentrated aqueous compositions.
[0279] Surfactants normally fall into several groups, nonionic
surfactants, ionic surfactants, amphoteric surfactants, and
fluorine-based surfactants. Another special class of surfactants
are cyclodextrin compatible surfactants which are disclosed under
the section titled `Odor Control Agents`. It is preferred to use
cyclodextrin compatible surfactants when optional cyclodextrin is
incorporated in the formulation.
[0280] When optional surfactants are incorporated, typical levels
are at least about 0.0001%, preferably 0.001%, more preferably at
least about 0.01%, and even more preferably at least about 0.1% and
typically less than about 20%, preferably less than about 15%, more
preferably less than about 10%, even more preferably less than
about 5% and most preferably less than about 3% of the weight of
the composition.
[0281] 1. Nonionic Surfactants
[0282] A preferred, but nonlimiting, type of nonionic surfactant is
alkyl ethoxylated surfactant, such as addition products of ethylene
oxide with fatty alcohols, fatty acids, fatty amines, etc.
Optionally, addition products of mixtures of ethylene oxide and
propylene oxide with fatty alcohols, fatty acids, fatty amines can
be used. The ethoxylated surfactant includes compounds having the
general formula:
R.sup.8-Z-(CH.sub.2CH.sub.2O).sub.sB
[0283] wherein R.sup.8 is an alkyl group or an alkyl aryl group,
selected from the group consisting of primary, secondary and
branched chain alkyl hydrocarbyl groups, primary, secondary and
branched chain alkenyl hydrocarbyl groups, and/or primary,
secondary and branched chain alkyl- and alkenyl-substituted
phenolic hydrocarbyl groups having from about 6 to about 20 carbon
atoms, preferably from about 8 to about 18, more preferably from
about 10 to about 15 carbon atoms; s is an integer from about 2 to
about 45, preferably from about 2 to about 20, more preferably from
about 2 to about 15; B is hydrogen, a carboxylate group, or a
sulfate group; and linking group Z is selected from the group
consisting of: --O--, --N(R).sub.x--, --C(O)O--, --C(O)N(R)--,
--C(O)N(R)--, and mixtures thereof, in which R, when present, is
R.sup.8, a lower alkyl with about 1 to about 4 carbons, a
polyalkylene oxide, or hydrogen, and x is 1 or 2.
[0284] The nonionic alkyl ethoxylated surfactants herein are
characterized by an HLB (hydrophilic-lipophilic balance) of from
about 5 to about 20, preferably from about 6 to about 15.
[0285] Nonlimiting examples of preferred alkyl ethoxylated
surfactants are:
[0286] straight-chain, primary alcohol ethoxylates, with R.sup.8
being C.sub.8-C.sub.18 alkyl and/or alkenyl group, more preferably
C.sub.10-C.sub.14, and s being from about 2 to about 8, preferably
from about 2 to about 6;
[0287] straight-chain, secondary alcohol ethoxylates, with R.sup.8
being C.sub.8-C.sub.18 alkyl and/or alkenyl, e.g., 3-hexadecyl,
2-octadecyl, 4-eicosanyl, and 5-eicosanyl, and s being from about 2
to about 10;
[0288] alkyl phenol ethoxylates wherein the alkyl phenols having an
alkyl or alkenyl group containing from about 3 to about 20 carbon
atoms in a primary, secondary or branched chain configuration,
preferably from about 6 to about 12 carbon atoms, and s is from
about 2 to about 12, preferably from about 2 to about 8;
[0289] branched chain alcohol ethoxylates, wherein branched chain
primary and secondary alcohols (or Guerbet alcohols) which are
available, e.g., from the well-known "OXO" process, or modification
thereof, are ethoxylated.
[0290] Especially preferred are alkyl ethoxylate surfactants with
each R.sup.8 being C.sub.8-C.sub.16 straight chain and/or branch
chain alkyl and the number of ethyleneoxy groups s being from about
2 to about 6, preferably from about 2 to about 4, more preferably
with R.sup.8 being C.sub.8-C.sub.15 alkyl and s being from about
2.25 to about 3.5. These nonionic surfactants are characterized by
an HLB of from 6 to about 11, preferably from about 6.5 to about
9.5, and more preferably from about 7 to about 9. Nonlimiting
examples of commercially available preferred surfactants are Neodol
91-2.5 (C.sub.9-C.sub.10, s=2.7, HLB=8.5), Neodol 23-3
(C.sub.12-C.sub.13, s=2.9, HLB=7.9) and Neodol 25-3
(C.sub.12-C.sub.15, s=2.8, HLB=7.5). It is found, very
surprisingly, that these preferred surfactants which are themselves
not very water soluble (0.1% aqueous solutions of these surfactants
are not clear), can at low levels, effectively emulsify and or
disperse silicone oils and these surfactants can also solubilize
and/or disperse shape retention polymers such as copolymers
containing acrylic acid and tert-butyl acrylate into clear
compositions, even without the presence of a low molecular weight
alcohol. Many nonlimiting examples of suitable nonionic surfactants
are given in the table below. Other useful nonionic alkyl
alkoxylated surfactants are ethoxylated alkyl amines derived from
the condensation of ethylene oxide with hydrophobic alkyl amines,
with R.sup.8 having from about 8 to about 22 carbon atoms and s
being from about 3 to about 30.
[0291] Other examples of useful ethoxylated surfactant include
carboxylated alcohol ethoxylate, also known as ether carboxylate,
with R.sup.8 having from about 12 to about 16 carbon atoms and s
being from about 5 to about 13; ethoxylated alkyl amine or
quaternary ammonium surfactants, R.sup.8 having from about 8 to
about 22 carbon atoms and s being from about 3 to about 30, such as
PEG-5 cocomonium methosulfate, PEG-15 cocomonium chloride, PEG-15
oleammonium chloride and bis(polyethoxyethanol)tallow ammonium
chloride.
[0292] Additional suitable nonionic surfactants include surfactants
derived from carbohydrates such as sorbitan esters, especially
sorbitan monoesters, also alkyl glucosides, and alkyl
polyglucosides. A specific description of many surfactants which
are derived from carbohydrates can be found in Handbook of
Surfactants, M. R. Porter, 1991, Blackie & Son Ltd, pp.
142-145. Glucamines are additional examples of surfactants derived
from carbohydrates and are included herein by reference to U.S.
Pat. No. 5,194,639 issued Mar. 16, 1993 to D. S. Connor, J. J.
Scheibel, and R. G. Severson; U.S. Pat. No. 5,338,487 issued Aug.
16, 1993 to D. S. Connor, J. J. Scheibel, and J.-N. Kao; U.S. Pat.
No. 5,489,393 issued Feb. 6, 1996 to D. S. Connor, J. J. Scheibel,
and Y. C. Fu; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,512,699 issued Apr. 30, 1996 to
D. S. Connor, Y. C. Fu, and J. J. Scheibel. Preferred alkyl
polyglucosides are those having aqueous surface tension below about
35 mN/m such as AG 6202 and AG6210 from Akzo Nobel Chemicals, Inc.,
Chicago, Ill.
6TABLE 1 Nonlimiting Examples of Some Suitable Nonionic
Surfactants. HLB Name Structure Value Suppliers Neodol .RTM. 91-2.5
C.sub.9-C.sub.10 - 2.7EO 8.5 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol .RTM. 23-1
C.sub.12-C.sub.13 - 1.0EO 3.7 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol .RTM. 23-2
C.sub.12-C.sub.13 - 2.0EO 5.9 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol .RTM. 23-3
C.sub.12-C.sub.13 - 2.9EO 7.9 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol .RTM. 25-3
C.sub.12-C.sub.15 - 2.8EO 7.5 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol .RTM. 23-5
C.sub.12-C.sub.13 - 5.0EO 10.7 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol .RTM. 25-9
C.sub.12-C.sub.15 - 8.9EO 13.1 Shell Chemical Co. Neodol .RTM.
25-12 C.sub.12-C.sub.15 - 11.9EO 14.4 Shell Chemical Co. Hetoxol
.RTM. TD-3 C.sub.13 - 3EO 7.9 Heterene Inc. Hetoxol .RTM. OL-5
Oleyl - 5EO 8.0 Heterene Inc. Kessco .RTM. PEG-8 Monooleate Oleoyl
- 8EO 11.0 Stepan Co. Kessco .RTM. Glycero monooleate Glyceryl
mono-oleate 3.8 Stepan Co. Arlacel .RTM. 20 Sorbitan mono-laurate
8.6 ICI Americas
[0293] 2. Ionic Surfactants
[0294] Nonlimiting preferred ionic surfactants are the class of
anionic surfactants. Anionic surfactants are preferred ionic
surfactants since they are least likely to leave residues. Many
suitable nonlimiting examples from the class of anionic surfactants
can be found in Surfactants and Interfacial Phenomena, 2.sup.nd
Ed., Milton J. Rosen, 1989, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., pp. 7-16,
which is hereby incorporated by reference. Additional suitable
nonlimiting examples of anionic surfactants can be found in
Handbook of Surfactants, M. R. Porter, 1991, Blackie & Son Ltd,
pp. 54-115 and references therein, the disclosure of which is
incorporated herein by reference.
[0295] Structurally, suitable anionic surfactants contain at least
one hydrophobic moiety and at least one hydrophilic moiety. The
surfactant can contain multiple hydrophobic moieties and/or
multiple hydrophilic moieties, but preferably less than or equal to
about 2 hydrophobic moieties and less than or equal to about 3
hydrophilic moieties. The hydrophobic moiety is typically comprised
of hydrocarbons either as an alkyl group or an alkyl-aryl group.
Alkyl groups typically contain from about 6 to about 22 carbons,
preferably about 10 to about 18 carbons, and more preferably from
about 12 to about 16 carbons; aryl groups typically contain alkyl
groups containing from about 4 to about 6 carbons. Each alkyl group
can be a branched or linear chain and is either saturated or
unsaturated. A typical aryl group is benzene. Some typical
hydrophilic groups for anionic surfactants include but are not
limited to --CO.sub.2.sup.-, --OSO.sub.3.sup.-, --SO.sub.3.sup.-,
--(OR.sub.1).sub.x--CO.sub.2.sup.-,
--(OR.sub.1).sub.x--OSO.sub.3.sup.-,
--(OR.sub.1).sub.x--SO.sub.3.sup.-. With x being less than about 10
and preferably less than about 5. Some nonlimiting examples of
suitable surfactants includes, Stepanol.RTM. WAC, Biosoft.RTM. 40
(Stepan Co., Northfield, Ill.).
[0296] Other suitable ionic surfactants include the cationic
surfactants. Nonlimiting examples of these classes of surfactants
can be found in Handbook of Surfactants, M. R. Porter, 1991,
Blackie & Son Ltd, pp. 179-202 as well as in Surfactants and
Interfacial Phenomena, 2.sup.nd Ed., Milton J. Rosen, 1989, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., pp. 17-20 and pp. 28-31 and references
therein, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated herein by
reference.
[0297] 3. Amphoteric Surfactants
[0298] Amphoteric surfactants are suitable for use in the present
invention. Amphoteric surfactants, also referred to as zwitterionic
surfactants comprise multiple head groups having both negative and
positive charge or at least the capacity to acquire negative and
positive charge. Amphoteric surfactants have advantages over other
surfactants since these are less irritating to the skin and yet
still provide good wetting. Some nonlimiting examples of amphoteric
surfactants useful for the present invention are: betaines,
amine-oxides, sulfobetaines, sultaines, glycinates,
aminoipropionates, imidazoline-based amphoterics. Various
amphoteric surfactants are disclosed in the Handbook of Surfactants
by M. R. Porter, Chapman & Hall, 1991 and references therein
and in Surfactants and Interfacial Phenomena by M. Rosen, 2.sup.nd
Ed., John Wiley & Sons, 1989 and references therein and these
are incorporated herein by reference.
[0299] 4. Fluorocarbon Surfactans
[0300] Fluorocarbon surfactants are the class of surfactants
wherein the hydrophobic part of the amphiphile comprises at least
in part some portion of a carbon-based linear or cyclic moiety
having fluorines attached to the carbon where typically hydrogens
would be attached to the carbons together with a hydrophilic head
group. Some typical nonlimiting fluorocarbon surfactants include
fluorinated alkyl polyoxyalkylene, and fluorinated alkyl esters as
well as ionic surfactants. Representative structures for these
compounds are given below:
R.sub.fR(R.sub.1O).sub.xR.sub.2 (1)
R.sub.fR--OC(O)R.sub.3 (2)
R.sub.fR--Y-Z (3)
R.sub.fRZ (4)
[0301] where R.sub.f contains from about 6 to about 18 carbons each
having from about 0 to about 3 fluorines attached. R is either an
alkyl or alkylene oxide group which when present, has from about 1
to about 10 carbons and R.sub.1 represents an alkylene radical
having from about 1 to about 4 carbons, R.sub.2 is either a
hydrogen or a small alkyl capping group having from about 1 to
about 3 carbons. R.sub.3 represents a hydrocarbon moiety comprising
from about 2 to about 22 including the carbon on the ester group.
This hydrocarbon can be linear, branched or cyclic saturated or
unsaturated and contained moieties based on oxygen, nitrogen, and
sulfur including, but not limited to ethers, alcohols, esters,
carboxylates, amides, amines, thio-esters, and thiols; these
oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur moieties can either interrupt the
hydrocabon chain or be pendant on the hydrocarbon chain. In
structure 3, Y represents a hydrocarbon group that can be an alkyl,
pyridine group, amidopropyl, etc. that acts as a linking group
between the fluorinated chain and the hydrophilic head group. In
structures 3 and 4, Z represents a cationic, anionic, and
amphoteric hydrophilic head groups including, but not limited to
carboxylates, sulfates, sulfonates, quaternary ammonium groups, and
betaines. Nonlimiting commercially available examples of these
structures include Zonyl.RTM. 9075, FSO, FSN, FS-300, FS-310,
FSN-100, FSO-100, FTS, TBC from DuPont and Fluorad.TM. surfactants
FC-430, FC-43 1, FC-740, FC-99, FC-120, FC-754, FC170C, and FC-171
from the 3M.TM. company in St. Paul, Minn.
[0302] D. Organic Solvents
[0303] Optional optional organic solvents include solvents and
plasticizers and plasticizers act that aid the natural ability of
the said composition to plasticize fibers and these provide many
other benefits as well to the present invention which are disclosed
herein. Many orgnanic solvents reduce the surface tension of said
composition to achieve better spreading and pentration particularly
on surfaces that tend to be hydrophobic. Organic solvents modify
dry times both by increasing or decreasing the dry time, whichever
is desirable for a particular aspect of the present invention. For
some aspects of the present invention, it is preferred to decrease
dry time e.g. such that consumers may wear clothes quickly after
the treatment is applied. When it is desired to increase dry time,
it is typical to include at least about 3% solvent or plasticizer,
preferably at least about 5% solvent or plasticizer by weight of
the composition. For some aspects of the present invention, it is
preferred to slow the drying time e.g. to maintain fiber
platicization for a longer period of time and therefore have more
time to effect wrinkle removal.
[0304] Low molecular weight polyols with relatively high boiling
points, as compared to water, such as ethylene glycol, propylene
glycol and/or glycerol are preferred optional ingredients for
improving odor control performance of the composition of the
present invention, especially when cyclodextrin is present, as
disclosed herein below under the section on odor control agents.
Some organic solvents provide anti-microbial efficacy as disclosed
herein under the section on anti-microbial actives.
[0305] Acceptable organic solvents include compounds having from
one to ten carbons. The following non-limiting classes of compounds
are suitable: mono-alcohols, diols, polyhydric alcohols, ethers,
ketones, esters, organic acids, and alkyl glyceryl ethers, and
hydrocarbons. While all organic solvents as defined above are
acceptable in the present invention, typically, organic solvents
that are miscible and/or soluble in water are preferred. On the
other hand, when a immiscible or insoluble organic solvent has
other desirable properties, e.g. low odor or favorable economics,
such that it is the acceptable or in some aspects of the present
invention, the preferred organic solvent, surfactants, as disclosed
herein, can be used to increase miscibility and solubility. Some
nonlimiting examples include methanol, ethanol, isopropanol,
hexanol, 1,2-hexanediol, hexylene glycol, (e.g.
2-methyl-2,4-pentanediol)- , isopropylen glycol
(3-methyl-1,3-butanediol), 1,2-butylene glycol, 2,3-butylene
glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, 1,4-butylene glycol, 1,3-propylene
glycol, 1,2-propylene glycol, isomers of cyclohexanedimethanol,
isomers of propanediol, isomers of butanediol, the isomers of
trimethylpentanediol, the isomers of ethylmethylpentanediol,
alcohol ethoxylates of 2-ethyl-1,3-hexanediol,
2,2,4-trimethyl-1,3-pentan- ediol, alcohol ethoxylates of
2,2,4-trimethyl-1,3-pentanediol glycerol, ethylene glycol,
diethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, sorbitol,
3-methyl-3-methoxybutanol, 3-methoxybutanol, 1-ethoxy-2-propanol,
diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monopropyl
ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, triethylene glycol
monoethyl ether, erythritol, and mixtures of solvents and
plasticizers. When optional cyclodextrin is present, the
plasticizer should be compatible with it. Mixtures of organic
solvents are also suitable.
[0306] When organic solvent is used, it is used typically at a
level of at least about 0.5%, preferably at least about 1%, more
preferably at least about 2%, even more preferably at least about
3% and still more preferably at least about 4% and typically less
than about 30%, preferably less than about 25%, more preferably
less than about 20%, even more preferably less than about 15% by
weight of the composition. To reduce concerns assoicated with
emitting volatile organic compounds into the environment and reduce
safety issues associated with flammability, it is typical to limit
the amount of solvent in the composition to lower than about 10%,
and preferably lower than about 7% by weight of the composition. It
is preferably for the usage composition to have a flash point of at
least about 55.degree. C., more preferably at least about than
about 60 .degree. C., even more preferably at least about
65.degree. C. It is acceptable for the present invention to use
mixtures of solvents and/or plasticizers.
[0307] E. Malodor Control Agent
[0308] The compositions for odor control are of the type disclosed
in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,534,165; 5,578,563; 5,663,134; 5,668,097;
5,670,475; and 5,714,137, Trinh et al. issued Jul. 9, 1996; Nov.
26, 1996; Sep. 2, 1997; Sep. 16, 1997; Sep. 23, 1997; and Feb. 3,
1998 respectively, all of said patents being incorporated herein by
reference. Such compositions can contain several different optional
odor control agents in addition to the polymers described
hereinbefore that can control amine odors.
[0309] 1. Cyclodextrin
[0310] As used herein, the term "cyclodextrin" includes any of the
known cyclodextrins such as unsubstituted cyclodextrins containing
from six to twelve glucose units, especially, alpha-cyclodextrin,
beta-cyclodextrin, gamma-cyclodextrin and/or their derivatives
and/or mixtures thereof. The alpha-cyclodextrin consists of six
glucose units, the beta-cyclodextrin consists of seven glucose
units, and the gamma-cyclodextrin consists of eight glucose units
arranged in donut-shaped rings. The specific coupling and
conformation of the glucose units give the cyclodextrins a rigid,
conical molecular structures with hollow interiors of specific
volumes. The "lining" of each internal cavity is formed by hydrogen
atoms and glycosidic bridging oxygen atoms; therefore, this surface
is fairly hydrophobic. The unique shape and physical-chemical
properties of the cavity enable the cyclodextrin molecules to
absorb (form inclusion complexes with) organic molecules or parts
of organic molecules which can fit into the cavity. Many odorous
molecules can fit into the cavity including many malodorous
molecules and perfume molecules. Therefore, cyclodextrins, and
especially mixtures of cyclodextrins with different size cavities,
can be used to control odors caused by a broad spectrum of organic
odoriferous materials, which may, or may not, contain reactive
functional groups. The complexation between cyclodextrin and
odorous molecules occurs rapidly in the presence of water. However,
the extent of the complex formation also depends on the polarity of
the absorbed molecules. In an aqueous solution, strongly
hydrophilic molecules (those which are highly water-soluble) are
only partially absorbed, if at all. Therefore, cyclodextrin does
not complex effectively with some very low molecular weight organic
amines and acids when they are present at low levels on wet
fabrics. As the water is being removed however, e.g., the fabric is
being dried off, some low molecular weight organic amines and acids
have more affinity and will complex with the cyclodextrins more
readily.
[0311] The cavities within the cyclodextrin in the solution of the
present invention should remain essentially unfilled (the
cyclodextrin remains uncomplexed) while in solution, in order to
allow the cyclodextrin to absorb various odor molecules when the
solution is applied to a surface. Non-derivatised (normal)
beta-cyclodextrin can be present at a level up to its solubility
limit of about 1.85% (about 1.85 g in 100 grams of water) at room
temperature. Beta-cyclodextrin is not preferred in compositions
which call for a level of cyclodextrin higher than its water
solubility limit. Non-derivatised beta-cyclodextrin is generally
not preferred when the composition contains surfactant since it
affects the surface activity of most of the preferred surfactants
that are compatible with the derivatised cyclodextrins.
[0312] Preferably, the cyclodextrins used in the present invention
are highly water-soluble such as, alpha-cyclodextrin and/or
derivatives thereof, gamma-cyclodextrin and/or derivatives thereof,
derivatised beta-cyclodextrins, and/or mixtures thereof. The
derivatives of cyclodextrin consist mainly of molecules wherein
some of the OH groups are converted to OR groups. Cyclodextrin
derivatives include, e.g., those with short chain alkyl groups such
as methylated cyclodextrins, and ethylated cyclodextrins, wherein R
is a methyl or an ethyl group; those with hydroxyalkyl substituted
groups, such as hydroxypropyl cyclodextrins and/or hydroxyethyl
cyclodextrins, wherein R is a --CH.sub.2--CH(OH)--CH.- sub.3 or a
--CH.sub.2CH.sub.2--OH group; branched cyclodextrins such as
maltose-bonded cyclodextrins; cationic cyclodextrins such as those
containing 2-hydroxy-3-(dimethylamino)propyl ether, wherein R is
CH.sub.2--CH(OH)--CH.sub.2--N(CH.sub.3).sub.2 which is cationic at
low pH; quaternary ammonium, e.g.,
2-hydroxy-3-(trimethylammonio)propyl ether chloride groups, wherein
R is CH.sub.2--CH(OH)--CH.sub.2--N.sup.+(CH.sub.- 3).sub.3Cl.sup.-;
anionic cyclodextrins such as carboxymethyl cyclodextrins,
cyclodextrin sulfates, and cyclodextrin succinylates; amphoteric
cyclodextrins such as carboxymethyl/quaternary ammonium
cyclodextrins; cyclodextrins wherein at least one glucopyranose
unit has a 3-6-anhydro-cyclomalto structure, e.g., the
mono-3-6-anhydrocyclodextri- ns, as disclosed in "Optimal
Performances with Minimal Chemical Modification of Cyclodextrins",
F. Diedaini-Pilard and B. Perly, The 7th International Cyclodextrin
Symposium Abstracts, April 1994, p. 49, said references being
incorporated herein by reference; and mixtures thereof. Other
cyclodextrin derivatives are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,426,011,
Parmerter et al., issued Feb. 4, 1969U.S. Pat. Nos.; 3,453,257;
3,453,258; 3,453,259; and 3,453,260, all in the names of Parmerter
et al., and all issued Jul. 1, 1969; U.S. Pat. No. 3,459,731,
Gramera et al., issued Aug. 5, 1969; U.S. Pat. No. 3,553,191,
Parmerter et al., issued Jan. 5, 1971; U.S. Pat. No. 3,565,887,
Parmerter et al., issued Feb. 23, 1971; U.S. Pat. No. 4,535,152,
Szejtli et al., issued Aug. 13, 1985; U.S. Pat. No. 4,616,008,
Hirai et al., issued Oct. 7, 1986; U.S. Pat. No. 4,678,598, Ogino
et al., issued Jul. 7, 1987; U.S. Pat. No. 4,638,058, Brandt et
al., issued Jan. 20, 1987; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,746,734, Tsuchiyama
et al., issued May 24, 1988; all of said patents being incorporated
herein by reference.
[0313] Highly water-soluble cyclodextrins are those having water
solubility of at least about 10 g in 100 ml of water at room
temperature, preferably at least about 20 g in 100 ml of water,
more preferably at least about 25 g in 100 ml of water at room
temperature. The availability of solubilized, uncomplexed
cyclodextrins is essential for effective and efficient odor control
performance. Solubilized, water-soluble cyclodextrin can exhibit
more efficient odor control performance than non-water-soluble
cyclodextrin when deposited onto surfaces, especially fabric.
Examples of preferred water-soluble cyclodextrin derivatives
suitable for use herein are hydroxypropyl alpha-cyclodextrin,
methylated alpha-cyclodextrin, methylated beta-cyclodextrin,
hydroxyethyl beta-cyclodextrin, and hydroxypropyl
beta-cyclodextrin. Hydroxyalkyl cyclodextrin derivatives preferably
have a degree of substitution of from about 1 to about 14, more
preferably from about 1.5 to about 7, wherein the total number of
OR groups per cyclodextrin is defined as the degree of
substitution. Methylated cyclodextrin derivatives typically have a
degree of substitution of from about 1 to about 18, preferably from
about 3 to about 16. A known methylated beta-cyclodextrin is
heptakis-2,6-di-O-methyl-.beta.-cyclodextrin, commonly known as
DIMEB, in which each glucose unit has about 2 methyl groups with a
degree of substitution of about 14. A preferred, more commercially
available, methylated beta-cyclodextrin is a randomly methylated
beta-cyclodextrin, commonly known as RAMEB, having different
degrees of substitution, normally of about 12.6. RAMEB is more
preferred than DIMEB, since DIMEB affects the surface activity of
the preferred surfactants more than RAMEB. The preferred
cyclodextrins are available, e.g., from Cerestar USA, Inc. and
Wacker Chemicals (USA), Inc.
[0314] It is also preferable to use a mixture of cyclodextrins.
Such mixtures absorb odors more broadly by complexing with a wider
range of odoriferous molecules having a wider range of molecular
sizes. Preferably at least a portion of the cyclodextrins is
alpha-cyclodextrin and its derivatives thereof, gamma-cyclodextrin
and its derivatives thereof, and/or derivatised beta-cyclodextrin,
more preferably a mixture of alpha-cyclodextrin, or an
alpha-cyclodextrin derivative, and derivatised beta-cyclodextrin,
even more preferably a mixture of derivatised alpha-cyclodextrin
and derivatised beta-cyclodextrin, most preferably a mixture of
hydroxypropyl alpha-cyclodextrin and hydroxypropyl
beta-cyclodextrin, and/or a mixture of methylated
alpha-cyclodextrin and methylated beta-cyclodextrin.
[0315] Preferably, the solution used to treat the surface under
usage conditions is virtually not discernible when dry. Typical
levels of cyclodextrin in usage compositions for usage conditions
are from about 0.01% to about 5%, preferably from about 0.1% to
about 4%, more preferably from about 0.5% to about 2% by weight of
the composition. Compositions with higher concentrations can leave
unacceptable visible stains on fabrics as the solution evaporates
off of the fabric. This is especially a problem on thin, colored,
synthetic fabrics. In order to avoid or minimize the occurrence of
fabric staining, it is preferable that the fabric be treated at a
level of less than about 5 mg of cyclodextrin per gram of fabric,
more preferably less than about 2 mg of cyclodextrin per gram of
fabric. The presence of the surfactant can improve appearance by
minimizing localized spotting.
[0316] When it is desired to incorporate cyclodextrin into a
concentrated product, the cyclodextrin level is typically from
about 3% to about 20%, more preferably from about 5% to about 10%,
by weight of the concentrated composition, it is preferable to
dilute the concentrated composition before treating fabrics in
order to avoid staining. The resulting diluted compostion have
usage concentrations of cyclodextrin as discussed hereinbefore,
e.g., of from about 0.1% to about 5%, by weight of the diluted
composition.
[0317] Cyclodextrin-Compatible Surfactant
[0318] When the optional cyclodextrin is present, the surfactant
for use in providing the required low surface tension in the
composition of the present invention should be
cyclodextrin-compatible, that is it should not substantially form a
complex with the cyclodextrin so as to diminish performance of the
cyclodextrin and/or the surfactant when cyclodextrin is present.
Complex formation diminishes both the ability of the cyclodextrin
to absorb odors and the ability of the surfactant to lower the
surface tension of the aqueous composition.
[0319] Suitable cyclodextrin-compatible surfactants can be readily
identified by the absence of effect of cyclodextrin on the surface
tension provided by the surfactant. This is achieved by determining
the surface tension (in dyne/cm.sup.2) of aqueous solutions of the
surfactant in the presence and in the absence of about 1% of a
specific cyclodextrin in the solutions. The aqueous solutions
contain surfactant at concentrations of approximately 0.5%, 0.1%,
0.01%, and 0.005%. The cyclodextrin can affect the surface activity
of a surfactant by elevating the surface tension of the surfactant
solution. If the surface tension at a given concentration in water
differs by more than about 10% from the surface tension of the same
surfactant in the 1% solution of the cyclodextrin, that is an
indication of a strong interaction between the surfactant and the
cyclodextrin. The preferred surfactants herein should have a
surface tension in an aqueous solution that is different (lower) by
less than about 10%, preferably less than about 5%, and more
preferably less than about 1% from that of the same concentration
solution containing 1% cyclodextrin.
[0320] Nonlimiting examples of cyclodextrin-compatible nonionic
surfactants include block copolymers of ethylene oxide and
propylene oxide. Suitable block polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene
polymeric surfactants, that are compatible with most cyclodextrins,
include those based on ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, glycerol,
trimethylolpropane and ethylenediamine as the initial reactive
hydrogen compound. Polymeric compounds made from a sequential
ethoxylation and propoxylation of initial compounds with a single
reactive hydrogen atom, such as C.sub.12-18 aliphatic alcohols, are
not generally compatible with the cyclodextrin. Certain of the
block polymer surfactant compounds designated Pluronic.RTM. and
Tetronic.RTM. by the BASF-Wyandotte Corp., Wyandotte, Mich., are
readily available.
[0321] Nonlimiting examples of cyclodextrin-compatible surfactants
of this type include:
[0322] Pluronic Surfactants with the general formula
H(EO).sub.n(PO).sub.m(EO).sub.nH,
[0323] wherein EO is an ethylene oxide group, PO is a propylene
oxide group, and n and m are numbers that indicate the average
number of the groups in the surfactants. Typical examples of
cyclodextrin-compatible Pluronic surfactants are:
7 Name Average MW Average n Average m L-101 3,800 4 59 L-81 2,750 3
42 L-44 2,200 10 23 L-43 1,850 6 22 F-38 4,700 43 16 P-84 4,200 19
43,
[0324] and mixtures thereof.
[0325] Tetronic Surfactants with the general formula:
[H(EO).sub.n(PO).sub.m].sub.2NCH.sub.2CH.sub.2N[(PO).sub.m(EO).sub.nH].sub-
.2
[0326] wherein EO, PO, n, and m have the same meanings as above.
Typical examples of cyclodextrin-compatible Tetronic surfactants
are:
8 Name Average MW Average n Average m 901 4,700 3 18 908 25,000 114
22,
[0327] and mixtures thereof.
[0328] "Reverse" Pluronic and Tetronic surfactants have the
following general formulas:
[0329] Reverse Pluronic Surfactants
H(PO).sub.m(EO).sub.n(PO).sub.mH
[0330] Reverse Tetronic Surfactants
[H(PO).sub.n(EO).sub.m].sub.2NCH.sub.2CH.sub.2N[(EO).sub.m(PO).sub.nH].sub-
.2
[0331] wherein EO, PO, n, and m have the same meanings as above.
Typical examples of cyclodextrin-compatible Reverse Pluronic and
Reverse Tetronic surfactants are:
9 Name Average MW Average n Average m Reverse Pluronic surfactants:
10 R5 1,950 8 22 25 R1 2,700 21 6 Reverse Tetronic surfactants 130
R2 7,740 9 26 70 R2 3,870 4 13
[0332] and mixtures thereof.
[0333] Silicone Polyethers
[0334] Silicone polyethers can also act as a preferred class of
cyclodextrin surfactants when these have a dimethyl polysiloxane
hydrophobic moiety and one or more hydrophilic polyalkylene side
chains, and having. The general formula of this class of
surfactants is disclosed above under the section on optional
silicones.
[0335] Cyclodextrin Compatible Anionic Surfactants
[0336] Nonlimiting examples of cyclodextrin-compatible anionic
surfactants are the alkyldiphenyl oxide disulfonate, having the
general formula: 4
[0337] wherein R is an alkyl group. Examples of this type of
surfactants are available from the Dow Chemical Company under the
trade name Dowfax.RTM. wherein R is a linear or branched
C.sub.6-C.sub.16 alkyl group. An example of these
cyclodextrin-compatible anionic surfactant is Dowfax 3B2 with R
being approximately a linear C.sub.10 group. These anionic
surfactants are preferably not used when the antimicrobial active
or preservative, etc., is cationic to minimize the interaction with
the cationic actives, since the effect of both surfactant and
active are diminished.
[0338] The surfactants above are either weakly interactive with
cyclodextrin (less than 5% elevation in surface tension, or
non-interactive (less than 1% elevation in surface tension). Normal
surfactants like sodium dodecyl sulfate and
dodecanolpoly(6)ethoxylate are strongly interactive, with more than
a 10% elevation in surface tension in the presence of a typical
cyclodextrin like hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin and methylated
beta-cyclodextrin.
[0339] Typical levels of cyclodextrin-compatible surfactants in
usage compositions are from about 0.01% to about 2%, preferably
from about 0.03% to about 0.6%, more preferably from about 0.05% to
about 0.3%, by weight of the composition. Typical levels of
cyclodextrin-compatible surfactants in concentrated compositions
are from about 0.1% to about 8%, preferably from about 0.2% to
about 4%, more preferably from about 0.3% to about 3%, by weight of
the concentrated composition.
[0340] 2. Low Molecular Weight Polyols
[0341] Low molecular weight polyols with relatively high boiling
points, as compared to water, such as ethylene glycol, propylene
glycol and/or glycerol are preferred optional ingredients for
improving odor control performance of the composition of the
present invention, especially when cyclodextrin is present. The
incorporation of a small amount of low molecular weight glycols
into the composition of the present invention typically enhances
the formation of the cyclodextrin inclusion complexes as the fabric
dries.
[0342] The polyols' ability to remain on the fabric for a longer
period of time than water, as the fabric dries, typically allows it
to form ternary complexes with the cyclodextrin and some malodorous
molecules. The addition of the glycols tends to fill up void space
in the cyclodextrin cavity that is unable to be filled by some
malodor molecules of relatively smaller sizes. Preferably the
glycol used is glycerin, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol,
diethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol or mixtures thereof, and more
preferably ethylene glycol and/or propylene glycol. Cyclodextrins
prepared by processes that result in a level of such polyols are
highly desirable, since they can be used without removal of the
polyols.
[0343] Some polyols, e.g., dipropylene glycol, are also useful to
facilitate the solubilization of some perfume ingredients in the
composition of the present invention.
[0344] Typically, glycol is added to the composition of the present
invention at a level of from about 0.01% to about 3%, by weight of
the composition, preferably from about 0.05% to about 1%, more
preferably from about 0.1% to about 0.5%, by weight of the
composition. The preferred weight ratio of low molecular weight
polyol to cyclodextrin is from about 2:1,000 to about 20:100, more
preferably from about 3:1,000 to about 15:100, even more preferably
from about 5:1,000 to about 10:100, and most preferably from about
1:100 to about 7:100.
[0345] 3. Metal Salts
[0346] Optionally, but highly preferred, the present invention can
include metallic salts for added odor absorption and/or
antimicrobial benefit for the cyclodextrin solution when
cyclodextrin is present. The metallic salts are selected from the
group consisting of copper salts, zinc salts, and mixtures
thereof.
[0347] Copper salts have some antimicrobial benefits. Specifically,
cupric abietate acts as a fungicide, copper acetate acts as a
mildew inhibitor, cupric chloride acts as a fungicide, copper
lactate acts as a fungicide, and copper sulfate acts as a
germicide. Copper salts also possess some malodor control
abilities. See U.S. Pat. No. 3,172,817, Leupold, et al., which
discloses deodorizing compositions for treating disposable
articles, comprising at least slightly water-soluble salts of
acylacetone, including copper salts and zinc salts, all of said
patents are incorporated herein by reference.
[0348] The preferred zinc salts possess malodor control abilities.
Zinc has been used most often for its ability to ameliorate
malodor, e.g., in mouth wash products, as disclosed in U.S. Pat.
No. 4,325,939, issued Apr. 20, 1982 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,469,674,
issued Sept. 4, 1983, to N. B. Shah, et al., all of which are
incorporated herein by reference. Highly-ionized and soluble zinc
salts such as zinc chloride, provide the best source of zinc ions.
Zinc borate functions as a fungistat and a mildew inhibitor, zinc
caprylate functions as a fungicide, zinc chloride provides
antiseptic and deodorant benefits, zinc ricinoleate functions as a
fungicide, zinc sulfate heptahydrate functions as a fungicide and
zinc undecylenate functions as a fungistat.
[0349] Preferably the metallic salts are water-soluble zinc salts,
copper salts or mixtures thereof, and more preferably zinc salts,
especially ZnCl.sub.2. These salts are preferably present in the
present invention primarily to absorb amine and sulfur-containing
compounds that have molecular sizes too small to be effectively
complexed with the cyclodextrin molecules. Low molecular weight
sulfur-containing materials, e.g., sulfide and mercaptans, are
components of many types of malodors, e.g., food odors (garlic,
onion), body/perspiration odor, breath odor, etc. Low molecular
weight amines are also components of many malodors, e.g., food
odors, body odors, urine, etc.
[0350] When metallic salts are added to the composition of the
present invention they are typically present at a level of from
about 0.1% to about 10%, preferably from about 0.2% to about 8%,
more preferably from about 0.3% to about 5% by weight of the usage
composition.
[0351] 4. Soluble Carbonate and/or Bicarbonate Salts
[0352] Water-soluble alkali metal carbonate and/or bicarbonate
salts, such as sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, potassium
carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium carbonate, and mixtures thereof
can be added to the composition of the present invention in order
to help to control certain acid-type odors. Preferred salts are
sodium carbonate monohydrate, potassium carbonate, sodium
bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, and mixtures thereof. When
these salts are added to the composition of the present invention,
they are typically present at a level of from about 0.1% to about
5%, preferably from about 0.2% to about 3%, more preferably from
about 0.3% to about 2%, by weight of the composition. When these
salts are added to the composition of the present invention it is
preferably that incompatible metal salts not be present in the
invention. Preferably, when these salts are used the composition
should be essentially free of zinc and other incompatible metal
ions, e.g., Ca, Fe, Ba, etc. which form water-insoluble salts
[0353] 5. Enzymes
[0354] Enzymes can be used to control certain types of malodor,
especially malodor from urine and other types of excretions,
including regurgitated materials. Proteases are especially
desirable. The activity of commercial enzymes depends very much on
the type and purity of the enzyme being considered. Enzymes that
are water soluble proteases like pepsin, tripsin, ficin, bromelin,
papain, rennin, and mixtures thereof are particularly useful.
[0355] Enzymes are normally incorporated at levels sufficient to
provide up to about 5 mg by weight, preferably from about 0.001 mg
to about 3 mg, more preferably from about 0.002 mg to about 1 mg,
of active enzyme per gram of the aqueous compositions. Stated
otherwise, the aqueous compositions herein can comprise from about
0.0001% to about 0.5%, preferably from about 0.001% to about 0.3%,
more preferably from about 0.005% to about 0.2% by weight of a
commercial enzyme preparation. Protease enzymes are usually present
in such commercial preparations at levels sufficient to provide
from 0.0005 to 0.1 Anson units (AU) of activity per gram of aqueous
composition.
[0356] Nonlimiting examples of suitable, commercially available,
water soluble proteases are pepsin, tripsin, ficin, bromelin,
papain, rennin, and mixtures thereof. Papain can be isolated, e.g.,
from papaya latex, and is available commercially in the purified
form of up to, e.g., about 80% protein, or cruder, technical grade
of much lower activity. Other suitable examples of proteases are
the subtilisins which are obtained from particular strains of B.
subtilis and B. licheniforms. Another suitable protease is obtained
from a strain of Bacillus, having maximum activity throughout the
pH range of 8-12, developed and sold by Novo Industries A/S under
the registered trade name ESPERASE.RTM.. The preparation of this
enzyme and analogous enzymes is described in British Patent
Specification No. 1,243,784 of Novo. Proteolytic enzymes suitable
for removing protein-based stains that are commercially available
include those sold under the trade names ALCALASE.RTM. and
SAVINASE.RTM. by Novo Industries A/S (Denmark) and MAXATASE.RTM. by
International Bio-Synthetics, Inc. (The Netherlands). Other
proteases include Protease A (see European Patent Application
130,756, published Jan. 9, 1985); Protease B (see European Patent
Application Serial No. 87303761.8, filed Apr. 28, 1987, and
European Patent Application 130,756, Bott et al, published Jan. 9,
1985); and proteases made by Genencor International, Inc.,
according to one or more of the following patents: Caldwell et al,
U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,185,258, 5,204,015 and 5,244,791.
[0357] A wide range of enzyme materials and means for their
incorporation into liquid compositions are also disclosed in U.S.
Pat, No. 3,553,139, issued Jan. 5, 1971 to McCarty et al. Enzymes
are further disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,101,457, Place et al,
issued Jul. 18, 1978, and in U.S. Pat. No. 4,507,219, Hughes,
issued Mar. 26, 1985. Other enzyme materials useful for liquid
formulations, and their incorporation into such formulations, are
disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,261,868, Hora et al, issued Apr. 14,
1981. Enzymes can be stabilized by various techniques, e.g., those
disclosed and exemplified in U.S. Pat. No. 3,600,319, issued Aug.
17, 1971 to Gedge, et al., European Patent Application Publication
No. 0 199 405, Application No. 86200586.5, published Oct. 29, 1986,
Venegas, and in U.S. Pat. No. 3,519,570. All of the above patents
and applications are incorporated herein, at least in pertinent
part.
[0358] Enzyme-polyethylene glycol conjugates are also preferred.
Such polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of enzymes, wherein the
PEG or alkoxy-PEG moieties are coupled to the protein molecule
through, e.g., secondary amine linkages. Suitable derivatization
decreases immunogenicity, thus minimizes allergic reactions, while
still maintaining some enzymatic activity. An example of
protease-PEG's is PEG-subtilisin Carlsberg from B. lichenniformis
coupled to methoxy-PEGs through secondary amine linkage, and is
available from Sigma-Aldrich Corp., St. Louis, Mo.
[0359] 6. Zeolites
[0360] When the clarity of the solution is not needed, and the
solution is not sprayed on fabrics, other optional odor absorbing
materials, e.g., zeolites and/or activated carbon, can also be
used. A preferred class of zeolites is characterized as
"intermediate" silicate/aluminate zeolites. The intermediate
zeolites are characterized by SiO.sub.2/AlO.sub.2 molar ratios of
less than about 10. Preferably the molar ratio of
SiO.sub.2/AlO.sub.2 ranges from about 2 to about 10. The
intermediate zeolites have an advantage over the "high" zeolites.
The intermediate zeolites have a higher affinity for amine-type
odors, they are more weight efficient for odor absorption because
they have a larger surface area, and they are more moisture
tolerant and retain more of their odor absorbing capacity in water
than the high zeolites. A wide variety of intermediate zeolites
suitable for use herein are commercially available as Valfor.RTM.
CP301-68, Valfor.RTM. 300-63, Valfor.RTM. CP300-35, and Valfor.RTM.
CP300-56, available from PQ Corporation, and the CBV100.RTM. series
of zeolites from Conteka.
[0361] Zeolite materials marketed under the trade name
Abscents.RTM. and Smellrite.RTM., available from The Union Carbide
Corporation and UOP are also preferred. These materials are
typically available as a white powder in the 3-5 micron particle
size range. Such materials are preferred over the intermediate
zeolites for control of sulfur-containing odors, e.g., thiols,
mercaptans.
[0362] 7. Activated Carbon
[0363] The carbon material suitable for use in the present
invention is the material well known in commercial practice as an
absorbent for organic molecules and/or for air purification
purposes. Often, such carbon material is referred to as "activated"
carbon or "activated" charcoal. Such carbon is available from
commercial sources under such trade names as; Calgon-Type CPG.RTM.;
Type PCB.RTM.; Type SGL.RTM.; Type CAL.RTM.; and Type OL.RTM..
Activated carbon fibers and cloth may also be used in combination
with the compositions and/or articles of manufacture disclosed
herein to provide malodor removal and/or freshness benefits. Such
activated carbon fibers and fabrics can be acquired from
Calgon.
[0364] 8. Mixtures Thereof
[0365] Mixtures of the optional odor control agents described above
are desirable, especially when the mixture provides control over a
broader range of odors.
[0366] F. Perfume
[0367] The wrinkle control composition of the present invention can
also optionally provide a "scent signal" in the form of a pleasant
odor which provides a freshness impression to the treated fabrics.
The scent signal can be designed to provide a fleeting perfume
scent. When perfume is added as a scent signal, it is added only at
very low levels, e.g., from about 0% to about 0.5%, preferably from
about 0.003% to about 0.3%, more preferably from about 0.005% to
about 0.2%, by weight of the usage composition.
[0368] Perfume can also be added as a more intense odor in product
and on fabrics. When stronger levels of perfume are preferred,
relatively higher levels of perfume can be added.
[0369] Any type of perfume can be incorporated into the composition
of the present invention. The preferred perfume ingredients are
those suitable for use to apply on fabrics and garments. Typical
examples of such preferred ingredients are given in U.S. Pat. No.
5,445,747, issued Aug. 29, 1995 to Kvietok et al., incorporated
herein by reference.
[0370] When long lasting fragrance odor on fabrics is desired, it
is preferred to use at least an effective amount of perfume
ingredients which have a boiling point of about 300.degree. C. or
higher. Nonlimiting examples of such preferred ingredients are
given in U.S. Pat. No. 5,500,138, issued Mar. 19, 1996 to Bacon et
al., incorporated herein by reference. It is also preferred to use
materials that can slowly release perfume ingredients after the
fabric is treated by the wrinkle control composition of this
invention. Examples of materials of this type are given in U.S.
Pat. No. 5,531,910, Severns et al., issued Jul. 2, 1996, said
patent being incorporated herein by reference.
[0371] When cyclodextrin is present, it is essential that the
perfume be added at a level wherein even if all of the perfume in
the composition were to complex with the cyclodextrin molecules
when cyclodextrin is present, there will still be an effective
level of uncomplexed cyclodextrin molecules present in the solution
to provide adequate odor control. In order to reserve an effective
amount of cyclodextrin molecules for odor control when cyclodextrin
is present, perfume is typically present at a level wherein less
than about 90% of the cyclodextrin complexes with the perfume,
preferably less than about 50% of the cyclodextrin complexes with
the perfume, more preferably, less than about 30% of the
cyclodextrin complexes with the perfume, and most preferably, less
than about 10% of the cyclodextrin complexes with the perfume. The
cyclodextrin to perfume weight ratio should be greater than about
5:1 preferably greater than about 8:1, more preferably greater than
about 10:1, even more preferably greater than about 20:1, still
more preferably greater than 40:1 and most preferably greater than
about 70:1.
[0372] Preferably the perfume is hydrophilic and is composed
predominantly of ingredients selected from two groups of
ingredients, namely, (a) hydrophilic ingredients having a ClogP of
less than about 3.5, more preferably less than about 3.0, and (b)
ingredients having significant low detection threshold, and
mixtures thereof. Typically, at least about 50%, preferably at
least about 60%, more preferably at least about 70%, and most
preferably at least about 80% by weight of the perfume is composed
of perfume ingredients of the above groups (a) and (b). For these
preferred perfumes, the cyclodextrin to perfume weight ratio is
typically of from about 2:1 to about 200:1; preferably from about
4:1 to about 100:1, more preferably from about 6:1 to about 50:1,
and even more preferably from about 8:1 to about 30:1.
[0373] 1. Hydrophilic Perfume Ingredients
[0374] The hydrophilic perfume ingredients are more soluble in
water, have less of a tendency to complex with the cyclodextrins,
and are more available in the odor absorbing composition than the
ingredients of conventional perfumes. The degree of hydrophobicity
of a perfume ingredient can be correlated with its octanol/water
partition coefficient P. The octanol/water partition coefficient of
a perfume ingredient is the ratio between its equilibrium
concentration in octanol and in water. A perfume ingredient with a
greater partition coefficient P is considered to be more
hydrophobic. Conversely, a perfume ingredient with a smaller
partition coefficient P is considered to be more hydrophilic. Since
the partition coefficients of the perfume ingredients normally have
high values, they are more conveniently given in the form of their
logarithm to the base 10, logP. Thus the preferred perfume
hydrophilic perfume ingredients of this invention have logP of
about 3.5 or smaller, preferably of about 3.0 or smaller.
[0375] The logP of many perfume ingredients have been reported; for
example, the Pomona92 database, available from Daylight Chemical
Information Systems, Inc. (Daylight CIS), Irvine, Calif., contains
many, along with citations to the original literature. However, the
logP values are most conveniently calculated by the "CLOGP"
program, also available from Daylight CIS. This program also lists
experimental logP values when they are available in the Pomona92
database. The "calculated logP" (ClogP) is determined by the
fragment approach of Hansch and Leo (cf., A. Leo, in Comprehensive
Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 4, C. Hansch, P. G. Sammens, J. B. Taylor
and C. A. Ramsden, Eds., p. 295, Pergamon Press, 1990, incorporated
herein by reference). The fragment approach is based on the
chemical structure of each perfume ingredient, and takes into
account the numbers and types of atoms, the atom connectivity, and
chemical bonding. The ClogP values, which are the most reliable and
widely used estimates for this physicochemical property, are used
instead of the experimental logP values in the selection of perfume
ingredients which are useful in the present invention.
[0376] Non-limiting examples of the more preferred hydrophilic
perfume ingredients are allyl amyl glycolate, allyl caproate, amyl
acetate, amyl propionate, anisic aldehyde, anisyl acetate, anisole,
benzaldehyde, benzyl acetate, benzyl acetone, benzyl alcohol,
benzyl formate, benzyl iso valerate, benzyl propionate, beta gamma
hexenol, calone, camphor gum, laevo-carveol, d-carvone,
laevo-carvone, cinnamic alcohol, cinnamyl acetate, cinnamic
alcohol, cinnamyl formate, cinnamyl propionate, cis-jasmone,
cis-3-hexenyl acetate, coumarin, cuminic alcohol, cuminic aldehyde,
Cyclal C, cyclogalbanate, dihydroeuginol, dihydro isojasmonate,
dimethyl benzyl carbinol, dimethyl benzyl carbinyl acetate, ethyl
acetate, ethyl aceto acetate, ethyl amyl ketone, ethyl
anthranilate, ethyl benzoate, ethyl butyrate, ethyl cinnamate,
ethyl hexyl ketone, ethyl maltol, ethyl-2-methyl butyrate, ethyl
methylphenyl glycidate, ethyl phenyl acetate, ethyl salicylate,
ethyl vanillin, eucalyptol, eugenol, eugenyl acetate, eugenyl
formate, eugenyl methyl ether, fenchyl alcohol, flor acetate
(tricyclo decenyl acetate), fructone, frutene (tricyclo decenyl
propionate), geraniol, geranyl oxyacetaldehyde, heliotropin,
hexenol, hexenyl acetate, hexyl acetate, hexyl formate, hinokitiol,
hydrotropic alcohol, hydroxycitronellal, hydroxycitronellal diethyl
acetal, hydroxycitronellol, indole, isoamyl alcohol, iso cyclo
citral, isoeugenol, isoeugenyl acetate, isomenthone, isopulegyl
acetate, isoquinoline, keone, ligustral, linalool, linalool oxide,
linalyl formate, lyral, menthone, methyl acetophenone, methyl amyl
ketone, methyl anthranilate, methyl benzoate, methyl benzyl
acetate, methyl cinnamate, methyl dihydrojasmonate, methyl eugenol,
methyl heptenone, methyl heptine carbonate, methyl heptyl ketone,
methyl hexyl ketone, methyl isobutenyl tetrahydropyran,
methyl-N-methyl anthranilate, methyl beta naphthyl ketone, methyl
phenyl carbinyl acetate, methyl salicylate, nerol, nonalactone,
octalactone, octyl alcohol (octanol-2), para-anisic aldehyde,
para-cresol, para-cresyl methyl ether, para hydroxy phenyl
butanone, para-methoxy acetophenone, para-methyl acetophenone,
phenoxy ethanol, phenoxyethyl propionate, phenyl acetaldehyde,
phenylacetaldehyde diethyl ether, phenylethyl oxyacetaldehyde,
phenyl ethyl acetate, phenyl ethyl alcohol, phenyl ethyl dimethyl
carbinol, prenyl acetate, propyl butyrate, pulegone, rose oxide,
safrole, terpineol, vanillin, viridine, and mixtures thereof.
[0377] Nonlimiting examples of other preferred hydrophilic perfume
ingredients which can be used in perfume compositions of this
invention are allyl heptoate, amyl benzoate, anethole,
benzophenone, carvacrol, citral, citronellol, citronellyl nitrile,
cyclohexyl ethyl acetate, cymal, 4-decenal, dihydro isojasmonate,
dihydro myrcenol, ethyl methyl phenyl glycidate, fenchyl acetate,
florhydral, gamma-nonalactone, geranyl formate, geranyl nitrile,
hexenyl isobutyrate, alpha-ionone, isobornyl acetate, isobutyl
benzoate, isononyl alcohol, isomenthol, para-isopropyl
phenylacetaldehyde, isopulegol, linalyl acetate, 2-methoxy
naphthalene, menthyl acetate, methyl chavicol, musk ketone, beta
naphthol methyl ether, neral, nonyl aldehyde, phenyl heptanol,
phenyl hexanol, terpinyl acetate, Veratrol, yara-yara, and mixtures
thereof.
[0378] The preferred perfume compositions used in the present
invention contain at least 4 different hydrophilic perfume
ingredients, preferably at least 5 different hydrophilic perfume
ingredients, more preferably at least 6 different hydrophilic
perfume ingredients, and even more preferably at least 7 different
hydrophilic perfume ingredients. Most common perfume ingredients
which are derived from natural sources are composed of a multitude
of components. When each such material is used in the formulation
of the preferred perfume compositions of the present invention, it
is counted as one single ingredient, for the purpose of defining
the invention.
[0379] 2. Low Odor Detection Threshold Perfume
[0380] The odor detection threshold of an odorous material is the
lowest vapor concentration of that material which can be
olfactorily detected. The odor detection threshold and some odor
detection threshold values are discussed in, e.g., "Standardized
Human Olfactory Thresholds", M. Devos et al, IRL Press at Oxford
University Press, 1990, and "Compilation of Odor and Taste
Threshold Values Data", F. A. Fazzalari, editor, ASTM Data Series
DS 48A, American Society for Testing and Materials, 1978, both of
said publications being incorporated by reference. The use of small
amounts of perfume ingredients that have low odor detection
threshold values can improve perfume odor character, even though
they are not as hydrophilic as perfume ingredients of group (a)
which are given hereinabove. Perfume ingredients that do not belong
to group (a) above, but have a significantly low detection
threshold, useful in the composition of the present invention, are
selected from the group consisting of ambrox, bacdanol, benzyl
salicylate, butyl anthranilate, cetalox, damascenone,
alpha-damascone, gamma-dodecalactone, ebanol, herbavert,
cis-3-hexenyl salicylate, alpha-ionone, beta-ionone,
alpha-isomethylionone, lilial, methyl nonyl ketone,
gamma-undecalactone, undecylenic aldehyde, and mixtures thereof.
These materials are preferably present at low levels in addition to
the hydrophilic ingredients of group (a), typically less than about
20%, preferably less than about 15%, more preferably less than
about 10%, by weight of the total perfume compositions of the
present invention. However, only low levels are required to provide
an effect.
[0381] There are also hydrophilic ingredients of group (a) that
have a significantly low detection threshold, and are especially
useful in the composition of the present invention. Examples of
these ingredients are allyl amyl glycolate, anethole, benzyl
acetone, calone, cinnamic alcohol, coumarin, cyclogalbanate, Cyclal
C, cymal, 4-decenal, dihydro isojasmonate, ethyl anthranilate,
ethyl-2-methyl butyrate, ethyl methylphenyl glycidate, ethyl
vanillin, eugenol, flor acetate, florhydral, fructone, frutene,
heliotropin, keone, indole, iso cyclo citral, isoeugenol, lyral,
methyl heptine carbonate, linalool, methyl anthranilate, methyl
dihydrojasmonate, methyl isobutenyl tetrahydropyran, methyl beta
naphthyl ketone, beta naphthol methyl ether, nerol, para-anisic
aldehyde, para hydroxy phenyl butanone, phenyl acetaldehyde,
vanillin, and mixtures thereof. Use of low odor detection threshold
perfume ingredients minimizes the level of organic material that is
released into the atmosphere.
[0382] G. Antimicrobial Active
[0383] Optionally, but preferably, solubilized, water-soluble,
antimicrobial preservative can be added to the composition of the
present invention because these aqueous products may be prime
breeding grounds for certain microorganisms, especially when in
aqueous compositions. This drawback can lead to the problem of
storage stability of these solutions for any significant length of
time. Contamination by certain microorganisms with subsequent
microbial growth can result in an unsightly and/or malodorous
solution. Because microbial growth in aqueous solutions is highly
objectionable when it occurs, it is highly preferable to include a
solubilized, water-soluble, antimicrobial preservative, which is
effective for inhibiting and/or regulating microbial growth in
order to increase storage stability of the preferably clear,
aqueous consumer products such as the subject product of this
patent.
[0384] Typical microorganisms that can be found in raw materials
for these products and whose growth can be found in the resulting
aqueous solutions include bacteria, both Gram (-) and (+). Gram (-)
contaminants may include species such as Escherichia coli and
Pseudomonas aeruginosa which may be found in some water sources,
and can be introduced during the preparation of these solutions.
Other Pseudomonas species, such as P. cepacia, are typical
microbial contaminants in surfactant manufacturing facilities and
may readily contaminate packed finished products. Typical other
Gram (-) bacterial contaminants may include Burkholderia,
Enterobacter and Gluconobacter species,. Gram (+) species may
include Bacillus species e.g. B. cereus and B. sphaericus; and may
also include other Gram (+) such as Staphylococcus species, e.g. S.
aureus.
[0385] Fungal contaminants may include Aspergillus species.
[0386] Therefore, it is preferable to use a broad spectrum
preservative, e.g., one that is effective on both bacteria (both
gram positive and gram negative) and fungi. A limited spectrum
preservative, e.g., one that is only effective on a single group of
microorganisms, e.g., fungi, can be used in combination with a
broad spectrum preservative or other limited spectrum preservatives
with complimentary and/or supplementary activity. A mixture of
broad spectrum preservatives can also be used. In some cases where
a specific group of microbial contaminants is problematic (such as
Gram negatives), aminocarboxylate chelators, such as those
described hereinbefore, can be used alone or as potentiators in
conjunction with other preservatives. These chelators which
include, e.g., ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA),
hydroxyethylenediaminetriacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic
acid (DTPA), and other aminocarboxylate chelators, and mixtures
thereof, and their salts including phosphonates, and mixtures
thereof, can increase preservative effectiveness against
Gram-negative bacteria, especially Pseudomonas species.
[0387] Antimicrobial preservatives useful in the present invention
include biocidal compounds, i.e., substances that kill
microorganisms, or biostatic compounds, i.e., substances that
inhibit and/or regulate the growth of microorganisms. Preferred
antimicrobial preservatives are those that are water-soluble and
are effective at low levels. Water-soluble preservatives useful in
the present invention are those that have a solubility in water of
at least about 0.3 g per 100 ml of water, i.e., greater than about
0.3% at room temperature, preferably greater than about 0.5% at
room temperature.
[0388] The water-soluble antimicrobial preservative in the present
invention is included at an effective amount. The term "effective
amount" as herein defined means a level sufficient to prevent
spoilage, or prevent growth of inadvertently added microorganisms
in the packaged product, for a specific period of time. In other
words, the preservative is not being used to kill microorganisms on
the surface onto which the composition is deposited. Instead, it is
preferably being used to prevent spoilage of the product solution
in order to increase the shelf-life of the composition. Preferred
levels of preservative are from about 0.0001% to about 0.5%, more
preferably from about 0.0002% to about 0.2%, most preferably from
about 0.0003% to about 0.1%, by weight of the usage
composition.
[0389] The preservative can be any organic preservative material
which will not cause damage to fabric appearance, e.g.,
discoloration, coloration, bleaching. Preferred water-soluble
preservatives include organic sulfur compounds, halogenated
compounds, cyclic organic nitrogen compounds, low molecular weight
aldehydes, quaternary ammonium compounds, dehydroacetic acid,
phenyl and phenolic compounds, alcoholic solvents and mixtures
thereof.
[0390] The following are non-limiting examples of preferred
water-soluble preservatives for use in the present invention. A
more complete list is found in U.S. Pat. No. 5,714,137,
incorporated hereinbefore by reference.
[0391] 1. Organic Sulfur Compounds
[0392] Preferred water-soluble preservatives for use in the present
invention are organic sulfur compounds. Some non-limiting examples
of organic sulfur compounds suitable for use in the present
invention are:
[0393] a) 3-Isothiazolone Compounds
[0394] A preferred preservative is an antimicrobial, organic
preservative containing 3-isothiazolone groups.
[0395] This class of compounds is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
4,265,899, Lewis et al., issued May 5, 1981, and incorporated
herein by reference. A preferred preservative is a water-soluble
mixture of 5-chloro-2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one and
2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one, more preferably a mixture of about
77% 5-chloro-2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3- -one and about 23%
2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one, a broad spectrum preservative
available as a 1.5% aqueous solution under the trade name
Kathon.RTM. CG by Rohm and Haas Company.
[0396] When Kathon.RTM. is used as the preservative in the present
invention it is present at a level of from about 0.0001% to about
0.01%, preferably from about 0.0002% to about 0.005%, more
preferably from about 0.0003% to about 0.003%, most preferably from
about 0.0004% to about 0.002%, by weight of the composition.
[0397] Other isothiazolins include 1,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one,
available under the trade name Proxel.RTM. products; and
2-methyl-4,5-trimethylene-- 4-isothiazolin-3-one, available under
the trade name Promexal.RTM.. Both Proxel and Promexal are
available from Zeneca. They have stability over a wide pH range
(i.e., 4-12). Neither contain active halogen and are not
formaldehyde releasing preservatives. Both Proxel and Promexal are
effective against typical Gram negative and positive bacteria,
fungi and yeasts when used at a level from about 0.001% to about
0.5%, preferably from about 0.005% to about 0.05%, and most
preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.02% by weight of the usage
composition.
[0398] b) Sodium Pyrithione
[0399] Another preferred organic sulfur preservative is sodium
pyrithione, with water solubility of about 50%. When sodium
pyrithione is used as the preservative in the present invention it
is typically present at a level of from about 0.0001% to about
0.01%, preferably from about 0.0002% to about 0.005%, more
preferably from about 0.0003% to about 0.003%, by weight of the
usage composition.
[0400] Mixtures of the preferred organic sulfur compounds can also
be used as the preservative in the present invention.
[0401] 2. Halogenated Compounds
[0402] Preferred preservatives for use in the present invention are
halogenated compounds. Some non-limiting examples of halogenated
compounds suitable for use in the present invention are:
[0403] 5-bromo-5-nitro-1,3-dioxane, available under the trade name
Bronidox L.RTM. from Henkel. Bronidox L.RTM. has a solubility of
about 0.46% in water. When Bronidox is used as the preservative in
the present invention it is typically present at a level of from
about 0.0005% to about 0.02%, preferably from about 0.001% to about
0.01%, by weight of the usage composition;
[0404] 2-bromo-2-nitropropane-1,3-diol, available under the trade
name Bronopol.RTM. from Inolex can be used as the preservative in
the present invention. Bronopol has a solubility of about 25% in
water. When Bronopol is used as the preservative in the present
invention it is typically present at a level of from about 0.002%
to about 0.1%, preferably from about 0.005% to about 0.05%, by
weight of the usage composition;
[0405] 1,1'-hexamethylene bis(5-(p-chlorophenyl)biguanide),
commonly known as chlorhexidine, and its salts, e.g., with acetic
and gluconic acids can be used as a preservative in the present
invention. The digluconate salt is highly water-soluble, about 70%
in water, and the diacetate salt has a solubility of about 1.8% in
water. When chlorhexidine is used as the preservative in the
present invention it is typically present at a level of from about
0.0001% to about 0.04%, preferably from about 0.0005% to about
0.01%, by weight of the usage composition.
[0406] 1,1,1-Trichloro-2-methylpropan-2-ol, commonly known as
chlorobutanol, with water solubility of about 0.8%; a typical
effective level of chlorobutanol is from about 0.1% to about 0.5%,
by weight of the usage composition.
[0407] 4,4'-(Trimethylenedioxy)bis-(3-bromobenzamidine)
diisethionate, or dibromopropamidine, with water solubility of
about 50%; when dibromopropamidine is used as the preservative in
the present invention it is typically present at a level of from
about 0.0001% to about 0.05%, preferably from about 0.0005% to
about 0.01% by weight of the usage composition.
[0408] Mixtures of the preferred halogenated compounds can also be
used as the preservative in the present invention.
[0409] 3. Cyclic Organic Nitrogen Compounds
[0410] Preferred water-soluble preservatives for use in the present
invention are cyclic organic nitrogen compounds. Some non-limiting
examples of cyclic organic nitrogen compounds suitable for use in
the present invention are:
[0411] a) Imidazolidinedione Compounds
[0412] Preferred preservatives for use in the present invention are
imidazolidione compounds. Some non-limiting examples of
imidazolidinedione compounds suitable for use in the present
invention are:
[0413] 1,3-bis(hydroxymethyl)-5,5-dimethyl-2,4-imidazolidinedione,
commonly known as dimethyloldimethylhydantoin, or DMDM hydantoin,
available as, e.g., Glydant.RTM. from Lonza. DMDM hydantoin has a
water solubility of more than 50% in water, and is mainly effective
on bacteria. When DMDM hydantoin is used, it is preferable that it
be used in combination with a broad spectrum preservative such as
Kathon CG.RTM., or formaldehyde. A preferred mixture is about a
95:5 DMDM hydantoin to 3-butyl-2-iodopropynylcarbamate mixture,
available under the trade name Glydant Plus.RTM. from Lonza. When
Glydant Plus.RTM. is used as the preservative in the present
invention, it is typically present at a level of from about 0.005%
to about 0.2% by weight of the usage composition;
[0414]
N-[1,3-bis(hydroxymethyl)2,5-dioxo-4-imidazolidinyl]-N,N'-bis(hydro-
xymethyl) urea, commonly known as diazolidinyl urea, available
under the trade name Germall II.RTM. from Sutton Laboratories, Inc.
(Sutton) can be used as the preservative in the present invention.
When Germall II.RTM. is used as the preservative in the present
invention, it is typically present at a level of from about 0.01%
to about 0.1% by weight of the usage composition;
[0415]
N,N"-methylenebis{N'-[1-(hydroxymethyl)-2,5-dioxo-4-imidazolidinyl]-
urea}, commonly known as imidazolidinyl urea, available, e.g.,
under the trade name Abiol.RTM. from 3V-Sigma, Unicide U-13.RTM.
from Induchem, Germall 115.RTM.-0 from (Sutton) can be used as the
preservative in the present invention. When imidazolidinyl urea is
used as the preservative, it is typically present at a level of
from about 0.05% to about 0.2%, by weight of the usage
composition.
[0416] Mixtures of the preferred imidazolidinedione compounds can
also be used as the preservative in the present invention.
[0417] b) Polymethoxy Bicyclic Oxazolidine
[0418] Another preferred water-soluble cyclic organic nitrogen
preservative is polymethoxy bicyclic oxazolidine, available under
the trade name Nuosept.RTM. C from Huls America. When Nuosept.RTM.
C is used as the preservative, it is typically present at a level
of from about 0.005% to about 0.1%, by weight of the usage
composition.
[0419] Mixtures of the preferred cyclic organic nitrogen compounds
can also be used as the preservative in the present invention.
[0420] 4. Low Molecular Weight Aldehydes and Alcohols
[0421] a) Formaldehyde
[0422] A preferred preservative for use in the present invention is
formaldehyde. Formaldehyde is a broad spectrum preservative which
is normally available as formalin which is a 37% aqueous solution
of formaldehyde. When formaldehyde is used as the preservative in
the present invention, typical levels are from about 0.003% to
about 0.2%, preferably from about 0.008% to about 0.1%, more
preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.05%, by weight of the usage
composition.
[0423] b) Glutaraldehyde
[0424] A preferred preservative for use in the present invention is
glutaraldehyde. Glutaraldehyde is a water-soluble, broad spectrum
preservative commonly available as a 25% or a 50% solution in
water. When glutaraldehyde is used as the preservative in the
present invention it is typically present at a level of from about
0.005% to about 0.1%, preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.05%,
by weight of the usage composition.
[0425] c) Ethanol
[0426] A preferred potentiator or preservative enhancer in this
invention may be an alcohol, such as ethanol, an effective amount
of solvent, preferably from about 1% to about 15%, more preferably
from about 1% to about 10%, most preferably from about 1% to about
5%, by weight of the composition to assist in the drying of the
spray product during use and for increased efficacy of the
preservative system in the bottled product.
[0427] 5. Quaternary Compounds
[0428] Preferred preservatives for use in the present invention are
cationic and/or quaternary compounds. Such compounds include
polyaminopropyl biguanide, also known as polyhexamethylene
biguanide having the general formula:
HCl.NH.sub.2--(CH.sub.2).sub.3--[--(CH.sub.2).sub.3--NH--C(.dbd.NH)--NH--C-
(.dbd.NH.HCl)--NH--(CH.sub.2).sub.3--].sub.x--(CH.sub.2).sub.3--NH--C(.dbd-
.NH)--NH.CN
[0429] Polyaminopropyl biguanide is a water-soluble, broad spectrum
preservative which is available as a 20% aqueous solution available
under the trade name Cosmocil CQ.RTM. from ICI Americas, Inc., or
under the trade name Mikrokill.RTM. a from Brooks, Inc.
[0430] 1-(3-Chlorallyl)-3,5,7-triaza-1-azoniaadamantane chloride,
available, e.g., under the trade name Dowicil 200 from Dow
Chemical, is an effective quaternary ammonium preservative; it is
freely soluble in water; however, it has the tendency to discolor
(yellow), therefore it is not highly preferred.
[0431] Mixtures of the preferred quaternary ammonium compounds can
also be used as the preservative in the present invention.
[0432] When quaternary ammonium compounds are used as the
preservative in the present invention, they are typically present
at a level of from about 0.005% to about 0.2%, preferably from
about 0.01% to about 0.1%, by weight of the usage composition.
[0433] 6. Dehydroacetic Acid
[0434] A preferred preservative for use in the present invention is
dehydroacetic acid. Dehydroacetic acid is a broad spectrum
preservative preferably in the form of a sodium or a potassium salt
so that it is water-soluble. This preservative acts more as a
biostatic preservative than a biocidal preservative. When
dehydroacetic acid is used as the preservative it is typically used
at a level of from about 0.005% to about 0.2%, preferably from
about 0.008% to about 0.1%, more preferably from about 0.01% to
about 0.05%, by weight of the usage composition.
[0435] 7. Phenyl and Phenolic Compounds
[0436] Some non-limiting examples of phenyl and phenolic compounds
suitable for use in the present invention are:
[0437] 4,4'-diamidino-.alpha.107 -diphenoxypropane diisethionate,
commonly known as propamidine isethionate, with water solubility of
about 16%; and 4,4'-diamidino-.alpha.,.omega.-diphenoxyhexane
diisethionate, commonly known as hexamidine isethionate. Typical
effective level of these salts is about 0.0002% to about 0.05% by
weight of the usage composition.
[0438] Other examples are benzyl alcohol, with a water solubility
of about 4%; 2-phenylethanol, with a water solubility of about 2%;
and 2-phenoxyethanol, with a water solubility of about 2.67%;
typical effective level of these phenyl and phenoxy alcohol is from
about 0.1% to about 0.5%, by weight of the usage composition.
[0439] 8. Aminocarboxylate Chelators
[0440] Chelators, e.g., ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA),
hydroxyethylene-diaminetriacetic acid,
diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid (DTPA also known commercially as
Dequest 2060), aminotri(methylenphosphon- ic aicd) penta sodium
salt (known commerically as Dequest 2006), and other
aminocarboxylate chelators, and mixtures thereof, and their salts
and phosphonates, and mixtures thereof, can optionally be used to
increase antimicrobial and preservative effectiveness against
Gram-negative bacteria, especially Pseudomonas species. Although
sensitivity to EDTA/DTPA and other aminocarboxylate chelators is
mainly a characteristic of Pseudomonas species, other bacterial
species highly susceptible to chelators include Achromobacter,
Alcaligenes, Azotobacter, Escherichia, Salmonella, Spirillum, and
Vibrio. Other groups of organisms also show increased sensitivities
to these chelators, including fungi and yeasts. Furthermore,
aminocarboxylate chelators can help, e.g., maintaining product
clarity, protecting fragrance and perfume components, and
preventing rancidity and off odors.
[0441] Although these aminocarboxylate chelators may not be potent
biocides in their own right, they function as potentiators for
improving the performance of other antimicrobials/preservatives in
the compositions of the present invention. Aminocarboxylate
chelators can potentiate the performance of many of the cationic,
anionic, and nonionic antimicrobials/preservatives, phenolic
compounds, and isothiazolinones, that are used as
antimicrobials/preservatives in the composition of the present
invention. Nonlimiting examples of cationic
antimicrobials/preservatives potentiated by aminocarboxylate
chelators in solutions are chlorhexidine salts (including
digluconate, diacetate, and dihydrochloride salts), and
Quaternium-15, also known as Dowicil 200, Dowicide Q, Preventol D1,
benzalkonium chloride, cetrimonium, myristalkonium chloride,
cetylpyridinium chloride, lauryl pyridinium chloride, and the like.
Nonlimiting examples of useful anionic antimicrobials/preservatives
which are enhanced by aminocarboxylate chelators are sorbic acid
and potassium sorbate.
[0442] Nonlimiting examples of useful nonionic
antimicrobials/preservative- s which are potentiated by
aminocarboxylate chelators are DMDM hydantoin, phenethyl alcohol,
monolaurin, imidazolidinyl urea, and Bronopol
(2-bromo-2-nitropropane-1,3-diol).
[0443] Examples of useful phenolic antimicrobials/preservatives
potentiated by these chelators are chloroxylenol, phenol,
tert-butyl hydroxyanisole, salicylic acid, resorcinol, and sodium
o-phenyl phenate. Nonlimiting examples of isothiazolinone
antimicrobials/preservatives which are enhanced by aminocarboxylate
chelators are Kathon, Proxel and Promexal.
[0444] The optional chelators are present in the compositions of
this invention at levels of, typically, from about 0.01% to about
0.3%, more preferably from about 0.02% to about 0.1%, most
preferably from about 0.02% to about 0.05% by weight of the usage
compositions to provide antimicrobial efficacy in this
invention.
[0445] Free, uncomplexed aminocarboxylate chelators are required to
potentiate the efficacy of the antimicrobials. Thus, when excess
alkaline earth (especially calcium and magnesium) and transitional
metals (iron, manganese, copper, and others) are present, free
chelators are not available and antimicrobial potentiation is not
observed. In the case where significant water hardness or
transitional metals are available or where product esthetics
require a specified chelator level, higher levels may be required
to allow for the availability of free, uncomplexed aminocarboxylate
chelators to function as antimicrobial/preservative
potentiators.
[0446] Bacteriostatic Effects of pH
[0447] Bacteriostatic effects can sometimes be obtained for aqueous
compositions by adjusting the composition pH to an acid pH, e.g.,
less than about pH 4, preferably less than about pH 3, or a basic
pH, e.g., greater than about 10, preferably greater than about 11.
Low pH is a suitable approach for some aspects of the the present
invention because the low pH may minimize the potential of
bacterial contamination. High pH 10, preferably greater than about
11, also may minimize bacterial and antimicrobial contamination,
but is not preferred when optional cyclodextrin is present since
the cyclodextrin will be ionized and this will render it less
effective to complexing some odor molecules. High pH's can also
lead to skin irritaiton. Therefore, aqueous compositions of the
present invention should have a pH of from about 3 to about 10,
preferably from about 4 to about 8. The pH chosen is consistent
with maintaining stability and performance of ingredients in the
composition. The pH is typically adjusted with inorganic molecules
such as (HCl) or NaOH.
[0448] When optional cyclodextrin is present it is preferred to use
an antimicrobial that does not significantly complex with
cyclodextrin. When optional cyclodextrin is present sufficient
anti-microbial should be included to ensure effectiveness.
[0449] 9. Mixtures Thereof
[0450] The preservatives of the present invention can be used in
mixtures in order to control a broad range of microorganisms.
[0451] H. Propellant
[0452] The composition of the present invention can optionally
contain propellant. Propellants aid in dispensing product
particularly when the composition is used in association with an
aerosol containers. Propellants are typically small molecule
hydrocarbons which can comprise electronegative moieties such as
oxygen or halogens. For some hydrocarbon propellants, the hydrogens
are completely replace by other moieties such as halogens.
Commercial propellants are often mixtures of such compounds. While
chlorofluorocarbons (typically referred to as CFC's) are acceptable
for some aspects of the present invention, CFC's are not preferred
due to real and/or perceived negative environmental impact.
Propellants acceptable for the present invention will typically
have a vapor pressure of less than about 200 psig, more preferably,
less than about 150 psig, even more preferably less than about 100
psig, and most preferably less than about 70 psig at 70.degree. F.
Some nonlimiting examples of propellants and propellant products
are propane, isobutane, n-butane, 1,1-difluoroethane,
1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane, isopentane, n-pentane as well as
products and mixtures sold under the Aeron.RTM. Tradename all
available from CPC International. A full listing of such product is
available at the website address www.diversifiedcpc.com *****
(traditional reference) sponsored by Diversified CPC international
and these nonlimiting examples are incorporated herein by
reference.
[0453] I. Other Optional Ingredients
[0454] The composition of the present invention can optionally
contain other adjunct odor-controlling materials, chelating agents,
additional antistatic agents if more static control is desired,
insect and moth repelling agents, colorants, especially bluing
agents, viscosity control agents, and mixtures thereof in addition
to the antiwrinkle ingredients, e.g., polymers. The total level of
optional ingredients is preferably less than about 10%, more
preferably less than about 5% even more preferably less than about
3%, and still more preferably less than about 2%, by weight of the
usage composition. These optional ingredients exclude the other
ingredients specifically mentioned hereinbefore. Incorporating
adjunct odor-controlling materials can enhance the capacity of the
cyclodextrin to control odors as well as broaden the range of odor
types and molecule sizes which can be controlled. Such materials
include, for example, the metallic salts described hereinbefore,
water-soluble cationic and anionic polymers in addition to those
already disclosed, zeolites as discussed hereinbefore,
water-soluble bicarbonate salts, and mixtures thereof. Other
optional materials are salts for viscosity control, antistatic
agents, insect or moth repelling agent, optional colorant, optional
anti-clogging agent, and mixtures thereof of optional
ingredients.
[0455] 1. Optional Water-Soluble Polyionic Polymers
[0456] Some water-soluble polyionic polymers, e.g., water-soluble
cationic polymer and water-soluble anionic polymers in addition to
those discussed hereinbefore, can be used in the composition of the
present invention to provide additional odor control benefits.
[0457] a) Cationic Polymers, e.g., Polyamines
[0458] Water-soluble cationic polymers, e.g., those containing
amino functionalities, amido functionalities, and mixtures thereof,
are useful in the present invention to control certain acid-type
odors.
[0459] b) Anionic Polymers, e.g., Polyacrylic Acid
[0460] Water-soluble anionic polymers in addition to those
described hereinbefore, e.g., polyacrylic acids and their
water-soluble salts are useful in the present invention to control
certain amine-type odors. Preferred polyacrylic acids and their
alkali metal salts have an average molecular weight of less than
about 20,000, more preferably less than 10,000, even more
preferably from about 500 to about 5,000. Added polymers must not
cause the composition to exceed acceptable limits on the Trouton's
ratio. Salts are useful viscosity control agents, as disclosed
below to use together with polymers to control the Trouton's ratio,
if necessary. Polymers containing sulfonic acid groups, phosphoric
acid groups, phosphonic acid groups, and their water-soluble salts,
and mixtures thereof, and mixtures with carboxylic acid and
carboxylate groups, are also suitable. Cross-linked polymers are
also useful.
[0461] Water-soluble polymers containing both cationic and anionic
functionalities are also suitable. Examples of these polymers are
given in U.S. Pat. No. 4,909,986, issued Mar. 20, 1990 to N.
Kobayashi and A. Kawazoe, incorporated herein by reference. Another
example of water-soluble polymers containing both cationic and
anionic functionalities is a copolymer of dimethyldiallyl ammonium
chloride and acrylic acid, commercially available under the trade
name Merquat.RTM. 2800 from Calgon.
[0462] When a water-soluble polymer is used it is typically present
at a level of from about 0.001% to about 3%, preferably from about
0.005% to about 2%, more preferably from about 0.01% to about 1%,
and even more preferably from about 0.05% to about 0.5%, by weight
of the usage composition.
[0463] 2. Optional Antistatic Agents
[0464] The composition of the present invention can optionally
contain additional effective amounts of other antistatic agent to
provide the treated clothes with in-wear static. Preferred
antistatic agents are those that are water soluble in at least an
effective amount, such that the composition remains a clear
solution. Examples of these antistatic agents are monoalkyl
cationic quaternary ammonium compounds, e.g.,
mono(C.sub.10-C.sub.14 alkyl)trimethyl ammonium halide, such as
monolauryl trimethyl ammonium chloride, hydroxycetyl hydroxyethyl
dimethyl ammonium chloride, available under the trade name
Dehyquart E.RTM. from Henkel, and ethyl bis(polyethoxy ethanol)
alkylammonium ethylsulfate, available under the trade name Variquat
66.RTM. from Witco Corp., polyethylene glycols, polymeric
quaternary ammonium salts, such as polymers conforming to the
general formula:
--[N(CH.sub.3).sub.2--(CH.sub.2).sub.3--NH--CO--NH--(CH.sub.2).sub.3--N(CH-
.sub.3).sub.2.sup.+--CH.sub.2CH.sub.2OCH.sub.2CH.sub.2]--x.sup.2+2x[Cl.sup-
.-]
[0465] available under the trade name Mirapol A-15.RTM. from
Rhne-Poulenc, and
--[N(CH.sub.3).sub.2--(CH.sub.2).sub.3--NH--CO--(CH.sub.2).sub.4--CO--NH---
(CH.sub.2).sub.3--N(CH.sub.3).sub.2--(CH.sub.2CH.sub.2OCH.sub.2CH.sub.2]---
.sub.x.sup.+x[Cl.sup.-],
[0466] available under the trade name Mirapol AD-1.RTM. from
Rhne-Poulenc, quaternized polyethyleneimines,
vinylpyrrolidone/methacrylamido-propyltri- methylammonium chloride
copolymer, available under the trade name Gafquat HS-100.RTM. from
GAF; triethonium hydrolyzed collagen ethosulfate, available under
the trade name Quat-Pro E.RTM. from Maybrook; neutralized
sulfonated polystyrene, available, e.g., under the trade name Versa
TL-130.RTM. from Alco Chemical, neutralized sulfonated
styrene/maleic anhydride copolymers, available, e.g., under the
trade name Versa TL-4.RTM. from Alco Chemical; and mixtures
thereof.
[0467] It is preferred that a no foaming, or low foaming, agent is
used, to avoid foam formation during fabric treatment. It is also
preferred that polyethoxylated agents such as polyethylene glycol
or Variquat 66.RTM. are not used when alpha-cyclodextrin is used.
The polyethoxylate groups have a strong affinity to, and readily
complex with, alpha-cyclodextrin which in turn depletes the
uncomplexed cyclodextrin available for odor control.
[0468] When an antistatic agent is used it is typically present at
a level of from about 0.05% to about 10%, preferably from about
0.1% to about 5%, more preferably from about 0.3% to about 3%, by
weight of the usage composition.
[0469] 3. Optional Insect and/or Moth Repelling Agents
[0470] The composition of the present invention can optionally
contain an effective amount of insect and/or moth repelling agents.
Typical insect and moth repelling agents are pheromones, such as
anti-aggregation pheromones, and other natural and/or synthetic
ingredients. Preferred insect and moth repellent agents useful in
the composition of the present invention are perfume ingredients,
such as citronellol, citronellal, citral, linalool, cedar extract,
geranium oil, sandalwood oil, 2-(diethylphenoxy)ethanol,
1-dodecene, etc. Other examples of insect and/or moth repellents
useful in the composition of the present invention are disclosed in
U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,449,987; 4,693,890; 4,696,676; 4,933,371;
5,030,660; 5,196,200; and in "Semio Activity of Flavor and
Fragrance Molecules on Various Insect Species", B. D. Mookherjee et
al., published in Bioactive Volatile Compounds from Plants, ASC
Symposium Series 525, R. Teranishi, R. G. Buttery, and H. Sugisawa,
1993, pp. 35-48, all of said patents and publications being
incorporated herein by reference. When an insect and/or moth
repellent is used it is typically present at a level of from about
0.005% to about 3%, by weight of the usage composition.
[0471] 4. Optional Colorant
[0472] Colorants and dyes, especially bluing agents, can be
optionally added to the wrinkle control compositions for visual
appeal and performance impression. When colorants are used, they
are used at extremely low levels to avoid fabric staining.
Preferred colorants for use in the present compositions are highly
water-soluble dyes, e.g., Liquitint.RTM. dyes available from
Milliken Chemical Co. Non-limiting examples of suitable dyes are,
Liquitint Blue HP.RTM., Liquitint Blue 65.RTM., Liquitint Patent
Blue.RTM., Liquitint Royal Blue.RTM., Liquitint Experimental Yellow
8949-43.RTM., Liquitint Green HMC.RTM., Liquitint Yellow II.RTM.,
and mixtures thereof, preferably Liquitint Blue HP.RTM., Liquitint
Blue 65.RTM., Liquitint Patent Blue.RTM., Liquitint Royal
Blue.RTM., Liquitint Experimental Yellow 8949-43.RTM., and mixtures
thereof.
[0473] 5. Optional Anti-Clogging Agent
[0474] Optional anti-clogging agent which enhances the wetting and
anti-clogging properties of the composition, especially when starch
is present, is chosen from the group of polymeric glycols of
alkanes and olefins having from 2 to about 6, preferably 2 carbon
atoms. The anti-clogging agent inhibits the formation of "plugs" in
the spray nozzle. An example of the preferred anti-clogging agent
is polyethylene glycol having an average molecular weight of from
about 800 to about 12,000, more preferably from about 1,400 to
about 8,000. When used, the anti-clogging agent is present at a
level of from about 0.01% to about 1%, preferably from about 0.05%
to about 0.5%, more preferably, from about 0.1% to about 0.3% by
weight of the usage composition.
[0475] 6. Viscosity Control Agent
[0476] Optional viscosity control agents, such as electrolytes are
useful for lowering viscosity in the present compositions. Not to
be bound by theory, but when carboxylic acid polymers have some
degree of charge, these can build viscosity via electrostatic
repulsion, electrolytes can provide shielding between charges that
reduces electrostatic repulsion and thus reduces viscosity.
[0477] Inorganic salts suitable for reducing dilution viscosity
include MgI.sub.2, MgBr.sub.2, MgCl.sub.2, Mg(NO.sub.3).sub.2,
Mg.sub.3(PO.sub.4).sub.2, Mg.sub.2P.sub.2O.sub.7, MgSO.sub.4,
magnesium silicate, NaI, NaBr, NaCl, NaF, Na.sub.3(PO.sub.4),
NaSO.sub.3, Na.sub.2SO.sub.4, Na.sub.2SO.sub.3, NaNO.sub.3,
NaIO.sub.3, Na.sub.3(PO.sub.4), Na.sub.4P.sub.2O.sub.7, sodium
silicate, sodium metasilicate, sodium tetrachloroaluminate, sodium
tripolyphosphate (STPP), Na.sub.2Si.sub.3O.sub.7, sodium zirconate,
CaF.sub.2, CaCl.sub.2, CaBr.sub.2, CaI.sub.2, CaSO.sub.4,
Ca(NO.sub.3).sub.2, Ca, KI, KBr, KCl, KF, KNO.sub.3, KIO.sub.3,
K.sub.2SO.sub.4, K.sub.2SO.sub.3, K.sub.3(PO.sub.4),
K.sub.4(P.sub.2O.sub.7), potassium pyrosulfate, potassium
pyrosulfite, LiI, LiBr, LiCl, LiF, LiNO.sub.3, AlF.sub.3,
AlCl.sub.3, AlBr.sub.3, AlI.sub.3, Al.sub.2(SO.sub.4).sub.3,
Al(PO.sub.4), Al(NO.sub.3).sub.3, aluminum silicate; including
hydrates of these salts and including combinations of these salts
or salts with mixed cations e.g. potassium alum AlK(SO.sub.4).sub.2
and salts with mixed anions, e.g. potassium tetrachloroaluminate
and sodium tetrafluoroaluminate. Salts incorporating cations from
groups IIIa, IVa, Va, VIa, VIIa, VIII, Ib, and IIb on the periodic
chart with atomic numbers >13 are also useful in reducing
dilution viscosity but less preferred due to their tendency to
change oxidation states and thus they can adversely affect the odor
or color of the formulation or lower weight efficiency. Salts with
cations from group Ia or IIa with atomic numbers >20 as well as
salts with cations from the lactinide or actinide series are useful
in reducing dilution viscosity, but less preferred due to lower
weight efficiency or toxicity. Mixtures of above salts are also
useful.
[0478] Organic salts useful in this invention include, magnesium,
sodium, lithium, potassium, zinc, and aluminum salts of the
carboxylic acids including formate, acetate, proprionate,
pelargonate, citrate, gluconate, lactate aromatic acids e.g.
benzoates, phenolate and substituted benzoates or phenolates, such
as phenolate, salicylate, polyaromatic acids terephthalates, and
polyacids e.g. oxylate, adipate, succinate, benzenedicarboxylate,
benzenetricarboxylate. Other useful organic salts include carbonate
and/or hydrogencarbonate (HCO.sub.3.sup.-1) when the pH is
suitable, alkyl and aromatic sulfates and sulfonates e.g. sodium
methyl sulfate, benzene sulfonates and derivatives such as xylene
sulfonate, and amino acids when the pH is suitable. Electrolytes
can comprise mixed salts of the above, salts neutralized with mixed
cations such as potassium/sodium tartrate, partially neutralized
salts such as sodium hydrogen tartrate or potassium hydrogen
phthalate, and salts comprising one cation with mixed anions.
[0479] Other useful organic salts include amino compounds that be
protonated to form cationic salts either prior to addition or in
situ such as Tris Amino.RTM.
(2-amino-2-hydroxymethyl-1,3-propanediol) or AMPD.TM.
(2-amino-2-methyl-1,3-propanediol) Both available from Angus
Chemical Company.
[0480] Generally, inorganic electrolytes are preferred over organic
electrolytes for better weight efficiency and lower costs. Mixtures
of inorganic and organic salts can be used. Typical levels of
electrolyte in the compositions are less than about 10%. Preferably
from about 0.5% to about 5% by weight, more preferably from about
0.75% to about 2.5%, and most preferably from about 1% to about 2%
by weight of the fabric softener composition.
[0481] J. Mixtures Thereof
[0482] A variety of mixtures and combinations of optional
supplemental wrinkle control agent, optional odor control agent,
optional perfume, optional antimicrobial active, optional
aminocarboxylate chelator, optional water-soluble polyionic
polymer, optional antistatic agent, optional insect repellant,
optional colorant, optional anti-clogging agent, can be used in the
present polymer compositions.
[0483] II. Information Concerning Use of Wrinkle Control
Compositions
[0484] Information is may be provided to the consumer in the form
of instructions. However, other forms and methods of dissminating
information may be used and are described in the following
sections. Preferably, information will be provided in one or more
of these forms via a combination of dissemination methods.
[0485] A. Information--Educational Elements
[0486] The information provided to the consumer may be described in
terms of the educational elements that are disclosed in detail
below. This description of essential and optional educational
elements is nonlimiting. It should be recognized that the methods
of improving the performance of a wrinkle control composition by
increasing the education associated with that composition and/or
exposing the consumer to other types of optional educational
elements, such as information concerning the use of the composition
that is not specifically disclosed herein, will improve the
performance of the composition and ultimately its acceptance by the
consumer.
[0487] A preferred educational element or information to be
provided to the consumer is (1.) a set of instructions that will
instruct the consumer on how to improve the performance of the
wrinkle composition when the said composition is used by the
consumer. Other preferred information or educational elements will
comprise, (2.) information that will tend to convince the consumer
that the performance of the said composition is authetic, e.g.
instill belief, (3.) instructions that teach the consumer on how to
incorporate the use of wrinkle control compositions into their
daily habits and lifestyles, (4.) instructions concerning the
plurality of uses and applications the consumer may employ the
composition for, (5.) information concerning the presence of
additional benefits other than wrinkle control that may be derived
form the use of the compositions, (6.) information identifying the
consumer that many members of the household or organization can
competently and safely use the wrinkle control composition, and
(7.) combinations thereof.
[0488] 1. Instructions for Proper Use of the Composition
[0489] It is surprising to discover that a method for using a
wrinkle control composition is not intuitively obvious to the
typical consumer. Many consumers apply a less than adequate amount
of product, do not acheive adequate distribution, and/or wait for
wrinkles to spontaneously disappear. Therefore it has been found
that the majority of consumers must be taught how to use the
wrinkle control product including, but not imited to, applying
appropriate product levels, distributing the product evenly, and
manipulating fabrics. Unless the consumer is taught how to use the
product properly, it is highly unlikely that the consumer will use
the product successfully, and due to their disappointment will not
repurchase it. There are a variety of procedural elements that the
consumer must learn, including how best to apply the composition,
how to shape the garment after applying the composition, what types
of clothes respond best to the composition, and when to use the
composition, among others.
[0490] Surprisingly, methods of using the described compositions to
guarantee good wrinkle control performance are not intuitively
understood by the consumer. Other product features such as
additional non-wrinkle related benefits are also unobvious unless
they are shared via instructions that are designed to call them to
the consumer's attention. Therefore, an article of manufacture
comprising a wrinkle control composition and optionally, but
preferably a container including a spray dispenser and a set of
instructions unexpectedly raises the value of the product
significantly to the consumer vs. a similar article lacking such
instructions. The set of instructions can be provided directly on
or independent of such a container.
[0491] a) Instructions for Applying a Wrinkle Control
Composition
[0492] Instructions for applying a wrinkle control composition
provide guidance for applying the composition successfully to
achieve good wrinkle control performance. Surprisingly the best way
to apply product is not intuitively understood by many consumers.
Articulating instructions for applying such a composition and
providing these to the consumer in the form of a set of
instructions together with a wrinkle control composition raises the
value of the product significantly to the consumer vs. a similar
article lacking such instructions for use. Methods of use
instructions can also be provided independent of a tangible article
of use, but rather in conjunction with a recognizable product image
(e.g. trademarks, trade dress, trade color, and advertising are
nonlimiting exemples of recognizable product image).
[0493] Methods of application include detailed instructions
concerning how to prepare clothes and product prior to application,
instructions on the amount of product to apply, procedures for
applying the product, procedures for manipulating the fabrics to
aid the wrinkle removal, optional post-treatment procedures, and
instructions pertinent to specific types of fabrics.
i) Pre-Application Procedures
[0494] Several preparatory steps occur before product is applied to
fabrics. Fabrics should be arranged such that the increment of
fabric to be treated or preferably, if possible the entire fabric
is available for application of the composition. Typically, this is
done either by spreading a fabric on a surface or suspending it by
hanging it on a hanger or clothelines or similar means. If the
fabric is a household fabric, it may be suitable and often
desirable to treat the household fabric in its typical environment.
For instance, it is preferred to treat curtains as they hang on the
door, table clothes as they are spread on a table, bedspreads and
sheets as they lay on a bed and pillowcases while they cover
pillows. Treating household fabrics in this manner can save the
time of removing the fabric treating it and then replacing it. In
addition, the treatment of household fabrics in their typical
environment is also convenient because it provides a space to hang
or spread the fabric. In cases where a fabric will be treated on a
surface or while hanging and it is desirable to prevent over spray
onto an unintended surface such as floors, table tops, washing
machines, walls, etc. In applications where overspray is possible,
a material such as a towel or newspaper should be placed underneath
the fabric to prevent unintended deposition on surounding
surfaces.
[0495] When using a wrinkle control composition that may separate,
it is preferred, but not essential to shake the composition before
applying to homogenize the contents and guarantee uniform
application of actives during use.
ii) Amount of Composition to Apply
[0496] An effective amount of a wrinkle control composition of the
present invention is applied to fabrics, preferably but not
essentially, by spraying as disclosed below. When the composition
is apply onto fabric, an effective amount should be deposited onto
the fabric, with the fabric becoming damp and for some cases,
totally saturated with the composition, at least where the wrinkle
exists. In general, lower levels of treatment application are
preferred, typically from about 1%, preferably from about 3%, even
more preferably 5%, and most preferably from about 7% by weight of
the fabric and with higher levels of treatment typically being less
than about 300% preferably less than about 150%, more preferably
less than about 100%, even more preferably less than about 75%,
still more preferably less than about 50%, and most preferably less
than about 35% by weight of the fabric. For heavier fabrics or
fabrics that are more heavily wrinkled, typically higher levels of
treatment are needed to reduce wrinkles.
[0497] Although general guidelines above are helpful to understand
the range of product application level, many factors affect the
specific level of treatment suitable for each fabric, e.g. whether
the fabric is wet or dry, whether the fabric is heavy or light and
whether the fabric is lightly wrinkled or heavily wrinkled.
[0498] When dry fabrics are treated with the wrinkle controlling
compositions, the amount of the composition that should be used is
dependent on several factors including, but not limited to, the
weight of the fabric, the type of fabric, and the type of wrinkle
in the fabric. Fabrics can have several types of wrinkles. One type
of is wrinkle is characterized by its relative depth and sharpness.
Such wrinkles are difficult to remove and require a higher level of
treatment and more work by the user to remove. When fabrics have
such tough to remove wrinkles or the fabric is heavy, wrinkle
controlling compositions are typically applied at lower levels of
at least about 5% of the weight of the fabric, preferably at least
about 7% of the weight of the fabric and at higher levels of
typically less than about 300% of the weight of the fabric,
preferably less than about 150% of the weight of the fabric, and
most preferably less than about 100% of the weight of the
fabric.
[0499] Another type of wrinkle is characterized by its broad nature
and lack of depth; such wrinkles are often referred to as
"bumpiness", "waviness", or "rumples". Such wrinkles are often less
difficult to remove than the sharp type of wrinkle discussed above.
When fabrics are lighter in weight or have wrinkles that are less
difficult to remove typically levels of treatment application are
at least about 1% of the weight of the fabric preferably at least
about 3% of the weight of the fabric, more preferably at least
about 5% of the weight of the fabric, and most preferably about 7%
of the weight of the fabric and at higher levels of typically less
than about 100% of the weight of the fabric, preferably less than
about 50% of the weight of the fabric, more preferably less than
about 30% of the weight of the fabric and most preferably less than
25% of the weight of the fabric.
[0500] Although it is preferably to treat dry fabrics, wet fabrics
can be treated with the wrinkle control composition as well to
prevent wrinkling during the drying process, and deliver a softness
feel, especially to fabrics that haven't been treated with a fabric
softener. Fabrics treated while wet should be manipulated into the
desired end conformation after spraying and hung or laid flat to
dry. The wrinkle controlling compositions are also useful for wet
fabrics when wet fabrics are being line dried.
[0501] To reduce the potential for staining, it is always
preferable to minimize the total amount of wrinkle controlling
composition needed to remove the wrinkles form the fabric.
iii) Procedures for Applying the Composition
[0502] Many different devices and/or implements can be used to
apply treatment to fabrics and the use of these devices and/or
implement is, at times, dependent on the context. Generally
preferred practices for applying the composition include arranging
for the source of the composition to be an appropriate distance
from the fabric and achieving good distribution. Practices for
applying the composition to fabric which are specific to devices
used for distribution are disclosed herein below. When applying
treatments to fabrics via an aerosol means herein it is recommended
to hold the source of the aerosol directed towards the fabric at a
distance that is typically at least about 2 inches, preferably at
least about 3 inches, more preferably at least about 4 inches,
still more preferably at least about 5 inches and most preferably
at least about 6 inches from the fabric, while the upper distance
from fabric is typically less than about 40 inches preferably less
than about 20 inches, more preferably less than about 15 inches,
even more preferably less than about 12 inches, even more
preferably still less than about 10 inches and most preferably less
than about 8.5 inches from the fabric.
[0503] More preferably, the wrinkle control composition should be
applied in a manner that achieves even coverage over the entire
fabric surface. Even coverage and good distribution of the product
over the fabric is highly preferred, because this practice reduces
drying time, prevents staining, and guarantees that all the
wrinkles in a fabric will be treated with the composition. While it
is acceptable to treat the overall garment using a discrete
distribution action e.g. spray a spot on a fabric and then move to
another spot on the fabric and spray, it is much more highly
preferably to spray fabrics using a sweeping motion over the fabric
to aid maximum spreading and coverage of the wrinkle controlling
composition. When using a manual sprayer to treat fabrics it is
preferred to sweep horizontally and vertically a few times to
achieve even distribution. Using other motions to achieve good
distribution such as a circular motion is also acceptable. In the
case of a shirt, it is discovered that very specific
recommendations such as sweeping while spraying are surprisingly
effective in helping the consumer achieve the benefit.
[0504] An even distribution can also be conveniently achieved by
using a device that provides a continuous stream of aerosol, such
as a pressurized or powered sprayers. Pressurized and powered
sprayers may also be desired to prevent hand and finger fatigue
even though a continuous spray may not be required. When using a
continuous spray, a sweeping motion is still useful for achieving a
good distribution of the composition, but sweeping should be
continuous and rapid when using a continuous spray. When using a
continuous spray, employing a circular motion to achieve good
distribution is also helpful.
[0505] While it is typically preferred to attempt to achieve
uniform distribution over a garment, there are situations in which
a non-uniform distribution is acceptable and even useful. For
instance, in areas where more difficult wrinkles exist on the
fabrics, it is usually desirable to concentrate a higher dose of
wrinkle controlling composition on these wrinkled sites vs. the
bulk of the fabric. For garments that have a few lighter wrinkles,
it is normally preferable to apply wrinkle controlling compositions
generally over these sites. However, it is acceptable to treat only
the part of a fabric that will be visible, e.g., the front of a
shirt where only the front will be visible since the back will be
covered by a jacket.
a. Distribution via an Aerosol
[0506] For purposes of the present invention and aerosol is defined
as liquid droplets distributed in a gaseous carrier, and for
purposes of the present invention the liquid to be formed into
droplets comprises the wrinkle control composition and the gaseous
carrier is air.
[0507] Many devices can be used to produce aerosols including, but
not limited to trigger sprayers, pumps, pressurized sprayers,
pre-compression sprayers, sprayers fueled by propellant, chambers
with mechanical sprayers, steamers, steam irons, paint sprayers,
etc. The preferred devices for generating aerosols for the purpose
of the present invention are trigger sprayers, pre-compression
sprayers, and propellant driven sprays. When using trigger
sprayers, it is efficacious to instruct the consumer to pull the
triggering mechanism in full strokes to aerosolize the product
effectively and provide the best distribution on fabrics, while
reducing negatives such as sprayer drip and large droplet size.
[0508] When aerosols are used these should provide specific spray
distribution, particle size, and other spray characteristics within
specific ranges as disclosed herein below.
b. Application via an Implement
[0509] A variety of implements can be used to aid in the
application of the composition to fabrics. Examples of such
implements include rollers, gloves, mitts, brushes, and
substrates.
[0510] Substrates are typically used to transfer the said
composition to fabrics during the drying process either in domestic
or commercial fabric drying equipment. Substrates are defined
herein as any item that can releasably contain the composition
until such time as the substrate plus said composition is added to
the dryer and it comes into contact with the fabrics to be treated
with the composition. The substrate releases the composition and
transfers it in a controlled fashion such that the composition is
evenly distributed across the surfaces of the garments within the
dryer.
[0511] It should be understood that everyday objects available to
the consumer and specially manufactured items are suitable for use
as substrates for the purpose of introducing a wrinkle controlling
composition into the dryer and transferring the composition to the
target fabrics. Available substrates that can be used to deliver
wrinkle controlling composition include but are not limited to,
cloth diapers, rags, wash clothes, towels, flexible nonwoven sheet
or towellete, or sponges. It should also be understood that a
substrate can be a manufactured item that is suitable for
releasably containing the wrinkle controlling composition to
fabrics in the dryer. When used in combination with substrates, the
desired amount of the wrinkle controlling composition should be
poured directly on the substrate (unless it is already contained
within the substrate as an article of manufacture) and the
substrate plus the wrinkle controlling composition is then placed
in the clothes dryer and the dryer is activated. The dryer
temperature should be set according to recommendations given by the
fabric manufacturer.
[0512] A substrate can be chosen such that it has the capacity to
contain the desired level of the said wrinkle controlling
composition. Alternately, multiple substrates can be used to
deliver the desired amount of wrinkle controlling composition when
the amount exceeds the capacity of one substrate. Also, when the
batch or load of fabrics is large either in number and/or weight,
it is often desirable to use multiple substrates in combination
with the wrinkle controlling composition to achieve a more uniform
distribution of the wrinkle controlling composition during the
tumbling of the fabrics in the dryer. When the wrinkle controlling
composition is poured on a fabric or substrate for delivery into
the clothes dryer, it is preferred that the item used to deliver
the wrinkle controlling composition is clean.
[0513] c) Physical Manipulations for Removing Wrinkles
[0514] Not to be bound by theory, but the removal of wrinkles from
fabrics typically requires some form of mechanical force in
addition to the chemical energy of the composition. Surprisingly,
it is not obvious to consumers that mechanical energy is necessary
to remove wrinkles when a wrinkle control composition is applied to
fabric. Nor is it self-evident that when mechanical energy is used
together with the said wrinkle control composition, that the level
of mechanical energy is low or mild compared to typical mechanical
energy employed in the wrinkle removal process, such as ironing or
pressing. Therefore, it greatly increase the value and everyday
convenience of the product to go to extreme measures to communicate
this point as transparently as possible to the consumer.
[0515] In limited instances, the mechanical force required can be
exceptionally low, such as in the force of gravity on a fabric that
is being hung from a hanger, clothesline or similar means or the
moderate force achieved by accelerating the fabrics through
shaking. More typically the mechanical force required is slightly
higher and so it is optional but preferred to apply physical
manipulations to the fabric. Often these physical manipulations are
most meaningfully described by actions such as stretching, tugging,
and smoothing, but these are to be understood as nonlimiting
directions for physical manipulations.
i) Physical Manipulations
[0516] After an effective level of treatment is applied to the
fabrics, there are several manipulations that can be employed to
aid in removing wrinkles. Not to be bound by theory, but some type
of mechanical force, in addition to chemical energy imparted by the
said composition, is necessary to remove wrinkles from clothing. It
is acceptable in limited cases, such as the treating lightweight
garments with very light wrinkling, to employ exceeding low
mechanical energy, specifically throught the application of
gravitational force on the fabrics by suspending it or shaking it
while suspended. Typically however, at least a moderate level of
gentle physical manipulation is desirable to remove wrinkles after
treatment. It is preferred to avoid excessive physical manipulation
as this may lead to stretching of the garment. Preferred physical
manipulations of a treated garment will include pinching, shaking,
snapping, pressing, pulling and combinations of these operations.
It should be understood that these actions are nonlimiting of the
appropriate physical actions that may be used to manipulate the
garment or fabric.
[0517] Generally physical manipulation of the fabric should occur
in at least one direction, preferably perpendicular to the
wrinkles, where the direction of the wrinkles can be identified.
More preferably, the manipulation of the fabric will occur in at
least two directions that are perpendicular. When a direction can
not be identified for the wrinkles, it is preferable to gently
manipulate the fabric in at least one direction, and more
preferably in at least two directions that are perpendicular to
each other.
[0518] Fabrics can also be smoothed or pulled using the hands with
pressing, gliding motions similar to those employed with an iron.
Stretching and tugging motions to pull out wrinkles are also
acceptable methods of smoothing to the fabric. Pressing and gliding
with the hands can be accomplished by placing the fabric on a
surface, especially a horizontal surface such as a table, bed, mat,
ironing board or othe surface that can provide counter pressure to
the pressure exerted by the hands to effect the stretching and
smoothing. When a surface is used for counter pressure, it is
sometimes preferable to protect the surface from over spray by
covering with a mat, cloth, or paper, etc. Alternately, the garment
can be suspended, as on a hanger or clothes line and hands can be
placed on either side of the fabric and pressed together to provide
counter pressure for each other as the hands move along the fabric
to stretch and smooth it. Attaching weights to the lower edges of a
suspended garment can act as a substitute to smoothing the garment
by hand and will provide moderate physical manipulation of the
fabric
[0519] Fabric manipulation is especially useful on certain areas of
fabrics that are designated as challenge areas. Typically, the
challenge areas are more difficult to smooth due to the thickness
of fabric, seams, interfaces or the presence of intentional creases
or pleats that are expected to have sharp appearance. Challenge
areas, on garments and fabrics in general, can include the
following nonlimiting areas collars, seams, plackets, hems,
ruffles, appliqus, embroidery, various other fabric decorations,
areas with interfacing, intentional creases, e.g. in the front of
pants, and pleats. Often a more energetic level of fabric
manipulation or smoothing is required on challenge areas A
nonlimiting type of smoothing action for challenge areas is
delivered by pinching fingers together and pulling the area through
the fingers when these areas are small as with collars, etc.
[0520] Once the fabric has been sprayed and optionally, but
preferably, stretched or smoothed, it is hung until dry or
maintained under stress to reduce the reappearance of the wrinkle.
The manipulations to remove wrinkles can be performed with the
garment hung vertically, e.g., on a clothes hanger or spread on a
horizontal surface, such as, a bed, an ironing board, a table
surface, and the like. Another method to loosen wrinkles after
treating involves shaking out fabrics with enough energy to loosen
wrinkles, in some cases it may be necessary to impart enough energy
to cause the fabric to make a snapping noise or motion. The
wrinkles could also be manipulated out of the fabric using an
implement designed to help smooth the fabrics. Such an implement
would be useful in preventing contacts between hands and wrinkle
controlling composition, when desired.
[0521] Many fabrics or garments also contain bends in the fabrics,
often termed creases or pleats, that are desirable. Such creases or
pleats are often found on the front of pant legs and the sides of
sleeves. These can be reinforced while the garment is being shaped
to preserve the crease. Creases are reinforced by applying pressure
usually by pinching the fabric either with hands, fingers, or an
implement and pulling the crease through the pressure point or by
hanging the garment so that it folds at the crease and reinforces
it with the pressure of gravity. The fabric should then be laid out
flat to dry or hung on a hanger or with some other apparatus such
that the fabric will remain smooth while drying. Weights can be
attached to critical points on fabrics and garments to aid in
maintaining smooth appearance and/or reinforce creases during
drying.
[0522] d) Post-Treatment Procedures
i) Drying the Treated Fabric
[0523] Depending on the amount of product used to treat the garment
and the weight of the garment, the garment should be dried in air
for an upper time of less than about 24 hours, preferably less than
about 12 hours, more preferably less than about 6 hours, still more
preferably less than about 3 hours, and most preferably equal to or
less than about 2 hours and typically the lower limit of drying
time is equal to or greater than about 1 minute, preferably greater
than about 5 minutes, more preferably equal to or greater than
about 10 minutes, still more preferably greater than or equal to
about 30 minutes and most preferably greater than or equal to about
60 minutes. It is preferable to let fabrics that were very wet
prior to treating with the wrinkle controlling composition dry for
longer periods. It is also preferable to let fabrics that are
treated with higher amounts of the wrinkle controlling composition
dry for longer periods of time. When consumers do have difficulty
with lengthy dry times, surprisingly, it is not obvious to them
that there are changes in their fabric care habits that can be made
to address the dry time problem. Therefore, it is helpful to
instruct consumers to change their fabric care habits by choosing
garments to wear well ahead of time, preferably the night before
wear, to allow adequate dry time. Alternately, consumers can be
advised to use less spray and to concentrate application at the
most wrinkled sites. Also, consumers can be advised to use the
iron, to provide heat energy for drying the fabrics.
[0524] It is acceptable to assist the drying, either by heating, or
blowing air across the fabric surface, or both. Thus, at times it
is desirable to follow the use of wrinkle controlling composition
by treating the fabric with an appliance that can help dry the
clothes. Nonlimiting examples of such appliances are clothes dryers
and hand-held hair dryers. The wrinkle controlling composition, in
combination with an appliance, can be used on both dry or wet
fabrics. For instance, the wrinkle controlling composition can be
used in combination with a clothes dryer to remove wrinkles from
single fabrics or garments as well as batches, or loads, of fabrics
and garments. Drying with low-heat or cool air is preferred for
fabrics that normally have a tendency to shrink, such as wool,
silk, rayon, and the like.
[0525] A hand-held hair dryer can be used to increase the speed of
drying of individual fabrics. It is preferably to use the hand-held
hair dryer on fabrics that are not very wet since it can be time
consuming to dry fabrics with such an appliance. Therefore, it is
preferable to employ this method on fabrics that were treated in a
dry state.
[0526] When using a hand-held hair dryer, the wrinkle controlling
composition should be applied evenly over fabrics using the minimal
amount of wrinkle controlling composition necessary. Preferably,
the fabric is manipulated as described above to remove wrinkles
prior to drying with the hand-held hair dryer. The hand-held dryer
is turned on either low, medium, or high heat, preferably medium or
high heat and the air stream is applied evenly over the fabrics
until the fabrics are dry. However, care should be taken to
preferably use low-heat and/or cool air to dry fabrics that are
prone to shrinkage, such as, wool, silk, rayon, and the like,
especially when the fabrics are reaching the point of drying
completely. After drying the fabric should be placed in a
configuration that will maintain its smoothness until use.
ii) Ironing
[0527] Ironing is a process that is typically used when consumers
prefer a more pressed look. Ironing is also a useful way to apply
physical manipulation and drying in a single activity. There are
consumers who prefer a pressed look on all garments, but many
consumers distinguish between `casual` clothes and `formal`
clothes. Consumers who distinguish sharply between casual clothes
and formal or dress clothes often want a more pressed appearance
for the formal or dress clothes that would include extremely smooth
surfaces and very sharp creases and pleats where it is perceived
creases and pleats are necessary for the finished look of the
garment. When a more pressed look is desired, the consumer is
instructed to use the wrinkle control compositions together with
ironing to achieve the best execution of the desired formal
look.
[0528] Employing a wrinkle control composition together with
ironing reduces work involved with ironing and improves outcome vs.
current ironing aids, especially ironing aids that are primarily
starch. Spraying the fabrics with said wrinkle control compositions
plasticizes the fibers making it easier to remove the wrinkles with
ironing. Certain preferred wrinkle control composition,
particularly those containing optional shape retention polymer and
optional silicone, particularly certain silicone polyethers,
provide a much better end feel to the fabrics, especially vs.
starch-based formulations, while delivering the ultra smooth and
sharp appearance of starch. Surprisingly, consumers do not expect
fabrics that look sharp and smooth, similar to the appearance of
starched garments, will also feel soft and silky as is achieved
with some preferred compositions. Therefore, this potential benefit
is unobvious and instructing the consumer of its existence is
essential to increasing the value of these compositions as ironing
aids.
[0529] When used together with ironing, the wrinkle controlling
composition is preferably applied to fabrics prior to ironing. A
preferred way to deliver the wrinkle controlling composition to the
fabrics is by spraying. The wrinkle controlling composition can
also be delivered by employing a through-the-dryer method as
articulated above. Alternatively, in some embodiments, it is
acceptable to deliver the wrinkle controlling composition through
the iron concurrent with the ironing process. The iron should be
set to a temperature appropriate for ironing the fabric. The
wrinkle controlling compositions aid in "plasticizing" the fibers
and thus reduce the time and effort involved in ironing wrinkles
out of fabrics. In general, the wrinkle controlling composition
described herein should be used in a way similar to other ironing
aids. After ironing, the fabric should be placed in a configuration
that will maintain its smoothness as discussed above.
[0530] e) Instructions for Use on Specific Fabrics
[0531] It is not obvious to consumers how these compositions should
be used with different fabrics. Therefore, it is useful to disclose
such methods of use as instructions to the consumer. Such
instructions raise the value of a product to the consumer. Wrinkle
control compositions are useful for both casual and formal
clothing. Some nonlimiting examples of casual clothing include:
polos, khakis, T-shirts, jeans, knit wear, sweaters, etc. This
product is also useful for formal clothes including, but not
limited to: dresses, jackets, dress shirts, slacks, skirts, etc.
Other clothes that will benefit from the use of these compositions
will include uniforms, especially school or work related
uniforms.
[0532] As articulated herein above, many consumers make a
distinction between casual clothes and formal or dress clothes. In
line with this distinction, consumer want these clothes to have
different appearances. Therefore, consumers often put the extra
effort into ironing formal or dress clothes to get the smooth sharp
appearance desired in these garments as disclosed above. However,
consumers will also often iron casual clothes or knits to attain a
smooth look, but also be dissatisfied with the outcome because
ironing will squish, smash, and damage the garment fibers. While
this may not be apparent on formal clothes, which tend to be
tightly woven, the damage done to fibers is often very apparent on
knits, sweaters, and other garments with loose weaves. Many loosely
woven fabrics have a fluffiness and quality of drape that consumers
appreciate and value. These loosely woven fabrics also often have
finishes that can be described as `sheen`. When such garments are
ironed, the fibers are smashed and stiffened and the qualities of
fluffiness and drape are lost to a significant degree, since the
fiber has been stripped of its natural properties by ironing.
Therefore, wrinkle control compositions are highly valued by
consumers as an alternate way to impart a smooth, finished
appearance to knits, sweaters, and other loosely woven and casual
garments while still, surprisingly maintain and even reinforce the
natural qualities of the fiber that lead to desirable attributes
such as fluffiness, drape, and sheen.
[0533] When treating silk or rayon fabrics that are labeled "Dry
Clean Only", this should be done with compositions and devices that
enable the finest and most well distributed product application
possible to avoid staining as such fabrics are typically highly
sensitive to staining and will stain even on contact with water, if
the water is not excessively well distributed.
[0534] If any fabrics become stained these should be washed
according to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
fabric to remove the stain. While it is acceptable to use
compositions herein on many synthetic garments, the product is
especially effective on fabrics that contain a majority of natural
fibers, e.g. the product is more effective on fabrics containing
100% cotton or 65% cotton/35% polyester vs. fabrics containing 35%
cotton/65% polyester. The said compositions are also very effective
on other fabrics and blends containing natural or slightly altered
natural fibers that absorb water such as rayon, wool, silk,
etc.
[0535] Many household fabrics can be treated with the wrinkle
controlling composition while these household fabrics are residing
in their typical environment. For instance, fabric shower curtains
and window curtains can be treated while hanging on the rods, bed
spreads, quilts, sheets, ruffles, and dusters can be treated while
on a bed, and table linens can be treated while on the table.
Spraying is a preferred method for treating fabrics residing in
their typical environment. In these cases, reasonable care should
be taken to avoid staining the environment around the fabric. In
many cases spraying household fabrics in their natural environment
can replace time consuming, costly, inconvenient, or undesirable
processes. For instance, shower curtains are often de-wrinkled by
using the bathroom plumbing to generate a large quantity of steam.
Spraying wrinkle controlling composition on the shower curtains
eliminates the need to waste a large quantity of water producing
steam, the potentially undesirable effects of steam on other
elements of the bathroom (e.g., wall covers may peel), and the
inconvenience of having to close the bathroom to use for a certain
period of time. Spraying wrinkle controlling composition on
curtains and bed clothes eliminates the often awkward and time
consuming job of trying to iron large, irregular items; a process
(e.g. ironing) that often results in accidentally generating even
deeper more obvious and harder-to-remove wrinkles, as the user
struggles to control both the large, irregularly shaped fabric and
the iron. Thus, treating household fabrics as they hang in place
with wrinkle controlling composition often minimizes frustration
and struggle. It is especially desirable to dispense wrinkle
removal compositions from a powered sprayer as disclosed above to
further improve the performance and convenience.
[0536] 2. Expectations of Treatement
[0537] Very surprisingly, many consumers have difficulty
understanding and accepting that a wrinkle control composition will
work. Not to be bound by theory, but consumers have accepted
wrinkles for so long as an inevitable part of life that they now
believe wrinkle removal requires a significant investment of time
and a good degree of work. Consumers have significant difficulty
accepting that a simple wrinkle control composition can actually
work for them, despite the fact that there are currently several
wrinkle control compositions on the market. This demonstrates very
strongly that consumers must first be taught that the wrinkle
control composition is effective before they will incorporate its
use in their daily lives. A highly preferred educational element is
to teach consumers that wrinkle control compositions are effective
in removing and/or controlling wrinkles in fabric without the
application of heat.
[0538] 3. Instructions for Incorporating Product into Daily Habits
and Lifestyles
[0539] Previously, wrinkle control compositions, due to cost and
inconvenience, have been reserved for special or occasional use,
thus confining the business to a small niche business. It is an aim
of the present invention to educate consumers in the ways that an
affordable wrinkle control composition can be incorporated into
everyday use.
[0540] A variety of daily use opportunities are articulated at
several points herein and particularly in methods of use. A few
nonlimiting examples are articulated here. For example, a consumer
may not consider, unless told, that it is advantageous to choose
fabrics well ahead of the intended time for use in order to provide
time for the fabrics to dry before use. A consumer may not
consider, unless told that the product provides an oppotunity to
dewrinkle and refresh used fabrics for resuse as a substitute for
laundry processes and thereby extending the useful life of such
fabrics. Consumers may not recognize that the use of such
compositions reduces the cost and requirements for maintaining
clothes in a presentable state, thereby enlarging theselection of
clothes the consumer is willing to purchase. Likewise, consumers
realize the the somposition is safe for use by many members of the
consumers' domicile or organization, including those with physical
challenges, the elderly, the handicapped, children, youth,
students, etc. as more fully disclosed below which enables most
everyone in the household to de-wrinkle their own clothes. A
consumer may not consider the variety and breath of fabrics the
composition can be used for such as wok or school uniforms. A
consumer may not consider the opportunity to dewrinkle and refresh
fabrics which are stored improperly, unless told.
[0541] Since consumers have a variety of lifestyles and habits it
is helpful to expose consumers to a variety of methods of using the
product, so that they may find one that is suitable for them.
However, when the habits of a consumer or consumer group are well
know it is useful to focus a presentation on methods of use to
communicate directly to that consumer.
[0542] 4. Uses and Applications of Wrinkle Control Compositions
[0543] Surprisingly, consumers typically only purchase wrinkle
control spray compositions for special or occasional use, e.g.
going on trips. It is more likely that the consumer will
incorporate the use of a wrinkle control composition into their
everyday life when they are taught a plurality of uses and
applications.
[0544] Nonlimiting examples of fabric articles on which these types
of compositions may be used include clothing such as shirts, pants,
school uniforms, dresses, skirts and the like, and household
fabrics such as draperies, napkins, table clothes, bed linens such
as sheets, pillowcases, and comforters.
[0545] Non-limiting examples of applications or use situations for
these compositions include treating clothes that have been lightly
worn and are more wrinkled than soiled such that they can be
refreshed and dewrinkled without having to go through a laundry
process prior to rewear. A similar rewear process can be used with
drycleanables to reduce the number of times these fabrics need to
be drycleaned. Further, fabrics that have been in storage may be
treated to remove wrinkles so that these fabrics do not have to be
put through a laundry process prior to wear or usage. Reducing the
number of times a fabric needs to be cleaned or laundered will
lengthen the lifetime of the fabric. This benefit is not obvious to
the consumer and must be taught for it to be realized and
experienced. A final touch-up of clothing such as school uniforms,
work, and dress clothes shortly prior to wear may also be
accomplished with the use of the present composition.
[0546] A wrinkle control composition useful in the methods of the
present invention has a variety of modes of use. While such a
composition is exceptionally effective together with the typical
laundry processes it is also a surprisingly useful alternative to
typical laundry processes. Typical, nonlimiting examples of
"laundry processes" include, but are not limited to the processes
of dry cleaning, laundering in an automatic washing machine,
professional or commercial laundering, steam cleaning, hand
washing, professional or commercial pressing, home ironing, line
drying, air drying, drying in an automatic clothes dryer, drying
with a fan, drying with a hand held hair dryer or blow dryer
etc.
a) Commerical Uses and Applications
[0547] The wrinkle control compositions useful in the methods of
the present invention may be used in commercial and institutional
settings as well as in domestic settings. A nonlimiting list of
commercial and institutional settings wherein the composition finds
use includes commercial laundry and dry cleaning operations,
hotels, motels, clothing retailers, resorts, spas, cruise ships,
hair salons, beauty salons, fabric stores, tailor or alterations
businesses, hospitals, day care centers, assisted living centers,
uniform manufacture and rental business, businesses catering to the
physically active such as sports equipment retailers, ahtletic
clubs, gyms, fitness and workout centers, academic settings,
especially college campuses, camping and adventure outfitters,
travel agencies, car rental agencies, and automotive product
stores. Consumers should be made aware of these uses and the
versatility of such wrinkle control compositions in commercial
operations.
[0548] More specifically, the wrinkle control compositions
described herein are useful as finishing compositions or `pressing
aids` for commercial drycleaners, or commercial laundries that
provide cleaning and fabric care services. Within the drycleaning
or commercial laundry contexts, compositions may be used to provide
body, a smooth appearance while maintaining the soft, silky feel of
the fabric, dewrinkling without loss of qualities of drape,
fluffiness and sheen. Further, the described compositions may act
to replace some processes such as pressing garments by providing a
more acceptable end point to the consumer, namely, a de-wrinkled,
but fluffy garments.
[0549] Institutions that provide lodging or caretaking such as
hotels, motels, hospitals, hospices, dormitories, assisted living,
and day care facilities may provide the composition to customers,
staff, or residents, in lieu of devices that are normally used in
typical laundry processes such as irons, washing machines, or
dryers. In many settings disclosed above, typical laundry process
equipment is a nuisance or even a hazard to individuals and wrinkle
control compositions that do not require the application of heat to
cure or otherwise activate the wrinkle controlling effect provide a
useful alternative to frequently treating fabrics via typical
laundry processes.
[0550] Department and clothing retailers can also use the described
compositions to treat fabrics and garments to improve the look and
value of salable wares. In addition, such retailers may provide
such compositions to their consumers or to treat salable wares
after purchase to improve appearance as a goodwill gesture to their
consumers.
[0551] b) In-Home Uses and Applications
i) Use of Wrinkle Control Compositions for Fabric Appearance
Finishing
[0552] When a wrinkle control composition is used for finishing the
fabric appearance, such usage generally occurs at some point after
the fabric has been laundered and before the fabric is used for the
first time. In order to provide clarity with respect to the fabric
appearance finishing process, clothing will be used as a specific
example. However, it will be understood that for the purposes of
the present invention, appearance finishing can apply to any other
fabrics in addition to clothing.
[0553] It is preferable to treat fabrics with a wrinkle controlling
composition prior to wearing the fabrics because although typical
laundry processes do an adequate job of removing wrinkles, these
processes typically do not completely remove wrinkles nor do these
processes prevent wrinkles that may occur during storage prior to
wear. The ways in which clothes are handled and stored between
domestic and commercial cleaning and fabric care processes often
leads to reintroduction of wrinkles prior to the first wearing of
the garment. Several handling situations that can lead to
re-wrinkling, include, but are not limited to storage in closets,
or cabinets, clothes left in an unfolded state in any container or
space, such as in laundry baskets, in dryers, on tables, on floors,
in drawers, or on beds, storage in containers, especially when
tightly packed containers such as in suitcases for trips or
storage, storage in trunks, and storage in crowded drawers or other
crowded or cramped environments.
[0554] Typically, any situation where clothes are stored for a
length of time leads to a resurgence of wrinkles. Rewrinking can
ocurr whenever the clothes are under any amount of compression,
even where the compression is only due to the weight of the fabric
and the action of gravity on the garment. Previous methods for
removing resurgent wrinkles in such instances required running the
clothes through domestic or commercial processes which consumes
time and resources and can be very aggravating since it is
essentially rework. Surprisingly, it has been discovered that the
use of a wrinkle composition provides a quick, inexpensive solution
to the ongoing problem of poor fabric handling and storage that
leads to wrinkle resurgence after laundry processes.
[0555] In addition to the reintroduction of wrinkles, storage can
also lead to musty or off odors in the clothing. An additional
benefit of treating stored fabrics with wrinkle control
compositions, especially such compositions that contain perfume
and/or odor control agent, is the fact that the odor of garment is
refreshed.
ii) Use of Wrinkle Control Composition for Garment Rewear
[0556] Rewear is defined herein as wearing clothing multiple times
before subjecting the clothing to a domestic or commercial cleaning
process. Many consumers practice this rewear habit. Also, it has
been discovered that while the habit is practiced for good reasons,
the current state of the habit, or the way the habit is currently
practiced by the consumer has some undesirable elements. The many
reasons for practicing rewear include, but are not limited to, 1) a
desire to preserve the integrity, look, color sheen, and general
newness of a fabric, e.g. lengthen the lifetime of a fabric since
cleaning processes and fabric care processes (e.g. ironing) often
lead to fabric damage, 2) saving the time required to clean fabrics
after each wear, and 3) saving the cost associated with cleaning
and various fabric care processes. Since the wrinkle controlling
compositions can be used to enable and encourage the rewear habit
among a variety of consumers, treating fabrics with wrinkle
controlling compositions has been found to be an unobvious and
surprising alternative to typical domestic and commercial cleaning
and fabric care processes.
[0557] Consumers will wear a garment that has been worn before,
even if the appearance and odor of the garment are less than
optimal. Typically, consumers will only rewear clothing that has
been lightly worn before and usually only if the clothing does not
have obvious spots and/or stains to signal that it has been worn
before. However, consumers find this practice less than optimal
since most garments will have wrinkles from being worn before. In
addition, the garment is likely to have some residual odor from
previous wear. Many consumers believe that a garment is not
`ready-to-wear` if it has wrinkles. Therefore, it has been found
that wrinkle controlling compositions provide a solution to an
unobvious problem in a heretofore unrecognized consumer habit.
Wrinkle control compositions can provide the needed level of
wrinkle removal and odor removal to provide the consumer with a
significantly more acceptable outcome to support their rewear
habit.
[0558] Also, there are consumers who wish to practice the rewear
habit, but do not because these consumers feel very uncomfortable
wearing clothes that have even a minor level of wrinkling. Such
consumers feel strongly that a garment is not `ready to wear` if it
is even lightly wrinkled and will send a lightly wrinkled garment
back through laundry processes. Even if the garment has no residual
odor and they do not believe it is dirty, if the garment is even
lightly wrinkled such consumers may find the garment unacceptable
for rewear. To these consumers, even if the fabric is not dirty,
others will perceive it as unclean due to the wrinkling and these
consumers will feel their image and status in the eyes of others
suffers as a results of wearing garments that may be perceived as
unclean. This is true of virtually all consumers with respect to
clothing that is worn for business or more formal social occasions.
For such consumers, a wrinkle controlling composition can relieve a
tremendous burden of work associated with keeping clothes
continually looking ready-to-wear, fresh, and clean. Enabling the
rewear habit is also particularly useful together with garments
that must be worn multiple times during a certain period, such as
uniforms, and especially school uniforms.
[0559] Wrinkle controlling compositions, surprisingly, extend the
usable lifetime of clothing items and the lifetime of the
appearance of the clothing by reducing the number of times the
fabric will be subjected to the harsh laundry processes that lead
to fabric damage and appearance reduction. By enabling the consumer
to rewear clothing more frequently without laundering, less damage
occurs to the clothing item over a given period of time. Less
laundering results in less damage to the fibers and the appearance
of the clothing item is maintained for a longer period of time.
[0560] Therefore, in a further process aspect of the present
invention, a method for extending the useful life of clothing items
is provided. As used herein, the "useful life" of a clothing item
refers to the period of time a consumer would have used and worn a
given clothing item before replacing it because of the degradation
to the appearance and/or feel of the item that results from the
incremental damage caused by repeated launderings of the item. As
used herein, "incremental damage" or fiber damage resulting from
the repeated washing or laundering of clothing items is intended to
refer to the degradation or damage to fabric fiber attributes such
as texture, sheen, color, and any other visual, tactile or
olfactory sensed feature that initially made the clothing item
appealling to the consumer.
[0561] The method comprises the step of providing a wrinkle control
composition that is capable of controlling wrinkles in fabrics
without the application of heat and without subjecting the clothing
to a laundering process that would otherwise tend to cause an
incremental measure of damage to the fabric fibers during
laundering. The compositions for use in such a method will contain
water and optionally, but preferably, a perfume and/or ordor
control agent amongst other optional materials. A more detailed
description of the compositions that are useful in the methods of
the present invention have been provided above.
[0562] In addition, the method comprises the step of providing
information to the consumer conserning the use of the composition,
preferably, the use of the composition to enable the rewear of
previously worn clothing items as a means for extending the useful
life of such items. A detailed description of the information that
is to be provided and the manner in which that information can be
disseminated are also provided herein.
[0563] Within the context of laundry processes, the wrinkle control
composition has many uses. Wrinkle control compositions can be used
within the home dryer (or a commercial dryer in a Laundromat),
together with the iron as an ironing aid, within a fabric care
chamber, and together with a steamer and other miscellaneous fabric
care devices.
[0564] iii) Use of Composition with Typical Domestic Cleaning and
Fabric Care Processes
[0565] For the purposes of this section concerning typical domestic
laundry processes, there is no distinction between processes
performed in the consumers' domicile and processes performed by the
consumer at commercial facilities, such as a laundromat.
[0566] Methods for Use with the Dryer
[0567] These compositions can be applied to fabrics in a clothes
dryer by many means. For instance, the wrinkle controlling
composition can be sprayed onto fabrics or garments prior to adding
them to the dryer, sprayed on fabrics or garments while the fabrics
or garments are in the dryer, poured directly on the batch of
garments and fabrics, or poured onto one of the fabrics or garments
that is added to the dryer. The wrinkle controlling composition can
also be sprayed onto the fabrics in the dryer by a device that is
part of the dryer or attached to it. Although there are a variety
of acceptable approaches to achieve introduction of the said
composition into the dryer, even distribution of the wrinkle
control composition is critical to achieving the best performance
and so the approaches that achieve the most uniform distribution
are preferred.
[0568] Processes and implements that aid in good distribution in
the dryer are preferred. One method for use within the dryer is to
spray product composition evenly over a fabric or bundle of
fabrics, place these items in a dryer, set the dryer at an
appropriate setting as recommend by the manufacturers of the
fabrics and when the fabrics are dried immediately remove them and
manipulate the fabric into the desired conformation either as it is
hanging or as it is laying on a surface. Allow the fabric to remain
in this conformation for at least about 10 minutes. Other process
for treating fabrics with wrinkle control composition while in the
dryer including applying composition as an aerosol while in the
dryer and/or using various implements to distribute the wrinkle
control composition during tumbling. Implements may include, but
are not limited to a variety of substrates.
[0569] To provide enable good distribution when composition is
applied within the dryer, it is preferred, to use smaller bundle
sizes with typical sizes below about 15 lbs (about 6.8 kg),
preferably below about 10 lbs (about 4.5 kg), more preferably below
about 8 lbs.(about 3.6 kg), even more preferably below about 6 lbs.
(about 2.7 kg) and most preferably at or below about 4 lbs. (about
1.8 kg) It is also desirable to arrange the bundle composition such
that fabrics in the bundle have similar weights or densities to
promote even distribution. When a substrate is used it is also
desirable for each substrate plus wrinkle controlling composition
to have a weight or density similar to the fabrics in the bundle to
facilitate even distribution. Therefore, in cases where larger
bundles are treated, it is preferable to use a larger substrate or
multiple substrates. However, where a larger substrate has a
significantly different weight and/or density relative the fabric
items to be treated, it is preferred to have multiple smaller
substrates so that the weight and/or density of each substrate is
more similar to that of the clothes, thereby facilitating the
distribution of the wrinkle control composition.
[0570] When treating fabrics in the clothes dryer the amount of
wrinkle controlling composition used is dependent on the size of
the load of fabrics. For a 4 lbs. bundle of fabrics, wrinkle
controlling compositions should be used typically at lower levels
of least about 10 g, preferably at least about 20 g, even more
preferably at least about 30 g, still more preferably at least
about 50 g, and most preferably about 66 g, and at an upper level
of equal to or less than about 3000 g, preferably equal to or less
than about 1500 g, more preferably equal to or less than about 750
g, still more preferably equal to or less than about 500 g and most
preferably equal to or less than about 100 g. When the bundle size
is greater than about 4 lbs., higher amounts of wrinkle controlling
composition are appropriate and when the bundle size is smaller
than about 4 lbs. (about 1.8 kg) lower amounts of wrinkle
controlling composition are appropriate. When the wrinkle
controlling composition is provided together with a substrate as an
article of manufacture, more than one article can be used where a
greater amount of wrinkle control composition is needed.
[0571] Total drying time is typically set at a lower limit of at
least about 1 minute, preferably about 2 minutes, more preferably
about 3 minutes, even more preferably about 5 minutes and most
preferably about 7 minutes and with an upper limit set at about 60
minutes, preferably 45 minutes, more preferably 30 minutes even
more preferably about 20 minutes and still more preferably about 15
minutes and most preferably about 10 minutes. Preferably fabrics
are still at least slightly damp when removed from the dryer.
[0572] Garments and fabrics should be removed as soon as possible,
preferably immediately, following the drying cycle and arranged to
maintain the smooth appearance of the fabrics with for instance,
but not limited to, arranging sleeves, collars, pant legs so these
are smooth and not twisted in any way, hanging the fabric on a
hanger, laying the fabric flat or putting it to its intended use to
maintain its appearance e.g. hanging curtains, putting bed linens
on a bed, placing table linens on a table. Preferably the fabric
will not be folded and stored until it is completely dry.
[0573] Methods for Use with the Iron
[0574] Methods for use with the iron are disclosed herein
above.
[0575] Methods for Use with Fabric Treatment Chambers
[0576] In another aspect of the present invention, the composition
can be sprayed onto fabrics in an in-home de-wrinkling chamber
containing the fabric to be de-wrinkled and/or optionally
deodorized, thereby providing ease of operation. Conventional
personal as well as industrial deodorizing and/or de-wrinkling
apparatuses are suitable for use herein. Traditionally, these
apparatuses act by a steaming process which effects a relaxation of
the fibers. Examples of home dewrinkling chambers include shower
stalls. The spraying of the composition or compounds onto the
fabrics can then occur within the chamber of the apparatus or
before placing the fabrics into the chamber. The spraying means
should preferably be capable of providing droplets with a weight
average diameter of from about 8 to about 100 .mu.m, preferably
from about 10 to about 50 .mu.m. When treatment occurs within a
chamber preferably, the loading of moisture on fabrics made of
natural and synthetic fibers is from about 5 to about 25%, more
preferably from about 5 to about 10% by weight of the dried fabric.
Other conventional steps that can be carried out in the dewrinkling
apparatus can be applied such as heating and drying. Preferably,
for optimum dewrinkling benefit, the temperature profile inside the
chamber ranges from about 40.degree. C. to about 80.degree. C.,
more preferably from about 50.degree. C. to about 70.degree. C. The
preferred length of the drying cycle is from about 15 to about 60
minutes, more preferably from about 20 to about 45 minutes.
[0577] The steaming step in the dewrinkling apparatus can also be
eliminated while obtaining the benefits, if the composition is
maintained within a temperature range from about 22.degree. C.
(about 72.degree. F.) to about 76.degree. C. (about 170.degree. F.)
before spraying.
[0578] Methods for Use Together with Miscellaneous Apparatus for
Treating Fabrics
[0579] Rollers, gloves, mitts, mats, steamers, swivel head hangers,
showers, and shower heads are nonlimiting examples of implements
that are useful in combination with said compositions to apply
compositions, to improve the physical manipulation of the treated
fabrics, thereby improving the performance and/or improve the
overall usage experience.
[0580] Rollers, gloves and mitts can all be used to apply product,
either by incorporating product into these implements or by
applying product to the implement and then applying it to the
fabrics. Rollers, gloves, and mitts, can also be used for smoothing
actions, to improve de-wrinkling performance and experience.
Consumers who do not want to contact the compositions with their
hands will also have protection using these devices. Some consumers
will also apply more pressure when using an implement and thereby,
get a better outcome.
[0581] Said composition can be incorporated into a steamer and then
applied to fabrics using typical settings on these devices to
generate steam.
[0582] Showers and shower heads can be used to apply the
composition to fabrics, conveniently in the bathroom where the
bathtub or shower stall can capture over spray. Composition can be
loaded into a removable shower head or into a removable implement
that attaches to the shower head so that it is applied to fabrics
when the shower is turned on. Similar devices could be constructed
to attach to other plumbing outlets, e.g. faucets in the bath,
sink, garden.
[0583] When using hangers to suspend fabric during treatment, it is
preferable to hang the garments to be treated with the wrinkle
removal compositions using a swivel clothes hanger. The swivel
clothes hanger has a frame that can be rotated around the stem of
the hook. A garment hung on said swivel hanger can be oriented in
many directions. This facilitates an even and thorough treatment of
the garment with the wrinkle composition when using the spray to
treat the garments. Additionally, the swivel hanger facilitates
inspection and manipulation of the garment and so is generally
useful when used together with wrinkle controlling
compositions.
[0584] 5. Non-Wrinkle Control Benefits
[0585] Some aspects of the methods of the present invention may
optionally offer benefits in addition to wrinkle control including
softness, silkiness, increased body (often referred to also as
crispness or structure), static control, color care, color loss
prevention, sheen, color maintenance, odor control, malodor
reduction, antimicrobial protection, antibacterial protection,
insect repellence, water repellence, improve water transport,
improved fabric breathability, fiber integrity, fabric integrity,
fiber strengthening, fabric strengthening, maintaining the original
and or natural texture of feel of the garment anti-shrinkage, shape
retention, etc. Consumers need to be instructed as to the presence
of these benefits and the procedures for obtaining them so that
they may be appreciated by the consumer and contribute to
consumer's satisfaction with the product. Therefore, it is
important to instruct the consumer about the presence of optional
additional benefits and to provide instruction concerning the use
of the composition to achieve these added benefits.
[0586] In addition, there are a number of benefits that may be
derived from the use of a wrinkle control composition that aids the
consumer in removing and controlling wrinkles in their fabrics
without the application of heat to cure or otherwise activate the
wrinkle controlling effect. These benefits include but are not
limited to reducing the cost and care requirements for maintaining
the consumer's clothing items, enabling persons less skilled or
less capable to perform an effective de-wrinkling procedure on
their fabrics and to prolong the usable life of a consumer's
fabrics by enabling the consumer to rewear clothing items without
laundering the items.
[0587] Specifically, a nonobvious benefit of the use of a wrinkle
control composition is the fact that such composition allows the
consumer the freedom to purchase a wider selection of garments and
fabrics, namely, garments and fabrics that are desirable but which
the consumer previously avoided due to their care requirements or
their tendency to wrinkle. The use of a wrinkle control composition
reduces the care requirements of many garments from impractical,
time consuming, and expensive to that of a simple, inexpensive
practical task.
[0588] Another unobvious benefit of a wrinkle control composition
is that many members of the household can use the composition
successfully and without concern for the safety of the person using
the composition or the clothes being treated. Consumers who cannot
or who have difficulty in performing typical domestic laundering
processes such as ironing, will be able to effectively use the
compositions described herein. These persons include but are not
limited to, children, youth, the physically or mentally challenged
or handicapped, the elderly, college students and those less
skilled or competent in typical laundry processes who may be of
either gender, but more typically are men, especially husbands.
Such consumers may use commercial laundry processes as an
alternative to typical domestic laundry processes, but this is
costly and time consuming and for some unavailable due to the
difficulties involved in transporting fabrics, lack of funds, etc.
For these consumers, a wrinkle controlling compositions provide a
much more simple, accessible, and safe alternative to typical
laundry processes for improving the appearance of their
clothing.
[0589] As has also benn described herein, a most unobvious benefit
from the use of the a wrinkle control composition is the capability
to extend the useful life of garments and other fabrics items that
need frequent launderings, by practicing the rewear habit so as to
reduce the frequency at which the item would otherwise require
laundering and the fiber damage that would have accompanied that
periodic laundering.
[0590] 6. Identify Potential Users of the Composition
[0591] Many fabric care products are traditionally used by only a
select few members of the household. These select members will be
referred to herein as the `laundry experts`. It is often perceived
that the wash process is too difficult, complex, and at times, for
some household members, a safety hazard (e.g. reaching into the
washing machine and/or ironing can be difficult, impossible and/or
hazardous for some). It is believed that a certain degree of
maturity, skill and/or willingness to put labor against the task is
necessary to complete the traditional wash process which may
include washing clothes, drying clothes, and ironing clothes
successfully (e.g. achieving the right finished look without
damaging clothes). Often it develops that one person, traditionally
the female-head-of-household, becomes the household `laundry
expert` and if the task is delegated to others, the safety of the
fabrics, at least, will be at risk. This is because so many things
can go wrong in domestic laundry processes which can be complex,
comprising many steps and many items to be treated with a variety
of laundry products. For instance, if the water is too hot, the
fabrics will shrink. If light colored fabrics are laundered with
dark colored fabrics, it is likely that colors may bleed and ruin
the coloring of the lighter colored fabrics. Indeed the role of
`laundry expert` can be so onerous that it will also develop that
there are households where there is no `laundry expert` because all
avoid the task either through fear of ruining fabrics or because
time, energy and/or interest, are not available to perform the
onerous task. In these cases, many times, money replaces energy to
complete the laundry processes by employing others to do this
work.
[0592] It is advantageous to the `laundry expert`, to households
with no laundry expert, and to consumers with limited access to
laundry processes, including but not limited to commercial and
institutional organizations, to learn that a wrinkle control
compositon can be used competently and effectively by nearly all
members of the household, including, but not limited to children,
youth, the physically challenged, the handicapped, students, the
elderly, those with busy or physically active lifestyles. It is
important to teach the consumer that a wrinkle care composition can
provide a simple and easy means for all to use and to achieve a
good finished endpoint without damaging the fabrics or creating
safety issues for the user. It is further advantageous to those who
are not `laundry experts` to discover that there is a simple way
for them to refresh lightly worn clothes and give newly washed
fabrics a better finished appearance.
[0593] The `laundry expert` is not always available to employ
laundry processes that give the clothes the desired finishing
touches and the simplicity and ease of the wrinkle control
composition allows others to competently and safely finish their
clothes for wear without having to depend on the laundry expert.
Alternately, it is not necessary to pay for fabrics to be laundered
that have lost a finished appearance, but are not fundamentally
unclean. Instead such fabrics can be refinished and refreshed
quickly, easily, safely, and inexpensively using these types of
compositions. The wrinkle control composition imparts a sense of
freedom and control to all members of the household to improve
their appearance without undo labor or concern for safety of
fabrics or individuals. Use of these types of compositions also
gives the `laundry experts` more freedom and control over their own
time by allowing them to delegate the finishing task to other
members of the household. By teaching both the `laundry experts`
and the `non-laundry experts` this advantage, the acceptance and
use of the wrinkle care product improves the performance of the
composition and increases the success of the market as measured by
repurchase and share size increases also.
[0594] 7. Combinations
[0595] It is preferably to teach the consumer a combination of the
educational elements and most preferable to teach all educational
elements disclosed herein. It is also preferably to teach other
useful educational elements and tips to consumers as these become
revealed in combination with nonlimiting educational elements
disclosed herein.
[0596] B. Disseminating Information--Educational Elements
[0597] The methods of the present invention also require providing
information to the consumer concerning the use of a wrinkle control
composition that provides a wrinkle controlling effect without the
application of heat to cure or otherwise activate the winkle
controlling effect. This information may be provided in the form of
instructions provided in association with the product, as described
above, product demonstrations, consumer testimonials and other
educational elements that are specifically tailored for a specific
consumer group, sensory media presentations and various
combinations thereof. The dissemination of the information by any
of these means should be simple and easy to grasp. The
dissemination of the educational elements in this manner will
typically engage the consumer for at least about 5 seconds,
preferably about 30 seconds, more preferably at least about 1
minute, even more preferably at least about 2 minutes.
[0598] A highly preferred method for disseminating educational
elements is to combine a preferably live product demonstration
together with a sensory presentation, namely a video presentation.
The objective of using a combination of dissemination techniques is
to provide the consumer with a convincing and exciting experience
that will further act to heighten the consumer's awareness of and
value in the use of wrinkle controlling compositions.
[0599] 1. Product Demonstrations
[0600] A highly preferred method for disseminating the educational
elements, is a live face-to-face demonstration of product
performance for the consumer. When consumers are exposed to such a
live demonstration, they learn how improve the performance of the
composition when they use it themselves. Preferably, they will also
learn that the wrinkle control performance is authentic and genuine
without the application of heat or the use of processes that
require heat to cure or otherwise activate the wrinkle controlling
effect.
[0601] The primary intention of product demonstrations is to
overcome consumer skepticism by employing the two highly preferred
educational elements to convince the consumer that wrinkle control
product performance is authentic and to instruct the consumer in
successful methods of using the product to achieweve that
performance. Typically, the demonstration is at least about 5
seconds, preferably it is at least about 10 seconds, more
preferably it is at least about 15 seconds, more preferably it is
at least about 30 seconds, even more preferably it is at least
about 2 minutes, still more preferably it is at least about 5
minutes, and most preferably it is at least about 10 minutes. Since
it is desirable to provide consumers with as much educational
information as possible, when the demonstration format provides the
opportunity, it is acceptable, for some aspects of the present
invention, e.g. product parties, sales calls, multi-level marketing
meetings, to provide a demostration that is about 30 minutes in
length or preferably up to 60 minutes in length. Such a length will
enable a demonstrator the time to demonstrate the use of a wrinkle
controlling composition on various types of fabrics and to present
a variety of situational uses.
[0602] It is most preferable for live demonstrations to incorporate
fabrics, e.g. clothes or household fabrics (curtains, table
clothes, napkins), that are relevant to the consumer and are used
in their daily lives. Preferably, the wrinkle control product is
demonstrated on these relevant fabrics. Because it is costly to
provide real garments for each demonstration, it is anticipated
that swatches, or sections or pieces of fabrics may be used to
represent these relevant fabrics during the demonstration of a
wrinkle control product. When swatches are used in the wrinkle
control demonstration, it is highly preferred that the demonstrator
have on hand a pair of the relevant fabrics that are being
represented by the swatch, one of which represents the fabric
article before treatment and one which represents the garment after
treatment. The fabrics articles showing thewrinkle condition before
and after treatment helps to set the context for the consumer and
provides them with a realistic example of the finished article.
[0603] Product demonstrations can be done `live` which for the
purposes of the present invention will mean that the
demonstratation is performed in the presence of the consumer. Live
demonstrations have the advantage of providing the consumer with
the opportunity to interact and ask questions that can clarify and
remove issues and doubts that might be barriers to purchase and
use. Live demonstrations also have the advantage of allowing the
demonstrator to learn about the consumers' lifestyles and thereby
tailor the demonstration and educational elements to the needs of
the consumers.
[0604] Live product demonstrations tend to be more convincing than
pre-recorded demonstrations. Many consumers are skeptical that a
composition can be used to control wrinkles in a product without
the application of heat to fabric treated with the composition.
Consumers are more apt to accept that the wrinkle controlling
effect is authentic after they view a live demonstration of the
product's performance. However, live demonstrations for every
potential customer would be cost prohibitive and extremely time
consuming. Therefore, many other effective means of disseminating
educational elements are also presented below.
[0605] A preferred way to disseminate educational elements is to
encourage consumers who have become convinced of the product's
performance and understand how to use the method successfully, to
further disseminate this information to their family, friends, and
acquaintances through their own demonstrations of the product. The
value of the trust factor in such personal connections can not be
underestimated as it contributes to providing a convincing product
performance demonstration that will increase the value of the
product in the minds of other consumers.
[0606] Many other effective means of disseminating educational
elements are disclosed below, including but not limited to, a
variety of `non` live demonstrations including virtual
demonstrations, demonstrations on a variety of electronic media and
demonstrations for surrogates e.g. a person that the consumer will
identify with when the demonstrator give the surrogate the
demonstration. Surrogate demonstrations have the advantage that
these can be given to a large group of consumers at once via mass
media and less garments are needed therefore, surrogate
demonstrations can be extremely cost effective.
[0607] a) Live Demonstrations Incorporating Direct Contact with the
Consumers
[0608] For the purposes herein a `live` demonstration is one in
which the demonstrator is demonstrating the product in the presence
of the consumer.
[0609] Live demonstrations are a highly preferred method for
disseminating educational elements as they tend to be more
convincing and exciting for the consumer. A `live` demonstration
for consumers is a preferred way to present the product proposition
because such a demonstration can engage the sight, hearing, touch,
and smell senses of the consumer. These demonstrations are also
highly interactive with the consumer able to ask questions and get
focused answers and feedback on how to use product. It is a very
effective way to interactively instruct consumers in successful
methods of using the product and to optionally to confirm that the
consumer understands the method of successful use.
[0610] Another surprising benefit of live demonstrations is that
such demonstrations often encourage the consumers who see it to
diffuse the educational elements voluntarily to family, friends,
and acquaintances in a way that encourages trust and belief in
product performance. Methods that incorporate the dissemination of
information to family, friends, and acquaintances are preferred,
because such demonstrations ideally incorporate an element of trust
that acts to increase the likelihood that the demonstration of
product performance will be convincing. Such voluntary diffusion by
consumers is not only effective in convincing other consumers of
product performance, but it is also highly cost effective.
[0611] Methods below that also incorporate opportunities to combine
a video presentation with a live demonstration are also preferred,
but not essential, as this approach is very effective in convincing
the consumer of the authenticity of product performance and in
instructing the consumer in successful methods of using the
product.
[0612] Various nonlimiting methods and venues for presenting the
live demonstration are disclosed below.
i) Demonstrations at the Point-of-Sale
[0613] Point-of-Sale demonstrations are demonstrations made near
where wrinkle control compositions are sold. For instance, a
nonlimiting list where demonstrations can be made includes
airports, bus or train stations, malls, motels, hotels, on mass
transportation, spas, gyms, fitness centers, restaurants, clothing
retailers, or college campuses, where several retailers nearby sell
the wrinkle control composition is acceptable for the purposes of
the present invention. This includes virtual demonstrations when
the point-of-sale is a virtual shopping destination on a computer
network. Such a demonstration can occur for a single consumer or a
group of consumers. The point where the compostion is sold is
preferably, but not limited to, the place at which the
demonstration will take place. Essentially, the demonstration
should instuct the consumer how to remove wrinkles on an actual
garment and/or household fabric. Point-of-sale demonstration can
include demonstrations carried out by retailers or sellers of
wrinkle control compositions as well as by the manufacturers of
wrinkle compositions. Such demonstrations can also include video
presentations.
ii) Demonstrations at Product Parties
[0614] Product parties, e.g. Tupperware.TM. Parties,
Rubbermaid.RTM. Parties, are a cost effective and efficient way to
disseminate educational elements via live demonstrations. Typically
several people will attend such a product party at the home of a
friend or acquaintance, therefore, several people are available for
a demonstration of the composition. Not to be bound by theory, but
the relaxed atmosphere of viewing the demonstration in the company
of friends and acquaintances enhances the educational experience
and the absorption of knowledge. The atmosphere of trust embodied
in having a family member, friend, or acquaintance sponsor the
demonstration also acts to increase the likelihood that the
demonstration of composition performance will be convincing. Such a
relaxed atmosphere encourages the asking of questions and
discussion that can enhance the consumers ability to be instructed
in successful methods of using the composition. This relaxed
atmosphere also encourages consumers to trade ideas about how to
use the composition, as well. Small group demonstrations and
discussions lend themselves well to spreading information and
encouraging excitement about the said composition and article of
manufacture. This methodology is also useful because the product
demonstrations can be lengthy, in-depth, include video
presentations and tailored to the needs of the individual
consumers.
iii) Demonstrations via Level Marketing Organizations
[0615] Multi-level marketing or organizations which are based on
building a network of distributors, such as AmWay.RTM., is an
acceptable and useful way to disseminate information concerning the
use of wrinkle control compositions. Such organizations are
advantageous for disseminating information because a broad group of
distributors and sales people attend product shows and become
educated first hand on product performance and use. Such product
shows are a useful place to provide product demonstrations and
disseminate information in association with said compositions of
the present invention. Once distributors and sales people are
trained to demonstrate the wrinkle control compositions and are
acquainted with the information to be provided in association with
said composition and articles of the present invention, this group
of people can train their own distributors and sales force by doing
product demonstrations and disseminating information. In
organizations depending on methods and devices such as level
multi-level marketing and distributor networks, many of the
networks are built through personal friends, neighbors and
acquaintances which brings a level of trust that aids in
instructing consumers on how to achieve improved performance and in
convincing the consumers that product performance is authentic.
This method of disseminating educational elements effectively
combines the benefit of a trained group of demonstrators with trust
inherent in personal relationships to provide convincing
demonstrations of product performance. This methodology is also
valuable because product demonstration can be lengthy, in-depth,
include video presentations, and tailored to the needs of the
individual consumers.
iv) Door-to-Door Sales
[0616] Door-to-Door sales as done by corporations like Avon Inc.
are a good way to prvoide information directly to the consumer.
During the sales call, the sales representative has a unique
opportunity to discuss the composition and how to improve the
performance of wrinkle control compositions, and to incorporate the
use of such compositions into their daily routine. During the time
afforded by the sales call, the sales representative will have an
opportunity to provide preferred combinations of presentations e.g.
live demos combined with video presentations and other types of
presentations. Door-to-door sales can be highly effective in
instructing the consumer in successful methods of using the
compositon and also in tailoring educational elements to the
consumers' daily habits and lifestyle needs since the consumer and
the sales representative have time together to discuss the
consumer's lifestyle. The consumer will have opportunities to ask
questions to help with their understanding of the performance of
the said composition as well as methods of use. Also,
advantageously, the consumer can present real-life examples for
on-the-spot, relevant demonstrations which should prove even more
convincing than demonstrations on fabrics the sales representative
might choose. While door-to-door sales is typically not an
efficient method of broadly disseminating information, it is a
highly effective method of communication due to the opportunity to
spend an effective amount of time with the consumer.
v) Demonstrations at Special Events
[0617] Special events (e.g. concerts, festival, fairs, fashion
shows, product shows, political events, sports events, graduations,
book tours, poetry readings, art shows, movie, theater and
restaurant openings) are acceptable venues for dissemination of
information to the consumer. Such special events have the advantage
of providing the flexibility to reach a large group of people while
simultaneously interacting with smaller or one-on-one selections of
consumers from the larger group. Special events also provide
opportunities for promotional activities and demonstrations to
surrogates as describe below.
vi) Demonstrations for Club Groups and Associations
[0618] National and regional club groups and associations e.g.
groups that bring persons together who serve special interests or
hobbies are acceptable venues for disseminating information.
Presentations at club groups meet the need of giving effective
demonstrations to small and large groups of people and can also
provide a venue for consumers to ask specific questions to help the
presentation and demonstration to their specific habits and
lifestyles.
[0619] Some nonlimiting examples of club groups include groups
based on shared work interests e.g. Association of American
Business Clubs (ABUCS), American, American Medical Association,
National Federation of Young Farmer; political groups e.g. College
Democrats of America, The College Republicans; student groups, e.g.
fraternities, sororities; clubs based on ethnic, gender, or
demographic similarities, e.g. Egyptian Student Association,
National Association for the Advancement of Colored People (NAACP),
American Association of Retired People (AARP), National
Organization of Women (NOW), Ireland-Japan Friendly Club; and hoby
groups e.g. National University of Singapore Taekwondo, United
States Chess Federation, American Bonsai Society, United Kingdom
Radio Society, Foreign Correspondents Club of Japan, Russian
Motorcycle and Sidecar Owners Association of Australia, and Moscow
City Golf Club.
vii) Encouraging Friend-to-Friend Demonstrations of Product
Performance and Dissemination of Educational Elements
[0620] Encouraging friends to disseminate information to the
consumer concerning wrinkle control compositions via convincing
live demonstrations instructions in successful use of the product
as well as other optional educational elements and/or via various
other methods of presentation are effective, efficient, and
affordable. Encouraging friends to do live demonstrations for
friends and neighbors and disseminate information is also
especially effective because there is an element of trust in the
relationship that contributes to effective communication of the
benefits and educational elements. The act of encouraging friends
to demonstrate to friends and neighbors can be accomplished in a
variety of ways including, but not limited to offering tangible
rewards (e.g. monetary remuneration, promotional offers, gifts,
products, or coupons) as well as non-tangible rewards (e.g.
providing recognition or opportunities to increase prestige).
People who are known to embrace new product offerings and desire to
disseminate this information to their friends (a group often know
as `early adopters`) can be given convincing live demonstrations
and instructed in successful methods of use which essentially
accomplishes the dual tasks of raising product value in the mind of
the that particular consumer and also teaching that particular
consumer how to appropriately disseminated information concerning
wrinkle control compositions to others.
[0621] Consumers who will demonstrate for others can also be given
presentations of educational elements on various media (e.g. video
tape, compact disk) and also coached on benefits of the
compositions in addition to wrinkle control (e.g. fresh odor,
rewear opportunitites) to ensure that they give effective
demonstrations and presentations. These presentational and
demonstrations preferably comprise convincing other consumers of
product performance, instructing other consumers in successful
methods of use, as well as other educational elements and
combinations of educational elements and in providing presentations
that preferably appeal to the multiple senses and combine various
presentation approaches. For some consumers the prestige associated
with being the first to use a product and be the knowledgeable
person who teaches friends about the product is enough incentive to
encourage them to teach friends about the product. Such a segment
of consumers is often call `the early adopters`. To facilitate the
process by which `early adopters` will teach friends and neighbors
to use the product and to fuel the incentive of `early adopters` to
do so, it is useful to identify a group of people fitting the
`early adopter` profile and to provide them with product samples
and educational materials, before these become widely available so
that they perceive themselves to have unique and exclusive
knowledge that they will be anxious to share with their friends and
neighbors.
[0622] b) Demonstrations for Surrogates
[0623] For the purposes of this invention, a surrogate will take
the place of the consumer and will be an individual that the
consumer identifies with. There will be many instances in which the
demonstration of the wrinkle control composition will be given to
the surrogate in the place of the consumer. Preferably the
surrogate will demonstrate a sense of excitement, amazement, and
desire for the composition as well a other positive emotions linked
with the product. The surrogate could either be or represent a real
consumer or the surrogate can be well-known celebrity or a person
that is trusted by a wide group of consumers. Optionally,
surrogates can be chosen to capture the interest of specific
segments of the consumer population, particularly the
non-traditional segments and this optional approach has the
advantage of fitting in well with a program aimed at tailoring the
dissemination of information to the consumer or a specific group of
consumers. Some typical but nonlimiting surrogates demonstrations
might include a presentation on a talk show to a host, such as Jay
Leno or Oprah Winfrey or a presentation at a show or concert to a
popular performer or performance group such as N-Sync. Another
approach to surrogate demonstrations is to have a famous
personality trained to provide demonstrations either for other
famous personages or for consumers and/or surrogate consumers or
representations of consumers.
i) Personality and Talk Shows
[0624] Personality and talk shows typically incorporate one or
multiple host(s) and/or hostess(es) that interview people. These
typically reach large audiences and are an efficient route to
disseminating information broadly in a cost effective manner. Talk
show hosts and/or hostesses often become well-known and respected
celebrities in their own right and therefore, become highly
preferred choices to provide a surrogate experience for the
consumer in the viewing audience. Persons that the host and/or
hostess are interviewing can often make suitable surrogates as well
and are often suitable for including in the surrogate demonstration
experience for the audience. Some nonlimiting examples of currently
relevant, highly recognizable, and respected host(s) and or
hostess(es) include, Oprah Winfrey, of the Oprah Winfrey Show, Jay
Leno of the Tonight Show, Martha Stewart on Martha Stewart Living
Emeril Lagasse of Emeril and Emeril Live, Mary Hart, Bob Boen, etc.
of Entertainment Tonight. While the visual experience is
preferably, audio experiences, e.g. radio, compact disk, etc. are
also acceptable for the present invention as a method of
disseminating information effectively and efficiently.
ii) Performance-Based Shows
[0625] Suitable surrogates, in the form of current, relevant,
well-known, and respected celebrities are often part of a special
events. Some nonlimiting examples of special events include
concerts, book tours, poetry readings, sports events, fashion
shows, etc. Such events provide useful forums for surrogate
demonstrations that are efficient and cost effective way since
these forums reach a multitude of consumers simultaneously. Such
events can be live, in the sense that consumers are present at the
events in person and/or the events can broadcast via a multitude of
mass media and/or prerecorded via a variety of recording
media--records, tapes, radio, compact disks, video tapes,
movies.
iii) Advice and Self-Improvement Presentations
[0626] Advice-Based presentations include presentations giving the
consumer lifestyle advice, advice on how to improve their quality
of life, etc. Some currently relevant, non-limiting examples of
such presentations would include Martha Stewart's Martha Stewart
Living, Fashion Emergency, Homes with Style, and Shabby Chic all on
E!, Richard Simmons exercise videos, Body Shaping, Fitness Beach,
and CoEd Training all on FitTV the Fitness Network, Alive! with
Joyce Resin, Power House presented by Alliant Energy, and BBC Home
and Garden. Such presentations can be provided via a variety of
media, presentations before live audiences, and virtual websites
being the most typical but nonlimiting.
iv) Game Shows
[0627] Game shows are also an acceptable venue for giving
demonstrations and disseminating information to consumers via
surrogates. Game show hosts are often well known and trusted by
consumers. Additionally, game shows have the advantage of providing
an opportunity for raising the wrinkle control composition
awareness by showcasing new and innovative products both by
sponsoring the program as well as offering wrinkle control
compositions as game show prizes. The Price is Right, Wheel of
Fortune, Who Wants to be a Millionaire, Win Ben Stein's Money, Rock
and Roll Jepordy on MTV, Cooking for Love with Thea Andrews on WTN,
Toronto Canada, Ready Set Cook! with Sissy Biggers on the Food
Network, Hollwood Squares, Double Dare 2000 on Nickelodeon Network,
are all nonlimiting examples of currently relevant game shows.
[0628] c) Combinations of Demonstrations
[0629] Combinations of demonstrations are most effective for
rapidly diffusing the information to the broadest group of
consumers and also targeting specific segments of consumers. A
highly preferred combination includes a live demonstration together
with a video presentation that is at least about 30 seconds long,
but preferably greater than 30 seconds long and comprising
information to convince the consumer of authentic product
performance and/or instructing the consumer in successful methods
of using the product. Combining demonstrations also achieves the
purposes of increasing consumer awareness of the wrinkle care
products in many segments including the non-traditional segments
and also reinforces the educational knowledge in the consumers'
minds.
[0630] 2. Consumer Testimonials and Tailoring Educational Elements
To Specific Consumer Groups
[0631] Consumers, especially non-traditional consumers, place
higher value on products that are endorsed by other consumers, even
when these consumers are strangers to them. Any consumer is seen as
an advocate for all consumers and therefore can surprisingly
increase the value of a product by offering their endorsement or
testimonial. This is especially impactful for non-traditional
consumer of fabric care products, because these consumers
surprisingly have difficulty imagining themselves successfully
using a fabric care product. When a role model with a similar
background and lifestyle is presented endorsing the product and
preferably also disseminating information concering the
authenticity of product performance or instructions for using the
product successfully, the consumers are much more likely to value
the product.
[0632] For some aspects of the present invention, it is preferable
to tailor the dissemination of information so that it is directed
to certain segments of the population. Tailoring dissemination of
information surprisingly helps consumers to understand and accept
how a product fits into their daily habits and lifestyle and thus
increases purchase and repurchase rates. Some nonlimiting examples
of tailoring educational elements include, for instance, apartment
dwellers and consumers who live in small domiciles benefit from
education teaching them how to use the product when only small
areas of space are available for line drying, hanging, spreading,
and storing clothes. Consumers who embrace ironing appreciate
education on how to use this product in combination with the iron
to remove wrinkles better than steam irons and also leave fabrics
soft to the touch (in contrast to starch); consumers who are
physically challenged (e.g. people with visual impairments benefit
most from specific audio presentations; college students, busy
adults, and younger people and young adults who don't normally have
time or find the time to place clothes in an arrangement that
prevents wrinkling or don't have easy access to the equipment for
the traditional laundry process benefit from educational elements
teaching them to use the product on clothes that are wrinkled from
improper storage e.g. storing clothes in piles; fabrics kept in the
dryer too long after the drying cycle has finished; fabrics stored
in compressed conditions, comprising trunks, suitcases, clothing
valets, drawers, tight closets, tight armoires, stored without
folding or hanging, fabrics left in a laundry basket; fabrics
laundered with spin cycle set at high, fabrics washed in very hot
water or dried under very hot conditions and combinations
thereof.
[0633] 3. Sensory Media Presentations
[0634] Sensory media presentations include all types of
presentations and advertisements that can be experienced through
the five senses including sight, sound, touch, smell, and taste or
through virtual stimulation of these senses. Surprisingly, the most
appealing demonstrations of the wrinkle control product for
consumers are those that interact with and/or engage as many of the
senses as possible. Presentations including sight, sound, touch,
and smell are preferred for the present invention, but taste is not
specifically excluded as a potentially useful sense to engage. In
addition, sensory media presentations may also provide direct
interaction between a demonstrator or presenter and consumers.
Likewise, sensroy media presentations can be recorded and broadcast
repeatedly and as widely as desired. The sensory presentations used
in the methods of the present invention will preferably be greater
than about 30 sec., more preferably greater than about 60 sec. even
more preferably greater than about 90 sec. and most preferably
greater than about 120 sec. in length.
[0635] Sensory media presentations provide an extremely efficient
and affordable way to disseminate educational elements to the
consumer. Sensory media presentations can also be tailored to
specific consumer groups so that they have greater impact on the
consumer. When sensory media presentations are used, the
presentation is typically at least about 30 seconds, preferably at
least about 45 seconds, more preferably at least about 60 seconds,
even more preferably at least about 90 seconds and most preferably
120 seconds. On the other hand, sensory media presentations can
often be quite costly, especially when broadcast widely, and time
often becomes an economic issue, such that it sometimes necessary
and acceptable, for some aspects of the present invention, to
provide a sensory media presentation that is typically less than
about 30 seconds, but preferably greater than about 5 seconds, more
preferably greater than about 10 seconds and most preferably
greater than about 15 seconds.
[0636] Video presentations, especially in combination with live
demonstrations, provide a highly convincing and exciting experience
for the consumer that dramatically increases the value of wrinkle
controlling compositions and significantly increases their intent
to purchase. There are, however, cost, time, and efficiency
barriers that prevent providing a live demonstration and video
presentations longer than about 30 seconds to every consumer
interested in using the composition. Therefore, alternate methods
for disseminating educational elements that are effective,
affordable, and time efficient are also disclosed as part of the
methods of the present invention. These can include shorter video
presentations of equal to or less than about 30 secs, preferably
less than about 15 seconds, more preferably less than about 10
seconds and most preferably less than about 5 seconds when cost
effectiveness of the video presentation is an issue.
[0637] a) Electronic Media
[0638] Electronic media covers a plurality of means to communicate
including all communication tools that operate via electronic means
and/or electromagnetic radiation. Electronic media is a very
efficient tool for disseminating educational elements to a broad
number of consumers. Electronic media is also extremely useful for
reaching non-traditional consumers to heighten their awareness of
the product.
i) Television
[0639] Television is a preferred electronic medium for
disseminating educational elements due the fact that television
reaches a large number of consumers through a wide variety of
programming, thus reaching many different consumer segments. Also,
since television is a well-established medium, the consumer
segments being reached by different programming are often well
understood making television an ideal medium for targeting specific
and often, non-traditional consumer segments. Television can also
encompass a variety of programming formats including, but not
limited to, entertainment in the form of comedies, drama, also
info-mercials, commercials, talk shows, informational shows,
sports, and all manner of special interest programming (e.g. home
care, cooking, fashion, history, travel). Use of the product as
part of programming not necessarily sponsored or funded by the
product manufacturer (e.g. within the `script` of a entertain
program or presented as part of a talk show) as well as in
commercial advertisements are acceptable methods of disseminating
information to the consumer. Again it is most preferred to
dissseminate information directed at convincing the consumer of
authentic product performance or instructing the consumer of
successful methods for using the product. When television is used,
it is preferred that audio as well as visual content is presented,
but in some aspects of the invention it is acceptable to present
visual or audio elements alone. Infor-mercials are an especially
preferred format for disseminating educational elements associated
with the composition and articles of the present invention, because
info-mercials are typically greater in length than about 30 seconds
and these are efficient at reaching a wide variety of consumers and
also these formats typically include product education.
ii) Computer Links
[0640] Providing computer links via computer-based networks, a
nonlimiting example of which is the global computer network, to
sites (e.g. web pages, web pages) is an efficient, effective, and
cost affordable method for disseminating information to the
consumer. A benefit of using computer links is the extreme breadth
of reaching consumers and the extreme versatility for disseminating
information, including, but not limited to, the ability to give the
consumers access to the information from anywhere a computer link
is available. Consumers are presently able to access such networks
from their homes or via satellite networking from portable devices.
Another benefit of using computer links is the opportunity to
provide multimedia presentations that allow the consumer to
interact effectively and the ability to update and change the
information constantly in order to keep it current, relevant, and
meaningful as products and consumer needs change. Finally, the
ability to probe the consumer database as the consumer interacts
with a presentation or demonstration such that these elements can
be further refined and focused for specific consumer segments, to
capture the attention of specific segments through advertising on
web sites and links of interest to those consumer segments.
[0641] It is preferred to engage as many senses as possible when
disseminating information via the computer link by incorporating
audio-visual elements and animated presentations. Ideally, a
virtual experience is provided that is as near to reality as
possible. In this way, the computer can be used to provide a
demonstration that is as near to a `live` demonstration as a
consumer could get without being in the presence of a presenter.
This virtual demonstration can effectively disseminate information
to convince the consumer of the authentic product performance and
instructing the consumer in successful methods of using the
product. It is preferred that the presentation be interactive to
allow consumer to interactively learn how to the information to be
presented to their own daily habits and lifestyles. Typically,
frequently asked questions (FAQS) and answers to can be available
on the link. It is preferred that presentations of product
effectiveness on computer links be at least animated and for these
animations to be as realistic as possible so as to offer this as a
surrogate demonstration including demonstrations to both
celebrities and typical consumers or even have demonstrations by
consumers.
[0642] It is suitable and preferable to use the site to provide
consumer testimonials particularly when these testimonial contain
information concerning product uses to other consumers. It is
preferably for consumer testimonials to be at least animated, and
even more preferably, for these testimonials to be video taped. It
is preferred that links and addresses directing consumers to links
with educational information be widely available to the public and
published everywhere advertising for the product occurs e.g. on
television, at point-of-sale, on product, on product labeling, on
billboards, etc Websites for other purposes can also contain a link
to the website for the product of the present invention such as the
nonlimiting example of banner advertising which will contain a link
to direct the consumer to the product site.
iii) Video Presentations
[0643] Video presentations include all presentations that can be
stored on devices that capture video images and can re-play the
presentation when desired, including the nonlimiting examples of
compact disks, film, overhead projectors, and video tapes. When an
video presentation is used to disseminate information, this
presentation contains audio as well as visual content. Video
presentations with visual content only, are acceptable for some
aspects of the present invention. Video presentations can be
provided in a number of ways, including a video presentation
together with the product and packaging to disseminate information
in a visual format when a consumer purchases a wrinkle control
composition. Providing video presentations with product is an
effective way to target consumers who intend to use the product.
The video presentation is typically at least about 30 seconds,
preferably at least about 45 seconds, more preferably at least
about 60 seconds, even more preferably at least about 90 seconds,
and most preferably at least about 120 seconds in length. Because,
sensory media presentations can often be quit costly, especially
when broadcast widely, it is preferred to provide a sensory media
presentation that is typically less than about 30 seconds, but
preferably greater than about 5 seconds, more preferably greater
than about 10 seconds and most preferably greater than about 15
seconds.
Video Presentations with Information Appended to Video
Presentations for Other Purposes
[0644] Video presentations for other purposes are produced for a
variety of reasons. A few exampls include the recording of
entertainment, e.g. movies, special events, exercise, video games,
all manner of advice, and educational material, which are then sold
or rented to the public. Such video presentations, provide an
excellent and cost effective way to disseminate information
concerning wrinkle control compositions to a broad number of
consumers and also reaching many who may not yet have tried a
wrinkle control composition such as disclosed herein. The video
presentation of usage information may be appended onto the main
portion of the video presentation in much the same way as a
commercial is appended into televised programming. Preferably,
there will be an incentive to encourage the consumers who rent or
buy the video presentations for other purposes to view the video
presentation of the educational elements appended onto the video
presentation and additionally, it would be preferable, although not
essential, if these was an incentive for the consumer to show the
video presentation of educational elements to family, friends,
neighbors, and acquaintances.
Video Presentations as Part of a Store display
[0645] Video presentations as part of the store display are an
efficient, effective and affordable way to disseminate product
usage information. Such a presentation can be long, incorporate a
variety of product information and a plurality of uses.
Advantageously, it can be left running constantly by as part of a
display. Such a video presentation also accomplishes the purpose of
increasing the `facing` shelf space or shelf presence of the
present invention, thus accomplishing the purpose of increasing the
awareness of the composition in the consumers' mind. Furthermore,
such presentations are effective at targeting consumers with an
interest in the product.
Interactive Video Presentations
[0646] Interactive video presentations are a highly preferred way
to provide a video presentation. In the present invention, an
interactive video presentation is one in which the consumer can
interact with the presentation to accomplish a number of purposes.
Typically, these purposes include giving the consumer some control
over the presentation and allowing the consumer to disclose
information to tailor the presentation or provide advice. A typical
nonlimiting example of an interactive video presentation is the
video touch screen. One typical, but non-limiting element of
control that the consumer has with video touch screens is control
over the flow of information. The consumer can choose which
categories to view and when to view these categories. Interactive
videos provide a means for the consumer to tailor the presentation
to give them focused information that will allow them to best
incorporate the product into their daily habits and lifestyles.
iv) Audio Presentations
[0647] Audio presentations are also useful for disseminating
information and can be affordable and very efficient. Audio
presentations are very affordable and very efficient. Additionally,
audio presentations are useful for providing reinforcing reminders
of the product availability and information to direct consumers to
places of purchase. Audio presentations can be offered in the form
of radio or appended onto compact disks as well as audio tapes and
recordings. Audio presentations are also useful for inclusion in a
container or packaging with a wrinkle control composition to
disseminate information at time of purchase. Including an audio
presentation in a container with the wrinkle control product also
accomplishes the purpose of increasing shelf space and presence of
the composition which increases the consumers' awareness of the
product.
[0648] b) Printed Media
[0649] Print media include all media that are provided in written
form preferably together with a variety of audio-visual material
and presentations, but printed media alone is also useful for
disseminating information in the methods of the present invention.
Print media can be provided by traditional routes e.g., via
hardcopy formats, e.g. paper or other tangible substrates via
electronic medium and/or virtual routes, e.g. via television,
computers, internet, and/or websites. Preferably pictorial
materials are included which will aid in communicating information
expressed in words and graphics such as icons. Print media are
relatively inexpensive and provide the further benefit that they
these can be tailored to focus information to meet the daily habits
and lifestyles of specific consumer segments as well as targeting
specific consumer segments. Preferably, the print materials will be
accompanied by visual and/or pictorial materials that help to
explain product performance and/or instructions for use such as the
nonlimiting example of icons. Print materials can also comprise
short `catch phrases` that identify the product.
i) Periodicals
[0650] Print materials in hardcopy or electronic periodicals (e.g.
newspapers, newsletters, magazines, journals,) whether in the form
of advertisements, articles or any other materials that communicate
information are suitable for disseminating information in the
methods of the present invention. A useful format is one that
provides the longer than traditional advertisements which have the
appearance of an article and are aimed at educating consumers.
Preferably, pictorial content is included to aid in communicating
the ideas and concepts presented in words. A feature of periodicals
that is highly useful for the present invention is that periodicals
are often targeted to communicate to specific segments of the
population and the segment audience is well understood. Thus,
periodicals provide a favorable format for targeting consumers,
especially non-traditional consumers with educational elements
tailored to fit into their specific daily habits and lifestyles.
Some non-limiting examples of harcopy and electronic periodicals
are Vogue, In-Style, Glamour, Teen, People, Home & Garden,
Architectural Digest, Smithsonian, Scientific American, GQ.
ii) Brochures
[0651] Brochures containing educational elements are also a useful
form of print media for use in the present invention. Brochures can
be distributed widely to disseminate the information and are also
relatively inexpensive. Brochures have the further advantage of
flexibility, as these can suitably disseminate information in
virtually any environment that a consumer may frequent, including
at point-of-sale, clothing stores, group meetings, door-to-door
sales, special events, restaurants, hotels and other places of
lodging, bookstores, coffee houses, laundromats, drycleaning
establishments, as well as being distributed to the consumers'
homes, etc. Brochures can also be attached to wrinkle control
product or included in containers comprising wrinkle control
product.
iii) Billboard Presentations
[0652] Billboards provide an acceptable method for disseminating
information to the consumer. Billboards serve the purpose of
reaching a wide variety of consumers efficiently, effectively, and
affordably. Preferably these contain printed, pictorial, and visual
information communicating educational elements. Preferably these
will quickly command the attention of consumers and allow them to
rapidly assimilate all or a portion of the educational elements.
Icons are a nonlimiting example of visual elements that can convey
information quickly.
iv) Store Displays
[0653] Store displays often provide useful formats for
disseminating educational elements in printed form. Preferably,
these displays would also be visually interesting by incorporating
both pictorial, video, and design elements (e.g. architecture,
color, etc. of the display) to heighten the consumers' awareness.
As part of a store display, product information can be printed on
the store shelf, on signage in and around the winkle control
compositions on aisle flags, on floor markers (e.g. mats), and
stand alone displays containing product. Store displays such as
signage and floor markers that direct the consumer to wrinkle
control products are preferred as these also accomplish the purpose
of heightening the consumers' awareness of wrinkle control
products.
v) Information Printed on the Package, the Package Container or in
Contact with the Package
[0654] Package labels, containers or items in contact with the
package, e.g. a nonlimiting example being a neck-hanger type
brochure or a brochure attached to the package, are all suitable
places for the dissemination of educational information. Typically
this information will be available in both printed and some other
type of visual and/or pictorial style, e.g. a nonlimiting example
of visual/pictorial style would be icons. Disseminating educational
information on package labels, containers and/or in contact with
the package all have the advantage of being efficient, effective,
and affordable.
[0655] 4. Combinations Methods to Disseminate Educational
Elements
[0656] Combinations of various demonstrations and presentations are
preferred as being highly effective approaches to providing
information concerning the use of wrinkle control compositions to
the consumer. Particularly preferred are combinations of
demonstrations of the compositions, preferably live together with
video presentations. These types of combinations achieve the effect
of reaching as many consumers as possible since different consumers
and different segments have access and respond to different types
of presentations, demonstrations and stimuli. Using combinations of
demonstrations and presentations also achieves the purpose of
reaching some consumers with product information more than one
time. Different presentations and demonstrations act to reinforce
the teaching of product usage information to the consumer and thus
result in increased understanding of the wrinkle control
compositions and their capabilities and in increased use and
purchase of the wrinkle control products.
C. Methods for Improving Product Awareness
[0657] Wrinkle control compositions have an apparent low value in
the consumer's mind despite the fact that these compositions can
provide good wrinkle control performance without the application of
heat. Further, these compositions have typically been marketed as
niche compositions with specific uses, particularly for travel and
within the context of current laundry processes. Therefore, these
products have been targeted to a narrow group of consumers despite
the fact that wrinkle control compositions have a plethora a uses
that serve everyday needs beyond travel and that fall outside of
and/or are complementary of current laundry processes. It is also
clear that the consumer has failed to realize the fact that the
composition is surprisingly easy for consumers of all ages,
lifestyles and abilities to use competently and safely.
[0658] Another key surprising element is recognizing that this
product can be safely and successfully used by a variety of
consumers that fall outside of the consumer typically targeted for
fabric care products, namely, the female head of household.
Marketing to the non-traditional consumer as well as the
traditional consumer dramatically increases the breath of reach of
the marketing program and consequently, the size of the business.
It is still more surprising to recognize that this product can be
safely used by consumers who might never or no longer be able to
iron safely or easily, such as the elderly, the physically
challenged, and children. Targeting such groups as well as seeking
their support and endorsements opens unique and surprising new
markets to grow the business. Non-traditional fabric care consumers
surprisingly embrace the wrinkle control product since it frees
them from dependence on the wash process and/or waiting for the
person who traditionally carriers out the task. Traditional fabric
care consumers as well as persons who normally do the wash also
embrace these wrinkle control compositions since they allow others
to successfully carry some of the load of caring for fabrics
without worry that clothes will be damaged or injury or property
damage will result as is the risk with ironing.
[0659] Methods that increase consumer awareness comprise at least
one element selected from the following list: 1) increasing
awareness at point-of-sale, 2) increasing awareness electronically,
3) targeting non-traditional consumer markets, 4) targeting
non-traditional distribution channels, 5) rewards programs, 6)
appropriate pricing strategies, and 7) combinations of methods
thereof.
[0660] 1) Increasing Awareness at Point-of-Sale
[0661] Although currently marketed wrinkle control products are
high performing, these products have surprisingly low sales.
Increasing consumer awareness of the products dramatically
increases the value of the product in the consumer's mind. Methods
for increasing awareness at point-of-sale should comprise at least
one of the elements selected from the following list: 1) increasing
product choices and shelf presence, 2) store displays, 3) live
drama, 4) seasonal promotions, and combinations. Although all
methods for increasing awareness are preferred, the most highly
preferred method for increasing awareness is to increase product
choices and shelf presence.
[0662] a) Increasing Product Choices and Shelf Presence
[0663] Since, it is helpful to market the product to a variety of
consumers rather than focus marketing on the traditional
female-head-of-household, it is also helpful to provide variants of
the product to appeal to consumers with differing needs. Extending
product choices, makes it possible to increase space presence and
overall size of the product on shelf and thus increase the
awareness of the product in the consumers mind. Offering variants
also increases the overall value of the category in the consumers
mind, thus increasing the likelihood of repurchase and increasing
the overall profit of the category.
[0664] i) Product Choices
[0665] Since wrinkle control products have multiple uses and appeal
to a multitude of consumers, it is necessary to increase the number
of product choices is to increase the size of the business.
Preferably, more than one variant of the product is available on
shelf. Some examples of variant strategies are presented below.
Surprising, scent contributes significantly to the acceptance of a
product and to the consumer's subliminal understanding of the
product function, therefore getting the perfume correct for the
consumer base and matching the consumer's subliminal understanding
of product function with the right perfume is critical to
success.
[0666] Additionally, the product appeals to a much broader range of
consumers than the traditional consumer for laundry and fabric care
products, and thus, it is necessary to have more than one fragrance
to communicate the product function to the broader range of
consumers.
[0667] Also, it is found that in consumer use the product has more
than one function and even more surprising is the fact that wrinkle
control products are found to have uses that either fall outside of
and/or complement typical domestic laundry processes and dry
cleaning processes. For instance, in addition to removing wrinkles,
it can be used to refresh garments for re-wear e.g. the product can
remove wrinkles and odors from already worn garments. In other
words, lightly worn garments can be reworn without going through
the entire time consuming wash process. While typically the
consumer will prefer a lighter scent to match their subliminal
understanding of the functionality of the product a slightly higher
scent impact is helpful in eliminating odors from previous wear
e.g. smoke, food, and body odors. Also, a higher scent is useful in
matching the consumer's subliminal understanding of the
functionality a of re-wear product.
[0668] Consumers also surprisingly prefer different hand feels on
different fabrics. For instance, when sweaters, knits, dresses and
silks are treated with wrinkle spray, it is preferred that the hand
feel be generally towards softness, silkiness, or similar
descriptors and that the fabric maintain its flow and soft drape;
the wrinkle control product should not only remove wrinkles, but
also maintain and enhance the softness, silkiness, and drape of
such materials. When fabrics are tightly woven cottons, dress
shirts, khaki pants, heavy cotton shirts, or various formal dress
items, it is desirable to have more body in the fabrics and thus
the wrinkle control product should not only remove wrinkles, but
also impart and improve the body of the fabrics without making
these fabric scratchy.
[0669] Other line extensions might include products specific to
delicates, dry cleanables, cottons, synthetics, or winter clothes
and summer clothes.
[0670] Products with packaging variants are useful as well. For
instance, to provide the most user friendly product possible to the
physically challenged, packaging requiring little effort to actuate
the spray may be offered.
[0671] Again in order to appeal to a larger array of consumers with
different needs, it is necessary to offer a variety of sizes as
well as refill packages and club sizes. Additionally, this can be
used to appeal to persons of different economic backgrounds.
[0672] When a number of different product types are offered,
bundling can be used to connect more than one package together to
increase overall size and awareness on shelf. For the purposes of
the present invention at least one of the bundled products must be
a wrinkle control product. The additional product or products can
comprise additional wrinkle control composition or non-wrinkle
control product, including the following, nonlimiting, examples,
odor control spray, laundry detergent, fabric softener, extra
packaging, a refill of wrinkle spray, or additional, packaging
elements, e.g. sprayers, bottle caps. Product bundling acts to
increase the `facing` or shelf space and also shelf presence of the
present invention by increasing the amount of space the composition
can command on the shelf.
[0673] iv) Container Enclosing Wrinkle Spray Product and
Package.
[0674] For the present invention, the container is any enclosure
that covers or partially covers the wrinkle spray product and
package. Containers can be made from many materials including, but
not limited to, plastic and cardboard. Containers serve many
purposes, some nonlimiting examples include: a way to comarket or
give away devices, implements, and/or additional items, including
educational elements as described herein above, with the wrinkle
control product that make the wrinkle spray product easier, more
convenient, or more acceptable for use by the consumer. Such
containers tend to increase `facing` or shelf space at the point of
sale to increase consumer awareness of the product.
[0675] Educational Information
[0676] Educational information can be used both to communicate the
product information discussed above and also to increase the size
of the entire container to be sold. Information included with the
container can be provided in a variety of ways including, but not
limited to, visual and/or audio compact disks, visual and/or audio
tapes, printed media that surround or partially surround the
wrinkle spray package.
[0677] b) Store Displays
[0678] Store displays both increase the shelf presence of the
product on and critically move beyond the shelf to capture the
consumers' awareness and direct it to the wrinkle control products.
Preferably, store displays are interactive, interesting and
compelling to the consumers' senses to keep the consumers'
attention on the product for a longer period thereby increasing the
likelihood that consumer awareness of the product will increase.
Displays preferably comprise sensory media presentations that
engage as many of the consumers' senses as possible. Interactive
displays are also preferable as such displays can allow the
consumer to tailor the dissemination of information to their own
daily life, habits and preferences, thus increasing the likelihood
that the consumer will appreciate the efficacy and relevancy of the
product. Non-interactive displays are also suitable for the present
invention. Some nonlimiting examples of store displays that
surprisingly increase consumer awareness and direct it to products
are disclosed herein below for use in the present invention.
[0679] i) Architectural Elements
[0680] Architectural elements can surround the product and draw
consumer attention to the product by virtue of providing a visual
discontinuity in the store shelving. Preferably, these are unique
enough to cause a consumer to look and/or remember the presence of
the product and even more preferably to draw the consumer to the
product and most preferably to stimulate a purchase. Architectural
elements can comprise a multitude of graphical, printed, and
pictorial information.
[0681] ii) Visual Media
[0682] Visual media including print and pictorial information on
the shelf, around the product or somewhere in the store which
preferably identifies, the product, leads the consumer to the
product and disseminates product information as well as any other
educational information useful to the consumer. These can be
encompassed in signage such as posters, advertisement boards, aisle
flags, floor mats, etc. Visual media can also be encompassed in
videos run on constant loop to disseminate educational elements
and/or videos that are interactive with the consumer as well as
computers that provide links to relevant information. Visual media
can also include brochures that the consumer may take home.
Preferably, print used in this displays will be large enough to be
easily read. If print is present on shelves, poster boards or aisle
flags, it is preferable for it to be large enough to be easily read
some distance away and also while the consumer is moving.
[0683] iii) Kiosks and Vending Machines
[0684] Kiosks and vending machines are small stand alone units that
are independent of stores with larger area space. Such units are
typically ideal for targeting particular consumers. The fact that
these can be automated makes them ideal for non-traditional
distribution sites for fabric care product as well, such as
airports, college campuses, bars, restaurants, physical fitness
facilities, public restrooms, walkways in malls, strip malls,
parks, public and private facilities, recreational centers,
community centers, etc. Kiosks and vending machines would
preferably have provisions for disseminating educational
information.
[0685] c) Live Drama
[0686] In live drama, product awareness is created when a group of
actors perform a skit at point-of-sale. Skits also serve to
surprise and entertain the consumer and therefore create higher
awareness of the product. Preferably, skits are performed at times
of peak traffic through the point-of-sale.
[0687] d) Seasonal Promotions
[0688] Seasonal promotions are a useful way to create awareness
because these tie the need for the product together with an event
in the consumers life. For instance, back-to-school promotions are
useful for alerting parents to the opportunities to use product for
children's school clothes and uniforms and also the opportunity to
provide the product to students returning to college.
Back-to-school promotions can also capture the attention of
adolescent and college-age consumers who are image conscious, but
pressed for time and/or not adept at domestic processes. 2)
Increasing Awareness Electronically
[0689] a) Marketing via Computer Networks
[0690] Computer networks and particularly global computer networks
are an inexpensive means of increasing product awareness
electronically. Additionally, studies have shown that the internet
and global computer networks can reach audiences that have a lower
than normal interest in traditional electronic media, such as
television. A report by Nielsen Media Research entitled TV Viewing
in Internet Households compiled in May 1999 from data sources such
as National People Meter data and Nielsen/Net Ratings shows that
homes with access to internet contain lighter TV viewers.
Therefore, surprisingly, computer network marketing can be reaching
consumers not necessarily engaged by television advertising.
Computer network marketing can take on various forms as disclosed
below. Computer network marketing is an ideal way to reach
consumers in a dynamic fashion, because it can be easily rearranged
and lends itself well to seasonal promotions.
[0691] i) Homepage/Website for Product
[0692] The homepage/website for the product is a place consumers
can visit to learn more about wrinkle control composition and their
use. This interaction can take many forms including education,
tailored information and advice through virtual interaction with
the consumer, virtual demontrations, instructions for use, chat
rooms for consumers to trade usage tips, and a location to acquire
samples, and buy product. Preferably, the home page would comprise
1) a convincing demonstration of product performance and 2)
instruct the consumer as to successful methods for using the
product. In addition, the website can provide consumers with
information on where to buy product, other sources of product
information such as consumer helpline numbers, and offer
opportunities for consumer to join clubs that provide incentives
and to suggest effective new ways to use the product.
[0693] ii) Advertising on the Internet Away from Homesite
[0694] Advertising on Internet away from the homesite can be
accomplished via banner advertising. Banner advertisements are
those that are run on the internet at other websites. Preferably,
the banner advertisement attacts attention and is engaging and
amusing. Also, preferably, the consumer can reach the home website
by selecting the banner advertisement in some way for instance by
clicking the banner advertisement. Comarketing wrinkle control
compositions with other products on the internet is also possible.
Preferrably, the comarketing program will provide the consumer with
ways to interact with the said composition and/or articles of use
as disclosed above in section 2)a)I and/or provide a hot link to
the homesite of the said composition and/or articles of use.
[0695] iii) Viral Diffusion
[0696] When using internet marketing it is surprisingly effective
to disseminate the homepage website address for the said
composition on labels, literature, billboards, point-of-sale
displays, and advertising in other forms of electronic media, e.g.
radio and television. Additionally, information about products may
be distributed via viral diffusion on the internet. Viral diffusion
is effectively a modern, highly efficient, electronic version of
word-of-mouth advertising. Preferably, viral diffusion involves
giving an incentive to consumers to encourage them to recruit other
consumers to increase product awareness by passing along
information to others. Some nonlimiting examples of information
include a website link, a hotlink a banner advertisement, a product
demonstration, product information, etc. Even more preferably, the
content of the educational message would be closely controlled by
asking consumers to diffuse a website address or hotlink that
connects subsequent consumers to a site controlled by the
manufacturer so as to assure that the appropriate information is
communicated. Some typical nonlimitng examples of incentives to the
consumer for diffusing infomation include couponing,
reimbursements, opportunities to enter or win contests,
entertaining messages, and free software.
[0697] iv) Club memberships
[0698] Club memberships are an effective and low cost way to
stimulate and continually renew interest in wrinkle control
products with consumers. Club memberships invite consumers to
provide information about themselves such as locations where the
consumer can be contacted, places where information and samples can
be sent to the consumer, and information about the consumers'
background, lifestyles, and preferences, especially as these
pertain to product usage. Typically, consumers would be offered
incentives to join club programs which could comprise many items
including nonlimiting examples like education, to opportunities to
join chat rooms with consumers of similar backgrounds, to free
gifts and opportunities to enter contests. The process of joining
the club or referring memberships is easy and can be offered in
many ways and places with some nonlimiting examples including
online, through the mail, with packaging, or where product is sold.
Preferably clubs would capture consumer information and use this to
improve education programs and product performance and benefits.
Preferably the online referral program is structured such that it
is not recognized as SPAM by ISP's. Preferably, personal follow-up
will occur with consumers so as to build a relationship between
consumer and marketer and product rather than remaining limited to
building a database.
[0699] b) Television and Cable Marketing
[0700] Television and cable marketing can be surprisingly effective
at targeting particular audiences. Cable television in particular
provides targeted programming to reach specific consumer groups.
Research from groups like Nielsen Media Research provide useful
guidance in selecting programming to target specific consumers.
[0701] c) Datacasting
[0702] Datacasting respresents combinations of internet and digital
broadcasting to provide a combined presentation of both digital and
internet marketing as done by Capitol Broadcasting and DTV Plus in
Raleigh, N.C. and Clear Channel in Cincinnati, Ohio as nonlimiting
examples.
[0703] 3) Targeting Non Traditional Consumer Segments
[0704] Media directed towards adolescents, men, college students,
professionals, etc.
[0705] a) Targeting Electronic Media
[0706] Internet reaches a large group of consumers that are not
necessarily accessed by television. Internet tends to be more
prevalent and/or more used in higher income homes. Homes that have
household members that use the internet surprisingly tend to view
less television. Therefore, it is surprisingly effective to
advertise and maintain a homepage on the internet for consumers who
access internet, since they will not likely be reached by other
means. Over 60 million persons in the U.S. use the internet at
least once per month and are considered active users.
[0707] Also, the content of internet sites can be highly targeted
while simultaneous reach a broad selection of the targeted group.
Advertising on certain sites can be used to attract various target
customers such as the following nonlimiting examples: for college
students www.college-scholarships.com, and www.virtualbook.com, for
adolescents to young adults, especially, but not limited to males,
the Croft Times at www.ctimes.net, for young and adolescent women,
www.fashionTV.com, for busy working parents,
www.signleparentdad.com, www.singleparents.net/spon- sors.html,
www.normotc.com (National Organization Mother's of Twins, Inc.)
[0708] b) Comarketing
[0709] Comarketing is a useful way of reaching consumers both in
the traditional target audience as well as consumers outside of
this target audience. Comarketing can occur with any other
marketing entity, virtual as well as non-virtual. Comarketing
usually involves multiple business entities working together to
make consumers aware of how their products, services, or other
offerings can be used together to provide a synergistic benefit for
the consumer. Some nonlimiting examples of comarketing programs
useful in the present invention follow. Comarketing could occur
with an organization like Tupperware, whereby Tupperware may make
an appliance, such as a laundry basket with a special holder for
wrinkle spray products and then the wrinkle spray product and the
laundry basket could be sold and/or promoted together. Stores,
outlets, websites and other distribution sites that offer products
and help for designing and organizing the home could provide
equipment for enhancing the process of treating clothes and the
perfomance of wrinkle spray could be promoted and/or sold together
with the wrinkle spray and organization equipment. A wrinkle
composition and iron designed to work together optimally could be
promoted and/or sold together. Wrinkle compositions could be
promoted in stores that specialize in clothes benefiting from this
product such as Banana Republic, Lerners of New York, Lazarus,
Parisian, Elder Berman, Sacs Fifth Avenue, Baby SuperStore, etc. In
department stores, and superstores such as Target, Walmart, J.C.
Penney, Biggs, Meijer, where clothing is sold as well as consumer
products, the wrinkle composition can be stocked both near clothes
that can benefit from product use as well in consumer product
ailses. Product could be comarketed with luggage to increase
awareness with travelers.
[0710] c) Sponsoring Organizations
[0711] Sponsoring organizations such as charities, clubs,
organizations, and scholarships is a good way to increase product
awareness and can be especially useful in targeting particluar
groups of consumers, since organizations themselves are typically
targetted towards particular groups of the population. Some
nonlimiting examples of organizations that target particular
consumers include the following: for the fashion industry and young
professionals, especially women, there are pageant scholarships
such as the Miss Texas Scholarship Pageant, Nubian International,
Inc., Miss America Scholarship Pageant, Seneca College's Fashion
Merchadising and Retail Scholarship (which may also provide
opportunities for comarketing since other groups including, but not
limited to, The Gap, The Bay, and Tommy Hilfiger sponser this
scholarship). To increase product awareness among young
professionals, sponsoring scholarships for professional training
are useful and some nonlimiting examples include The U.S. Marine
Corp. Scholarship Fund, The Thurgood Marshall Scholarship Fund,
Technical Women's Organization Scholarship; and The Actuarial
Scholarship Fund. Organizations that can be sponsored and target to
the non-traditional handicapped consumer include the following
nonlimiting examples: The Special Olympics, Clarinda M. Brueck
Handicapped Athletic Fund; Richard Newhope Center; Disability
Services, Inc.; American Association for People with Disabilities.
Especially busy consumers can be targetted by sponsoring such
nonlimiting organizations as The National Organization of Mother of
Twins Clubs; Single Parent Suppor Group (Sponsor's page found at
the following website http://www.singleparents.net/sponsors.html).
General audiences can be targeted with performances, sporting
events, and politcal rallies or gatherings.
[0712] d) Endorsements
[0713] Seeking endorsements especially from organizations that
reach the non-traditional consumer of fabric treatment products is
a desirable way to increase product awareness. Some nonlimiting
examples of preferred groups to target include the elderly (for
example through AARP), the physically challenged (for example
through the American Association for People with Disabilities),
frequent travelers (for example through AAA), and groups advocating
child safety.
[0714] 4) Targeting Non-Traditional Distribution Channels.
[0715] To make the product very successful it must be widely
available. Typically, fabric care goods are directed, marketed and
placed in distribution channels directed at the
Female-Head-of-Household. In order to increase the the succes of
the product, it is necessary to make the product available at
points-of-sale useful to other consumers as well. Such
points-of-sale can be tangible or virtual. Some nonlimiting
examples of these points-of sale include: college bookstores,
stores and convenience stores immediately surrounding college
campuses, and websites directed at college students
(Virtualbook.com) which are often frequented by younger adults
including single adults; websites, catalogues, and other
distribution routes and points-of-sale offering gift boxes for
various occasions, e.g. gift boxes for students leaving home to go
to school, gift boxes for people new to a neighborhood (welcome
wagon), airports (especially shops and lounges) frequented by
travelers, specialty stores, magazines, businesses, and websites
directed towards travelers, video arcades which are often
frequented by adolescents, clothing and specialty stores,
magazines, and websites, directed at adolescents (Banana Republic,
Champagne International). At sites where equipment for organizing
the household, closets, and laundry room are sold (e.g. Lechters,
HomeDepot, Lowe's, The Container Store) which would capture the
attention of males as well as females.
[0716] 5) Rewards Programs
[0717] Rewards programs involve giving the consumer an incentive to
initiate or to continue to use the product. Some examples of reward
programs include S&H greenpoints and frequent flyer miles. By
analogous extension, a program could be initiated for frequent
buyers and users of wrinkle control products to reinforce
incorporation in daily fabric care habits.
[0718] 6) Appropriate Pricing Strategies
[0719] There are wrinkle control products that perform
satisfactorily in the market today that could provide everyday
convenience and freedom from traditional wash process and ironing,
but these are not large thriving markets because consumers reserve
these for special use, if these are purchased at all. Pricing
surprising plays a significant role in converting these high
performing products from niche, special occasion use products, to
everyday convenience products. Typically to convert the business to
a thriving everyday use market, products should be priced such that
these are less than about 11.00 USD/500 mL of said composition,
more preferably less than about 8.00 USD/500 mL of said
composition, even more preferably less than about 5.00 USD/500 mL
and most preferably less than about 4.00 USD/500 mL of said
composition. Alternately, driving the pricing too low surprisingly
convinces consumers that the product must be low in active levels
and therefore ineffective and so it is preferred to maintain a
pricing of greater than about 1.00 USD/500 mL of said
composition.
[0720] 7) Combinations of Methods for Improving Product
Awareness
[0721] Combinations thereof of methods for imrpoving product
awareness are preferred and highly effective.
EXAMPLES OF INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE FOR CONSUMERS
[0722] The following provides some nonlimiting examples of methods
formulated as instructions for use that can be provided as written
instructions, video instructions, and/or live or virtual
demonstrations to consumers either as part of an article of
manufacture comprising a wrinkle control composition or independent
of the wrinkle control composition as a method of educating the
consumer, disseminating educational elements, and/or raising
consumer awareness related to wrinkle control products.
Example 1
[0723] Example 1 teaches the consumer to treat a shirt using a
`hang and spray` methodology. The consumer is instructed in methods
as follows. Hang the shirt up (or suspend the shirt in some other
way, such as pinning to a clothesline). If desired, a towel can be
placed on the floor to catch any composition that falls on the
floor, such as over sprays. Also, if desired, the shirt can be hung
in the bathroom and sprayed over the tub to catch over spray. If
the tub is used to catch over spray, it should be rinsed after use
to prevent accidental slipping. Pick up the wrinkle control
composition and set the triggering mechanism to the open or on
position. Hold the sprayer 8-9 inches from the front of the shirt.
Spray the shirt from top to bottom in a sweeping motion using 8-9
full strokes from the wrinkle spray package. Sleeves and collars
receive 1-2 full strokes from the wrinkle spray package. The shirt
should appear damp, but not wet. Grab the shirt with both hands at
the top and at the bottom and gently give a few quick horizontal
tugs, preferably at least three, tugging at both sides of the shirt
and in the middle. Next grab shirt with both hands at the sides and
near the sleeves and gently give a few quick vertical tugs,
preferably at least three, tugging at the top of the shirt and
moving down to tug in the middle of the shirt and then at the
bottom of the shirt. Tug the sleeves to remove any remaining
wrinkles. Smooth the collars by sliding between the fingers to
press the area. Smooth any areas that remain wrinkled with hands or
finger tips.
Example 2
[0724] Example 2 teaches consumers to smooth wrinkles out of
garments or fabrics as these is sit on a surface that is preferably
flat and preferably horizontal. Place a towel or other item on the
site where the fabric will be sprayed, to catch over spray, if
desired. If desired, a towel or other item can also be placed on
the floor to catch over spray. Spread the fabric onto the flat
surface. Pick up the wrinkle control composition and set the
triggering mechanism to the open or on position. Hold the sprayer
8-9 inches from the front of the fabric. Spray the product over the
surface using a sweeping motion. Typically, it is useful to start
at the top of the fabric and spray across the fabric in a sweeping
motion and then gradually move down to the bottom of the fabric.
While sweeping across the fabric, one full stroke from the sprayer
should be administered at least at about every six inches. The
fabric should appear damp but not wet. To smooth, slide hands over
the shirt using light pressure. If needed the fabric can be tugged
to remove remaining wrinkles. If some wrinkles are not easily
removed, spray these sites again, concentrating more of the wrinkle
control composition on these sites and tug preferably both
perpendicularly to and parallel to the wrinkle. If the fabric has
creases that are desired to remain in the fabric (e.g. pleats, or
the crease in the front of the pants) these can be reinforced by
pinching these between the fingers and pulling the fingers along
the pleat or crease. Leave the fabric flat or hang to dry.
Example 3
[0725] Example 3 is intended to teach consumers to treat household
fabrics in their typical environment. After the household fabric is
washed or whenever it becomes wrinkled through use, the wrinkle
control spray can be used to remove wrinkles while the household
fabric remains in its typical environment. This saves the time of
removing the household garment from its typical environment and
finding someplace else to treat the household fabric that has
enough space to make the process convenient. Curtains can be
treated while these hang on the wall. First close the curtains.
Next set the wrinkle composition sprayer to open or on. Spray
composition on the curtains using full strokes. Start at the top
and sweep the spray downward spraying at least at each six inch
interval and then move horizontally to the next part of the curtain
spraying in a sweeping motion up and down the curtain until the
entire curtain is treated. Alternately, start at the top of the
curtain and spray horizontally across the curtain using a sweeping
motion, and spraying with full strokes at least at every six inches
and move downward spraying in a sweeping motion across the curtain
horizontally while moving downward toward the bottom of the
curtain. The curtain should appear damp, but not wet. Pull large
wrinkles out of the curtains and allow curtains to hang on rods
while these dry. For heavier curtains which require more than about
30% by weight of a wrinkle composition that contains at least about
50% water it may be necessary to remove curtains from rods to treat
these as the increased weight when composition. Reasonable care
should be exercised to prevent over spray, but if over spray
occurs, it should be wiped up after use. If over spray does remain
on the surface and dry, it can be removed with water. A similar
process of treating household fabrics in their environment can be
employed with bed spreads, table clothes, pillowcases, shower
curtains, etc. When the surfaces associated with or part of the
environment of that is the typical environment of the household
fabric are easily damaged by water or liquids (e.g. wood)
reasonable care should be exercised to prevent over dampening the
household fabrics and thereby dampening the surfaces in the
environment of the household fabric.
[0726] IV. Article Of Manufacture
[0727] The present invention also encompasses articles of
manufacture comprising (1) a container having spray dispensing
means, (2) a wrinkle control composition, and (3) optionally, but
preferably, information concerning the use of the composition to
remove and/or control wrinkles in fabrics. A variety of containers,
compositions, and information can be utilized in the present
articles of manufacture as described hereinafter.
[0728] The present articles of manufacture preferably comprise
information in the form of a set of instructions that are typically
in association with the container. The set of instructions
typically communicates to the consumer methods for dispensing the
composition in an amount effective to provide a solution to
problems involving, and/or provision of a benefit related to, those
selected from the group consisting of: killing or reducing the
level of, microorganisms; reducing odors; and/or reducing static in
addition to the reduction of wrinkles. It is important that the
consumer of the present article be aware of these benefits, since
otherwise the consumer would not know that the composition would
solve these problems or a combination of these problems and/or
provide these benefits or a combination of benefits.
[0729] As used herein, the phrase "in association with" means the
set of instructions are either directly printed on the container
itself, packaging for the container or presented in a separate
manner including, but not limited to, a brochure, print
advertisement, electronic advertisement, and/or broadcast
communication, so as to communicate the set of instructions to a
consumer of the article of manufacture. The set of instructions
preferably comprises the instruction to apply an effective amount
of the composition, preferably by spraying, to provide the
indicated benefit, e.g., wrinkle reduction, and, optionally,
antimicrobial action, and/or anti-static effect, etc. and, also
optionally, the provision of odor control and/or reduction and to
physically manipuate the fabric to remove existing wrinkles.
[0730] A more complete disclosure of the instructions has been
provided above.
[0731] A. Containers Providing Spray Pattern
[0732] The key parameter effective in minimizing staining and
reducing dry time is in achieving a uniform distribution of the
liquid composition over the surface area of the fabric. Therefore,
containers having spray dispensing means that will provide such a
uniform spray distribution are preferred.
[0733] The uniformity of the distribution is understood to mean the
volume of product dispensed per unit of surface area and the
standard deviation in the volume deposited per unit of surface
area. It is preferred that the spray dispenser selected for use in
the methods of the present invention be capable producing an
acceptable spray pattern that falls within the limits on volume of
product dispensed per unit area and on the standard deviation in
volume per unit surface area disclosed herein. Preferred sprayers
will provide a spray pattern with a volume per unit surface area of
less than about 0.07 ml/inch.sup.2 (0.011 ml/cm.sup.2) with a
standard deviation in the volume per unit surface area of less than
about 0.056 ml/inch.sup.2 (0.0087 ml/cm.sup.2).
[0734] Examples of suitable spray dispensers that provide the
desired spray pattern that are commercially available include, but
are not limited to, the Indesco T-8500 available from Continental
Sprayers Inc. and TS-800-2 and TS-800-2E available from Calmar,
Inc.
[0735] B. Composition
[0736] An article of manufacture for use in the methods of the
present invention comprise a wrinkle controlling composition
according to the compositions described hereinbefore in Section
I.
[0737] C. Set of Instructions
[0738] As discussed hereinbefore, an article of manufacture for use
in the methods of the present invention will also comprise
information concerning the use of the wrinkle control composition
to control wrinkles without the application of heat. It is
preferred that the information provided with the composition
comprise a set of instructions in association with the container,
said instructions concerning the use the composition. The
information or instructions informing the consumer that in order to
effectively use the composition, the consumer is to apply an amount
effective amount of the wrinkle control composition to the fabrics
and to physically manipulate the fabrics in order to remove
existing wrinkles from the fabrics. Many other instructions may be
included in the information provided to the consumer and these have
been discussed in greater detail above.
[0739] As used herein, the phrase "in association with" means the
set of instructions are either directly printed on the container,
packaging for the container or presented with the container in a
separate manner including, but not limited to, a brochure, print
advertisement, electronic advertisement, and/or verbal
communication. The set of instructions preferably comprises the
instruction to apply an effective amount of the composition,
preferably by spraying, to provide the indicated benefit, e.g.
wrinkle reduction, antimicrobial action, static effect, and/or
reduction in time and/or effort of ironing and, optionally, the
provision of the main effect of odor control and/or reduction.
[0740] The set of instructions of the present articles can comprise
the instruction or instructions to achieve the benefits discussed
herein by carrying out any of the methods of using wrinkle
controlling compositions as described herein.
Example I
[0741] The following are Examples of wrinkle controlling
compositions for use with the methods of the present invention:
10 Examples 1 2 3 4 5 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5
volatile silicone 1.0 0.5 -- -- -- Silwet L-77 2.0 -- 0.5 -- --
Silwet L-7657 -- 1.0 0.25 -- -- Perfume 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.05
Distilled Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0742]
11 Compound 6 7 8 9 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Ethanol 15% --
3% 2% Isopropanol -- 12% 2% 1% Perfume 0-0.04% 0-0.04% 0-0.04%
0-0.04% Water balance balance balance balance
[0743]
12 Compound 10 11 12 13 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Ethanol 15%
-- 3% 2% Isopropanol -- 12% 2% 1% Propellant* *** *** *** ***
Perfume 0-0.04% 0-0.04% 0-0.04% 0-0.04% Water balance balance
balance balance *** Propellant can be selected from a variety of
materials
[0744]
13 Compound 14 15 16 17 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt %
SH3772.sup.1 0.2% -- -- -- SH3748.sup.1 -- 0.3% -- -- SH8700.sup.1
-- -- 0.3% -- KF354.sup.2 -- -- -- 0.2% hexylene glycol 10% -- --
-- dipropylene glycol -- 5% -- -- 3-methoxybutanol -- -- 5% --
ethanol -- -- 5% 10% perfume 0-0.02% 0-0.02% 0-0.02% 0-0.02% water
balance balance balance balance .sup.1Silicone-glycol copolymer
from Toray Dow Corning Silicone Co., Ltd. .sup.2Silicone-glycol
copolymer from Shin-Etsu Chemical Co. Ltd.
[0745]
14 Compound 18 19 20 21 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Silwet
.RTM. L7602.sup.3 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0% Isopropanol 5 -- 2.5 -- Hexylene
glycol -- 5 -- 2.5% Isoprene glycol -- -- -- 2.5%
Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- -- -- 0.5% cyclodextrin methylated -- -- --
0.75% cyclodextrin Perfume 0-0.04 0-0.04% 0-0.04% 0-0.04% Water
balance balance balance balance .sup.3Silicone-glycol copolymer
from CK-Witco.
[0746]
15 Compound 21 22 23 24 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % K-766.sup.4
1.0% 0.8% 0.5% 0.7 EtOH 8.0% 5.0% 5.0% 3.0% Stepanol WAC.sup.5 0.5%
0.7% 0.1% Neodol 25-9.sup.6 0.5% -- -- 1.0% Neodol 23-3.sup.7 -- --
1.0% -- Perfume 0-0.1% 0-0.1% 0-0.1% 0-0.1% Water balance balance
balance balance .sup.4Sodium polymethacrylate from B F Goodrich
.sup.5Sodium lauryl sulfate available from stepanol .sup.6alkyl
ethoxylate with 12-15 carbons and an average of 9 ethoxylates
available from Shell. .sup.7alkyl ethoxylate with 12-13 carbons and
an average of 3 ethoxylates available from Shell
[0747]
16 Compound 25 26 27 28 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Dow Corning
.RTM. 190 0.01% 0.1% -- -- Surfactant.sup.8 Ethanol 20% 10% 10% 20%
3M Fluorad .RTM..sup.9 -- -- 0.01 0.1% Perfume 0-0.1% 0-0.1% 0-0.1%
0-0.1% Water balance balance balance balance .sup.8Silicone glycol
copolymer from Dow Corning. .sup.9Nonionic fluorinated alkyl ester
available from 3M.
[0748]
17 Compound 29 30 31 32 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Dow Corning
.RTM. 190 0.01% 0.1% -- -- Surfactant.sup.8 Ethanol 20% 10% 10% 20%
3M Fluorad .RTM..sup.9 -- -- 0.01 0.1% Propellant*** Perfume 0-0.1%
0-0.1% 0-0.1% 0-0.1% Water balance balance balance balance
***Propellant selected from the following
[0749]
18 Compound 33 34 35 36 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Dow Corning
190 0.01% 0.1% -- -- Surfactant Ethanol 20% 10% 10% 20% 3M Fluorad
-- -- 0.01 0.1% Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.5% 1.0% cyclodextrin
methylated -- -- 1.0! 0.75% cyclodextrin Perfume 0-0.1% 0-0.1%
0-0.1% 0-0.1% Water balance balance balance balance
[0750]
19 Examples 37 38 39 40 41 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5
volatile silicone 1.0 0.5 -- -- -- Silwet L-77 2.0 -- -- -- --
Silwet L-7657 -- 1.0 0.5 -- -- Polysorbate 60.sup.(1) -- -- -- 0.5
Perfume 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.05 Distilled Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. .sup.(1)A mixture of stearate esters of sorbitol and sorbitol
anhydride, consisting predominantly of the monoester, condensed
with about 20 moles of ethylene oxide.
[0751]
20 Examples 42 43 44 45 46 47 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt %
Wt % D5 volatile silicone 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.35 1.0 1.0 Silwet L-7602
0.7 -- -- -- -- -- Silwet L-7622 -- 0.5 -- 0.7 -- 0.8 Silwet L-7604
-- -- 0.5 -- -- -- Silwet L-7210 -- -- -- 0.5 -- -- Silwet L-7001
-- -- -- -- 1.0 -- Silwet L-7600 -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 Perfume 0.1 0.1
0.05 0.1 0.03 0.05 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal.
[0752]
21 Examples 48 49 50 51 52 53 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt %
Wt % Lithium bromide 3.0 -- 2.0 1.0 2.5 -- Lithium lactate -- 3.0
-- -- -- 2.0 D5 volatile silicone 0.5 -- -- 0.25 -- -- Silicone
emulsion A.sup.(1) -- 2.0 -- 1.0 -- -- Silicone emulsion B.sup.(2)
-- -- 2.0 -- -- -- Silwet L-7210 0.5 -- -- -- 0.1 -- Silwet L-7602
-- 0.1 -- -- 0.1 -- Silwet L-7622 -- -- 0.1 0.4 -- -- Perfume 0.1
0.03 0.03 0.05 0.03 -- Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. .sup.(1)DC-2-5932 silicone microemulsion (25% active) from Dow
Corning, with a particle size of about 24 nm, a cationic surfactant
system, and a silicone with an internal phase viscosity of about
1,200 cps. .sup.(2)DC-1550 silicone microemulsion (25% active) from
Dow Corning, with a particle size of about 50 nm, an
anionic/nonionic surfactant system, and a silicone with an internal
phase viscosity of about 100,000 cps.
[0753]
22 Examples 54 55 56 57 58 59 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt %
Wt % Luviset CA 66.sup.(a) 0.4 -- -- -- -- -- Luviset CAP.sup.(b)
-- 0.5 -- -- -- -- Sokalan EG 310.sup.(c) -- -- 0.4 -- -- --
Ultrahold CA 8.sup.(d) -- -- -- 1.0 -- -- Amerhold DR-25.sup.(e) --
-- -- -- 0.75 -- Poligen A.sup.(f) -- -- -- -- -- 0.25 Silwet
L-7600 0.15 -- -- -- -- -- Silwet L-7602 -- 0.25 -- 0.2 0.4 --
Silwet L-7604 -- -- 0.2 -- -- 0.15 Neodol 23-3 0.1 -- -- 0.2 -- --
Diethylene glycol 0.3 -- 0.1 0.5 0.2 0.15 Perfume 0.1 0.05 0.03
0.08 0.05 0.05 NaOH/HCl to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 7 to
pH 7.2 Kathon CG 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm Distilled
water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. .sup.(a)Vinyl acetate/crotonic
acid copolymer. .sup.(b)Vinyl acetate/vinyl propionate/crotonic
acid copolymer. .sup.(c)Polyvinylpyrrolidone/acrylic acid
copolymer. .sup.(d)Ethyl acrylate/acrylic acid/N-t-butyl acrylamide
copolymer. .sup.(e)Ethyl acrylate/methacrylic acid/methyl
methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer. .sup.(f)Polyacrylate
dispersion.
Examples 60-65
[0754] The shape retention copolymer and the surfactant(s) are
added with vigorous mixing into the water seat, which is
pre-adjusted to about pH 12 using an aqueous NaOH (30%) solution.
As the copolymer is slowing dissolved, NaOH solution is added to
maintain the high pH. After about 1 hour of vigorous stirring, the
composition is adjusted with HCl to the desired pH. Finally,
diethylene glycol, perfume and Kathon preservative are added with
agitation.
23 Examples 60 61 62 63 64 65 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt %
Wt % Luviset CA 66.sup.(a) 0.4 -- -- -- -- -- Luviset CAP.sup.(b)
-- 0.5 -- -- -- -- Sokalan EG 310.sup.(c) -- -- 0.4 -- -- --
Ultrahold CA 8.sup.(d) -- -- -- 1.0 -- -- Amerhold DR-25.sup.(e) --
-- -- -- 0.75 -- Poligen A.sup.(f) -- -- -- -- -- 0.25 Silwet
L-7600 0.15 -- -- -- -- -- Silwet L-7602 -- 0.25 -- 0.2 0.4 --
Silwet L-7604 -- -- 0.2 -- -- 0.15 Neodol 23-3 0.1 -- -- 0.2 -- --
Diethylene glycol 0.3 -- 0.1 0.5 0.2 0.15 Perfume 0.1 0.05 0.03
0.08 0.05 0.05 NaOH/HCl to pH to pH to pH to pH to pH to pH 9 9 8 8
7 7.2 Kathon CG 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm 3 ppm Distilled water
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. .sup.(a)Vinyl acetate/crotonic acid
copolymer. .sup.(b)Vinyl acetate/vinyl propionate/crotonic acid
copolymer. .sup.(c)Polyvinylpyrrolidone/acrylic acid copolymer.
.sup.(d)Ethyl acrylate/acrylic acid/N-t-butyl acrylamide copolymer.
.sup.(e)Ethyl acrylate/methacrylic acid/methyl methacrylate/acrylic
acid copolymer. .sup.(f)Polyacrylate dispersion.
[0755]
24 Examples 66 67 68 69 70 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt %
Copolymer E.sup.(s) 0.5 0.3 -- -- -- Copolymer F.sup.(t) -- -- 0.6
0.4 -- Copolymer G.sup.(u) -- -- -- -- 0.5 Lithium bromide 2.0 --
-- 1.0 -- D5 volatile silicone 0.25 -- 0.2 -- 0.5 PDMS 10,000 cst
-- 0.25 -- -- -- Silicone emulsion B -- -- -- 1.0 -- Silwet L-77
0.7 -- 0.5 -- 1.0 Silwet L-7604 -- 0.25 -- 0.5 --
[0756]
25 Compound 71 72 73 74 75 Luviflex Soft.sup.1 0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0
Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel
.RTM..sup.2 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6
Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. .sup.1Ethylacrylate methacrylate
copolymer, average MW = 250,000 from BASF .sup.21,2-benzisothioaz-
oline-3-one available from Zeneca.
[0757]
26 Compound 76 77 78 79 80 Luviflex Soft 0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0
Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel
.RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 EtOH 3.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 pH 5-6
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0758]
27 Compound 81 82 83 84 85 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet
.RTM. L7001.sup.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200.sup.4 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015
0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
.sup.3Pendant copolymer of polydimethylsiloxane and
ethylene-oxide/propylene oxide with an average MW = 20,000 and an
EO/PO ratio of 60/40 available from CK-Witco. .sup.4Arabinoglactan
polymer available from Larex .RTM., Inc.
[0759]
28 Compound 86 87 88 89 90 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet
.RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
0.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest .RTM. 2006.sup.5 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12
0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. Bal. .sup.5Aminotri(methylenp- hosphonic acid) penta sodium
salt available from
[0760]
29 Compound 91 92 93 94 95 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0 Silwet
.RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
0.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest .RTM. 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12
0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0761]
30 Compound 96 97 98 99 100 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6
5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0762]
31 Compound 101 102 103 104 105 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2.0
Silwet .RTM. L7200.sup.6 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015
0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
.sup.6Pendant copolymer of polydimethylsiloxane and
ethylene-oxide/propylene oxide with an average MW = 19,000 and an
EO/PO ratio of 25/75 available from CK-Witco.
[0763]
32 Compound 106 107 108 109 110 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7200 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6
5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0764]
33 Compounds 111 112 113 114 115 Diahold ME .RTM..sup.7 0.1 0.5 1
1.5 3.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6
Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. .sup.7This material is a t-butyl
acrylate/acrylic acid/(polydimethylsiloxane macromer, 12,000
approximate molecular weight) (60/20/20), copolymer of average
molecular weight of about 128,000 available from Mitsubishi.
[0765]
34 Compound 116 117 118 119 120 Diahold ME .RTM. 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin
Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0766]
35 Compound 121 122 123 124 125 Diahold ME .RTM. 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6
5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0767]
36 Compound 126 127 128 129 130 Diahold ME .RTM. 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5
2.0 Silwet .RTM. L7200 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015
0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0768]
37 Compound 131 132 133 134 135 Diahold ME .RTM. 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5
2.0 Silwet .RTM. L7200 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 cyclodextrin Ethanol
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0769]
38 Compound 136 137 138 139 140 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel
.RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0770]
39 Compound 141 142 143 144 145 Diahold ME .RTM. 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5
2.0 Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.-
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel
.RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0771]
40 Compound 146 147 148 149 150 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001.sup.3 0.75 1.5 -- -- 0.5 Silwet .RTM. L7002 --
-- 0.8 1.0 0.5 Silwet .RTM. L77 0.5 -- 0.5 -- -- Dow Corning
Q2-5211 -- 0.30 -- 0.6 0.5 LaraCare .TM. A200.sup.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
0.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0772]
41 Compound 151 152 153 154 155 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2 245
Fluid .RTM..sup.8 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 Silwet .RTM. L77.sup.9 2.0
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 Neodol .RTM. 23-3.sup.10 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Proxel
.RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04
0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. .sup.8Decamethylcylcopentasiloxane available
from Dow Corning. .sup.9Pendant copolymer of polydimethyl siloxane
and ethylenoxide with average molecular weight of 600, available
from CK-Witco .sup.10Alkyl ethoxylate surfactant with 12-13 carbons
and an average of three ethoxylate groups available from Shell
[0773]
42 Compound 156 157 158 159 160 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2
Silwet .RTM. L77 2.5 -- -- 1.0 -- Q2-5211.sup.11 -- 2.0 -- -- --
190 Surfactant.sup.12 -- -- 1.5 -- -- 190 Surfactant.sup.13 -- --
-- 1.0 1.75 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume
0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6
5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. .sup.11Copolymer of
polydimethylsiloxane and alkylene oxide available from Dow Corning
.RTM.. .sup.12Copolymer of polydimethylsiloxane and alkylene oxide
available from Dow Corning .RTM.. .sup.13Copolymer of
polydimethylsiloxane and alkylene oxide available from Dow Corning
.RTM..
[0774]
43 Compound 161 162 163 164 165 Luviflex Soft 0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0
TEA Di-ester Quat.sup.14 0.75 0.5 1.2 1.5 1.5 Perfume 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015
0.015 0.015 0.015 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. .sup.14Fabric softener active derived from the reaction of
triethanol amine and fatty acid followed by quaternization with the
primary component named
N,N-di-(canolyl-oxy-ethyl)-N-methyl-N-(2-hydroxyethyl) ammonium
methyl sulfate, available from Goldschmidt.
[0775]
44 Compound 166 167 168 169 170 Luviflex Soft 5.0 0.5 6.0 1.5 3.0
TEA Di-ester Quat 1.8 1.0 2.0 1.75 2.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
0.015 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0776]
45 Compound 171 172 173 174 175 Luviflex Soft 0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0
DEEDMAC.sup.15 0.75 0.5 1.2 1.5 1.5 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
0.015 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
.sup.15Ditallowoyl Ethanol Ester Dimethyl Ammonium Chloride,
available from Goldschmidt.
[0777]
46 Compound 176 177 178 179 180 Luviflex Soft 5.0 0.5 6.0 1.5 3.0
DEEDMAC 1.8 1.0 2.0 1.75 2.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 pH
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0778]
47 Compound 181 182 183 184 185 Luviflex Soft -- 0.7 0.5 0.5 0.7
BC15-H 0.7 -- 0.5 0.5 -- 2-1084 Emulsion .RTM..sup.16 1.0 1.0 0.75
0.75 1.2 SM2128.sup.17 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 pH
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
.sup.16Decamethyl cyclopentasiloxane emulsified with
N-soyalkyl-2,2"iminobiehtyanol and ethoxylated octadecanamine
available from Dow Corning .RTM.. .sup.17Dimethyl siloxane
emulsified with a nonionic emulsifier available from GE
Silicones.
[0779]
48 Compound 186 187 188 189 190 Luviflex Soft -- 0.7 0.5 0.5 0.7
BC15-H 0.7 -- 0.5 0.5 -- 2-1084 Emulsion .RTM..sup.16 1.0 1.0 0.75
0.75 1.2 SM2128.sup.17 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 pH
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0780]
49 Compound 191 192 193 194 195 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200.sup.4 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015
0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0781]
50 Compound 196 197 198 199 200 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel
.RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0782]
51 Compound 201 202 203 204 205 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel
.RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5
5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0783]
52 Compound 206 207 208 209 210 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin
Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest .RTM. 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12
0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5
Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0784]
53 Compound 211 212 213 214 215 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest
.RTM. 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12
Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH
5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal.
[0785]
54 Compound 216 217 218 219 220 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest
.RTM. 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12
Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0786]
55 Compound 221 222 223 224 225 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin
Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest .RTM. 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12
0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH
5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal.
[0787]
56 Compound 225 226 227 228 229 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest
.RTM. 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Proxel
.RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0788]
57 Compound 230 231 232 233 234 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest
.RTM. 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Proxel
.RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5
5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0789]
58 Compound 235 236 237 238 239 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5
5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0790]
59 Compound 240 241 242 243 244 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4
0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015
0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. Bal.
[0791]
60 Compound 245 246 247 248 249 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4
0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015
0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5
Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0792]
61 Compound 250 251 252 253 254 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest .RTM. 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12
0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Proxel .RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH
5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal.
[0793]
62 Compound 255 256 257 258 259 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4
0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest .RTM. 2006
0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Proxel .RTM.
0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. Bal.
[0794]
63 Compound 260 261 262 263 264 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4
0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest .RTM. 2006
0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Proxel .RTM.
0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5
Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0795]
64 Compound 265 266 267 268 269 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 LaraCare .TM. A200 0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest .RTM. 2006 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12
0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0796]
65 Compound 270 271 272 273 274 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4
0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest .RTM. 2006
0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Perfume 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6
Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0797]
66 Compound 275 276 277 278 279 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7001 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.4
0.8 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Dequest .RTM. 2006
0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 0.02-0.12 Perfume 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5
5.5-6.5 5.5-6.5 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0798]
67 Compound 280 281 282 283 284 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 2.0
Silwet .RTM. L7200 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Hydroxypropyl-.beta.- 0.3
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel
.RTM. 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0799]
68 Compound 285 286 287 288 289 Luviflex Soft 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.5 3.0
Silwet .RTM. L7200 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 methylated 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
0.3 cyclodextrin Ethanol 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Proxel .RTM. 0.015
0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. Bal.
[0800]
69 Compound 290 291 292 293 294 Luviflex Soft 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 2.0
DEEDMAC 0.7 1.0 2.0 1.75 2.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 EtOH 20 3 15 15 20 3M Fluorad .RTM. 0.005 0.01
0.01 0.015 0.02 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. Fluorad is a nonionic fluorinated alkyl ester available from
3M
[0801]
70 Compound 295 296 297 298 299 Luviflex Soft 0.5 0.5 0.1 0.2 3.0
TEA Di-ester Quat 1.8 1.0 2.0 1.75 2.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 3M Fluorad .RTM. 0.005 0.015 0.01
0.005 0.02 EtOH 20 10 15 10 20 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0802]
71 Compound 300 301 302 303 304 Luviflex Soft 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 2.0
DEEDMAC 0.7 1.0 2.0 1.75 2.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 EtOH 20 3 15 15 20 Dow Corning .RTM. 190 0.005
0.01 0.01 0.015 0.02 pH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. Bal. Fluorad is a nonionic fluorinated alkyl ester available
from 3M
[0803]
72 Compound 305 306 307 308 309 Luviflex Soft 0.5 0.5 0.1 0.2 3.0
TEA Di-ester Quat 1.8 1.0 2.0 1.75 2.0 Perfume 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04
0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 Dow Corning .RTM. 190 0.005 0.015
0.01 0.005 0.02 EtOH 20 10 15 10 20 PH 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Water
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0804]
73 Examples.sup.(q) 310 311 312 313 314 315 Ingredients Wt % Wt %
Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5
Neodol .RTM. 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Silwet .RTM. L77 2.0 2.0
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 C45 AS.sup.(s) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Perfume
0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 NaOH +
HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Distilled water
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0805]
74 Examples.sup.(q) 316 317 318 319 320 321 Ingredients Wt % Wt %
Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5
Neodol .RTM. 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Silwet .RTM. L77 2.0 2.0
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 C45 AS.sup.(s) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Perfume
0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 0.02-0.03 NaOH +
HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Kathon .RTM.
0.003 0.0003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0806]
75 Examples.sup.(q) 322 323 324 325 326 327 Ingredients Wt % Wt %
Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5
Neodol .RTM. 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Silwet .RTM. L77 2.0 2.0
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Stepanol .RTM. WAC.sup.(t) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to
pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Kathon 0.003 0.0003 0.003
0.003 0.003 0.003 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0807]
76 Examples.sup.(q) 328 329 330 331 332 333 Ingredients Wt % Wt %
Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 0.5 0.5
Neodol .RTM. 23-3 0.75 0.25 1.0 0.25 0.5 0.25 Silwet .RTM. L77 1.25
2.25 1.0 1.25 0.5 0.5 C45 AS.sup.(s) 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to
pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0808]
77 Examples.sup.(q) 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 Ingredients Wt
% Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 Silicone Neodol 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
0.5 Silwet .RTM. L77 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 Stepanol .RTM.
0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 -- -- -- -- WAC.sup.(t) Biosoft .RTM. D-40.sup.(u)
-- -- -- 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 Perfume 0.025 0.03 0.025 0.03 0.03 0.025
0.03 0.025 NaOH + HCl -- to pH 9 -- to pH 8 -- to pH 8 -- to pH 8
TEA + HCl to pH 8 -- to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH 9 -- Distilled water
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0809]
78 Examples.sup.(q) 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 Ingredients Wt
% Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0
2.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 Silicone Neodol .RTM. 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 -- -- --
-- Neodol .RTM. 23-2 0.5 0.5 0.25 0.5 Silwet .RTM. L77 -- -- 0.75
-- 1.75 -- -- -- Silwet .RTM. L7280 2.0 -- 0.75 0.5 -- 1.75 1.0 --
Silwet .RTM. L7608 -- 2.0 -- 1.0 -- -- -- 1.0 Silwet .RTM. L7600 --
-- -- -- 0.25 -- -- 0.25 Silwet .RTM. L7607 -- -- -- -- -- 0.25
0.25 -- Stepanol .RTM. 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 WAC.sup.(t)
Perfume 0.02 0.03 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.025 0.01 0.015 NaOH + HCl to pH
9 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH 8 Distilled
water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0810]
79 Examples.sup.(q) 350 355 356 357 358 359 Ingredients Wt % Wt %
Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5
Neodol .RTM. 23-3 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.3 Silwet .RTM. L77 2.2 2.2
1.25 1.25 1.1 1.1 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH
+ HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Distilled
water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0811]
80 Examples.sup.(q) 360 361 362 363 364 365 Ingredients Wt % Wt %
Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5
Neodol .RTM. 23-3 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.3 Silwet .RTM. L77 2.2 2.2
1.25 1.25 1.1 1.1 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH
+ HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Distilled
water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. .sup.(s)A sodium alkyl sulfate
made from C.sub.14 and C.sub.15 chain length alcohols.
.sup.(t)Sodium lauryl sulfate. .sup.(u)Sodium dodecyl benzene
sulfonate.
[0812]
81 Examples.sup.(q) 366 367 368 369 370 380 Ingredients Wt % Wt %
Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 0.5 0.5
Neodol .RTM. 23-3 0.5 0.5 1.5 1.5 1.0 1.0 Silwet .RTM. L77 2.0 2.0
2.0 1.25 1.0 1.0 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
Diahold .RTM. ME.sup.(u) 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0 NaOH + HCl to pH 8
to pH 9 to pH 8 to pH 9 to pH 8 to pH 9 Distilled water Bal. Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
[0813]
82 Examples.sup.(q) 381 382 383 384 385 386 Ingredients Wt % Wt %
Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 0.75
Neodol .RTM. 23-3 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.3 Silwet .RTM. L77 2.0 2.0
1.7 1.25 1.5 1.1 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.03 0.025 0.025 0.025 Diahold
.RTM. ME.sup.(v) 0.25 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to pH
8 to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH 9 to pH 9 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal. Bal. Bal. .sup.(v)Acrylic acid/tert-butyl acrylate copolymer
in which a number of the acrylic acid units have been modified with
polydimethyl siloxane (PDMS). The ratio of t-butyl acrylate to
acrylic acid to PDMS modified acrylic acid units in the polymer is
approximately 3:1:1 with the number of PDMS repeat units being
approximately 100 per polymer.
[0814]
83 Examples.sup.(q) 388 389 390 391 392 393 Ingredients Wt % Wt %
Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % D5 Volatile Silicone 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.75 0.5
Neodol .RTM. 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Silwet .RTM. L77 2.0 2.0
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Stepanol .RTM. WAC.sup.(t) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
TEA Di-ester Quat.sup.(w) 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.25 Perfume 0.025
0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to
pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
.sup.(w)Di(acyloxyethyl)(2-hydroxyethyl)methyl ammonium methyl
sulfate where the acyl group is derived from partially hydrogenated
canola fatty acid.
[0815]
84 Examples.sup.(q) 393 394 395 396 Ingredients Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt %
D5 Volatile Silicone 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 Neodol .RTM. 23-3 0.5 0.5 0.5
0.5 Silwet .RTM. L77 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 Stepanol .RTM. WAC.sup.(t) 0.1
0.1 0.1 0.1 DEA Di-ester Quat.sup.(x) 0.2 0.5 -- -- DEEDMAC
.RTM..sup.(y) -- -- 0.2 0.5 Perfume 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH +
HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Kathon 0.003 0.0003 0.003 0.003
Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. .sup.(x)Di(acyloxyethyl)
dimethyl ammonium methyl sulfate where the acyl group is derived
from partially hydrogenated canola fatty acid .sup.(y)Ditallowoyl
Ethanol Ester Dimethyl Ammonium Chloride.
[0816]
85 Examples.sup.(q) 397 398 399 400 401 402 Ingredients Wt % Wt %
Wt % Wt % Wt % Wt % Starch Silwet L7001 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Silwet .RTM. L77 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
TEA Di-ester Quat.sup.(w) 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.25 Perfume 0.025
0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 NaOH + HCl to pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 to
pH 8 to pH 8 to pH 8 Distilled water Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal. Bal.
Bal.
* * * * *
References